HomeMy WebLinkAboutSpecifications (2)
CORSON HALL ROOM
E136-E142A
LAB RENOVATION
Project Manual & Specifications
May 7, 2021
Owner
Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853
Architect SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. 387 East Main Street
Rochester, New York 14604
CORSON HALL ROOM E136-E142A TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATION Page 1
Instructions to Bidders Bid Proposal Submission Form General Conditions and Exhibits Supplemental Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedule Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements Section 01 35 44 Spill Control
Section 01 35 45 Refrigerant Compliance Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 22 Fixed Equipment Inventory Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents
CORSON HALL ROOM E136-E142A TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATION Page 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 BASIC FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS 21 10 10 PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 05 23 VALVES 22 05 53 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 22 07 00 INSULATION 22 10 10 PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
22 70 10 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 04 ELECTRIC WIRING 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 07 10 INSULATION 23 09 23 BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 31 00 SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 23 37 13 REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 01 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 26 GROUNDING 26 20 00 ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 29 13 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 50 00 LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 21 00 LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 03 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM-EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
CORSON HALL ROOM E136-E142A TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATION Page 3
DRAWINGS General G-000 Cover Sheet G-001 Code Compliance Plan & Notes G-002 Atrium Wall Improvements Architectural A-000 General Notes and Legends A-101 Partial First Floor Plans - Labs E136-E142 A-420 Interior Elevations A-501 Interior Details – Lab Casework A-601 Equipment Schedule, Door Schedule & Details
A-602 Room Finish Schedule & Legend A-603 Specifications Plumbing P-000 General Notes, Symbols List, Details & Schedules - Plumbing P-100 Partial First Floor Plans – Plumbing Fire Protection
FP-100 General Notes, Symbols List & Details & Floor Plans - Fire Protection Mechanical M-000 General Notes, Symbols List & Schedules - HVAC M-101 First Floor Plans - HVAC M-200 Details - HVAC M-300 Control Schematics & System Summaries Electrical E-000 Electrical Symbols List & General Notes E-100 Partial First Floor Plan - Power E-101 Partial First Floor Plan - Lighting E-200 Electrical Details & Schedule
END OF DOCUMENT
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: Corson Hall Room E136-E142A Lab Renovation Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C. 387 East Main Street Rochester, New York 14604 1. BID DOCUMENTS The Bid Documents provided electronically by the Owner will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Proposal Certification Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements", and Supplemental Conditions. (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals.
• Pre-Bid Conference video and other materials will be available via Drop Box at: https://cornell.box.com/s/54sc19894jr8fm6c37afndvmumuqdjil Bid Documents are available electronically in the eBuilder Bid Portal under the Bid Package Invitation – Invitation Documents Tab. Dataflow, Inc. maintains the current set of Documents and all addenda and is the contracted supplier for printed plans and specifications for this project. Contact Dataflow at CUProjects@goDataflow.com. Bid Documents Terms of Use / Disclaimer - By accessing and/or using the Cornell University Document Files, You accept without limitation or qualifications, the following Terms of Use: a. Cornell University grants You the permission to use and view the Document Files subject to these Terms of Use.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2
b. Except in connection with preparing your bid, You may not modify, copy, transmit, display, reproduce, publish, license, create derivative works from, transfer, or sell any information, materials, drawings, content, products or services from the Document Files (together "Content") in any form without Cornell University's prior written permission. You may print out a copy or download Content solely for Your internal use. In doing so, you may not remove or alter, or cause to be removed or altered, any copyright, trademark, trade name, service mark, or any other proprietary notice or legend appearing on any of the Content. c. You may not provide parts of or full sets of Document Files to any planhouse or online document repositories. d. The trademarks, logos, and service marks (collectively the "Trademarks") displayed on the Document Files are registered and unregistered Trademarks of Cornell University and others. Nothing contained on the Document Files should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark displayed on the Document Files without the written permission of Cornell University or such party that may own the Trademark. Your use of the Trademarks displayed on the Document Files, or any other content, except as provided in these Terms of Use, are strictly prohibited. 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall acquaint themselves with location conditions as they exist, as well as the character of the necessary work to be carried out under the proposed Contract. A Pre-Bid Zoom meeting will be scheduled and include: a review of project related information, an opportunity to ask and receive responses to Bidder questions, and make such inquiries as are necessary to fully understand the subject facilities, physical conditions and/or restrictions attendant to the work under the Contract. b. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. c. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. d. By submitting a Bid, the Bidder covenants and affirms that the Bidder has carefully examined all of the Bid Documents including Drawings, Specifications, and the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, as well as posed any questions associated with the Site, and that Bidder is satisfied as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3
3. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or be in doubt as to their meaning, Bidder shall at once enter the item in the Q&A Board of the eBuilder Bid Portal and an Addenda with written instructions will be sent to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing and entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Q&A Board. Inquiries received in advance of the deadline established at the Pre-Bid conference will be given consideration. 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A virtual pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 9:00AM, June 3, 2021, via Zoom at: https://cornell.zoom.us/j/99375053132?pwd=Y3BWR2hxcWVNOXlaSVFBbTErcUJLUT09&from=addon In-person, on-site Pre-Bid walkthroughs will not be conducted during the Pre-Bid Conference. The Zoom meeting will be to review project related information and respond to Bidder questions. The Pre-Bid Conference is designed to assist Bidders in understanding the Contract Documents, the opportunity to pose clarifying questions or make inquiries regarding Contract Documents. Results will be published in an Addendum. 5. BID SUBMISSION Bid Submissions must include the following: a. Base Bid entered into the eBuilder Portal broken down per the Bid Scope Tab Schedule of Values (Step 1: Bid Form of the Response Form tab). b. Additional Required Information: 1. Bid Proposal Certification Form 2. Bid Bond 3. Bond Surety Company 4. Bonding Rate for Change Orders 5. Proposed Project Team and Resumes 6. Proposed Project Schedule 7. Substitutions c. Bid Proposal Certification Form: The Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be signed by the Principal(s) or Officer(s) legally authorized to bind the Bidder, and to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificates included in the Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name should be fully and accurately stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer; Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4
d. Bid Bond: Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond electronically via the eBuilder Bid Portal in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 13 below.
6. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes.
7. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes.
8. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations.
9. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax-exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 10. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal Bid Scope form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal, a list of the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5
11. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted on the form supplied with these instructions. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 12. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Base Bid shall be prepared and electronically submitted via the eBuilder Bid Portal. All required fields and attachments in the eBuilder Bid Portal must be completed. b. Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be prepared electronically submitted as an attachment via the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. c. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals shall be submitted through the eBuilder Bid Portal no later than 3:00 PM on June 22, 2021. d. Bid Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, written, electronic or telephonic proposals, or modifications will be considered. 13. BID OPENING a. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals will be opened electronically via eBuilder Bid Portal. Responsive Bid results will be posted to the Facilities Contracts website at: https://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 14. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. Award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible base bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. Contract award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors Qualification Statement.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6
d. Bidder expressly warrants and commits that its Proposal shall remain unchanged and in full force and effect at the Owner’s option for a period of not less than ninety (90) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. Bidders may submit, recall, modify, resubmit or withdraw their Bids through the eBuilder Bid Portal up until the Bid Due Date and Time. 15. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. 16. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BONDS Prior to commencement of on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. 17. START OF WORK a. Work at the site shall be started within (7) calendar days from the date of issuance of written authorization to proceed and shall achieve substantial completion of the project no later than February 1, 2022. 1. NOTE: Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall: i. Furnish the Owner with fully executed and satisfactory Payment and Performance bonds. No on-site construction activities may commence until executed and satisfactory bonds are in place for the subject project. ii. Furnish the Owner with safety plan related to COVID-19 pandemic. b. The construction schedule and completion are critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur.
18. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Bidders must acknowledge in Step 3 of the Bid Response in the eBuilder Bid Portal each Addendum and/or Bulletin issued during the bidding period.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-7
19. REQUIRED POST-AWARD SUBMISSIONS BY THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER a. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) Six-Month Workforce Projection b. Upon Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-1
CORSON HALL ROOM E136-E142A LAB RENOVATION Cornell University, Ithaca, New York
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM Vendor Name:
Type of Firm, State of Incorporation if Applicable
Street Address, City, State, Zip
Having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), Supplemental Conditions, the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated May 7, 2021 prepared by SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture D.P.C., 387 East Main Street, Rochester, New York 11604, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents. 1. Receipt of the Addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications has been acknowledged in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 2. Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (M/WBEs) Facilities and Campus Services supports Cornell University’s ongoing commitment to encourage business opportunities and diversity among its vendor community by promoting minority owned and
controlled business’ development as a shared responsibility. The University’s intention is to create and expand opportunities for minority, women, veteran, LGBTQ, small and locally owned businesses through construction labor opportunities and the procurement of goods and services. Positive good faith efforts to advance the University’s objectives shall be made by all Contractors, engaging, and maximizing these diverse enterprise goals, and to positively drive Cornell's economic impact. Cornell University Diversity Council Statement: "Cultivate partnerships with the widest spectrum of Off-Campus entities and include a fully diverse range of Off-Campus participants in Cornell's events, contracts, services, and initiatives." 3. Milestone Dates
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site within (7) calendar days after date of issuance of written notice to proceed with final completion no later than February 1, 2022. b. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. Contractor shall attach a Project Duration Schedule to this form that meets the duration established.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-2
c. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress Schedule" consistent with the agreed upon Construction Duration showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional
information related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such schedule shall be in conformance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 16, 1.3, A. 4. Proposed Principal Subcontractors a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the list submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields subject to the following provisions: i. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors" prior to the award of the Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. 5. Contractor Team: a. The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any Project Manager or Superintendent provide in the eBuilder Bid Portal submission to whom they have a reasonable objection. 6. Bonds a. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of a minimum of 10% of Bid Amount is attached to the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. b. Performance and Payment Bonds. Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the undersigned expressly agrees if awarded the Contract, to deliver to Owner executed "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such forms as are acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. c. Such bonds will be furnished by the Surety entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields d. Bonding Rate for Change Orders has been entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields 7. Bid Scope - Schedule of Values
a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating to the total Contract Sum submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-3
8. Substitutions a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions.
b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1. c. Any Substitutions are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. e. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications.
9. Acceptance
a. The undersigned agrees that the amount submitted for the Base Bid and any Alternates and Unit Pricing along with the required attachments in the Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal have been reviewed and are accurate.
b. It is understood and agreed that the Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion. c. Upon acceptance of Bidder’s Proposal, Bidder expressly agrees and affirms to hold its unchanged Bid Proposal for ninety (90) calendar days. The undersigned will execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. Nothing contained herein shall preclude Bidder and Owner from mutually agreeing upon a Contract based upon the unchanged Bid Proposal if the time elapsed from Award is in excess of ninety (90) calendar days. d. The undersigned acknowledges the following Addendum(s) (if applicable):
e. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. f. The undersigned agrees to furnish Owner satisfactory and executed Performance and Payment Bonds prior to the commencement of any Work on-site.
Addendum No. __ dated ____.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-4
g. The undersigned acknowledges as Contractor to be and remain exclusively in control of the Project site and Work, as well as the Project’s Health & Safety Plan, measures, and/or protocols, for the duration of construction activities. i. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Supplemental Conditions to the Contract surrounding Contractor Response and Health & Safety Protocols for COVID-19, or other viral, bacterial, or microbial presence (as applicable). ii. The undersigned acknowledges that no one will be permitted on the job site until the Health & Safety Plan has been submitted. The following documentation is required to be submitted electronically in the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields
This Form with Proposed Milestone Schedule – signed and executed
Bid Bond
Proposed Project Team Resume (Bidder) By: Title:
Business Address: Dated:
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-5
CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION
By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed, directly or indirectly, by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder to any other bidder or any competitor prior to opening. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (Bidder) By: Title: Dated:
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-6
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER
I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the
_____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General
Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the
bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that
his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed and
executed for and on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (Secretary-Clerk) Dated:
Rev 4-2021
G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S FOR CORSON HALL ROOM E136-E 142A LAB RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
i Rev 4-2021
GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK
Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Claims for Extra Work 11 Section 4.03 Form of Change Orders 12 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12
ii Rev 4-2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 13 Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 14 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17 Section 10.03 Emergencies 17 Section 10.04 Bonds 17 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 18 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20 Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21 Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 21 ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21
ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 22 Section 12.02 Stored Materials & Equipment 23 Section 12.03 Retention 24 Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24 Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 25 Section 12.06 Final Payment and Release 26
iii Rev 4-2021
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26 ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 27 ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27 Section 15.03 Assignments 27 Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 28 Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28 Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28 Section 15.07 Owner's Representative 28 ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 Definitions 28 Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises 28 Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan 29 Section 16.04 Reports and Records 29 ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30 ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30 ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 30 ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 Release of Information 31 Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31 Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name 31
ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 32
iv Rev 4-2021
EXHIBITS A Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary
B Final Release C Guarantee D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report E Labor Rate Breakdown F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation G Contractor Performance Evaluation
1 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner
A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the sounder technique or workmanship, or better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner directs otherwise so directs in writing.
B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern.
2 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations
A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise.
Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others or alternatives may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00. B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract,
3 Rev 4-2021
or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision(s) or redesign(s), and all new drawings and details required thereto shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner
by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the Work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time effective, responsive and competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of
any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the Contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems appropriate and adequate to account for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of Contractor bids.
4 Rev 4-2021
B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information
made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the Project Schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent, sufficiently stable to secure the required payment and performance bonds, and is sufficiently experienced in and competent to perform the subject Work or retain qualified subcontractors to perform elements of the Work pursuant to the Project’s plans and specifications; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, accounted for weather days, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work.
5 Rev 4-2021
Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or
conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner. B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions. C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should Contractor’s failure to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Contractor will have access to view and download the Bid Documents in eBuilder. B. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work with the exception of the signed Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner along with the As-Builts at the completion of the Work. Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work
The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work.
6 Rev 4-2021
Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 – Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the Work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized
representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the Work. Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any Work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided.
7 Rev 4-2021
Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and
examination of the Work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the Work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance
No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom.
8 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes
A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order and approve changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field
and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as-built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit.
9 Rev 4-2021
3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent
directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid for as overhead / general conditions to the project. Special rental equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-up Percentages 1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor: Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. The maximum aggregate of all mark-up percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%). 4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments
due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage. 5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay.
10 Rev 4-2021
6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the Contractor's profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage
include, without limit: home office expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits; cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and safety provisions; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750 7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the markup percentage will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the percentage so that a deductive change order would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes and shall constitute a full payment for both the Work covered or arising from the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any and all impacts, known or unknown, or delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor expressly waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records
relating thereto.
11 Rev 4-2021
Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work If the Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work or (ii) that it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the Owner
or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall: A. Promptly comply with such order; B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement, Article 4 of these General Condition and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within fourteen (14) calendar days after being ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra work or within fourteen (14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work, whichever date shall be the earlier, or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or omission on the part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its claim and request a determination thereof; C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30) calendar days after said alleged extra work was required to be performed or said alleged extra work was commenced, whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission by the Owner or the Architect occurred, a verified detailed statement, with documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its claim; D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon notice from the Owner, all its books of account, bills, invoices, payrolls, subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and transactions in connection with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons in its employment and in its subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person designated by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract, such examination to be made at the offices of the Contractor; and E. Proceed diligently, pending and subsequent to the determination of the Owner with respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance of the Contract and in accordance with all instructions of the Owner and the Architect. F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be deemed to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order, work, action or omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section 4.02 is to promptly afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order, change its plans, mitigate or remedy
the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such other action as may seem desirable and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances as they occur. Compliance with such provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware of the circumstances of any order or other circumstances which might constitute a basis for a claim and whether or not the Owner has indicated it will consider a claim in connection therewith. G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and, in any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner to be due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint and prove compliance with the provisions of this Section.
12 Rev 4-2021
Section 4.03 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the Owner's E-Builder
Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved as noted above and processed via E-Builder. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the dates of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the times for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure substantial and full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the times for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on the approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York;
2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather.
13 Rev 4-2021
G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or
2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work
The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor.
14 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure
A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed
to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, known or unknown, including time extensions, or damages as a result of said order, work, action, or omission.
15 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting
A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors.
C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work.
16 Rev 4-2021
E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any
damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational
disease, public health statistics or information, and injury requiring medical attention, pursuant to government authority, or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents that had the potential to result in serious injury or death. The Contractor shall upload all completed Contractor and Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days of the incident. The report shall include the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information required by Cornell University. Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder Accident Form.
17 Rev 4-2021
C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (e.g., special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for
review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. 4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without waste) to be submitted with submission of the first payment. The form can be found at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resource-files/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract.
Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken.
18 Rev 4-2021
Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply
the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default on the part of the Contractor. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work including, but not limited to, bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent they arise out of or result from: 1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional or willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification obligation under this section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability benefit or other employee benefit laws. B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses to fully comply with and honor its indemnification obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost, including reasonable attorneys' fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification obligations. C. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final
acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000.
19 Rev 4-2021
2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations
under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the Work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors.
20 Rev 4-2021
D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and
shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense.
Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner
A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract.
Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards
A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty
(30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work
21 Rev 4-2021
together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incidental to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature. Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent
that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction.
22 Rev 4-2021
Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment
and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, as shown in the E-Builder Schedule of Values Process, when approved by the Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule.
2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a statement and all applicable documentation setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment
23 Rev 4-2021
of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit,
executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of certified payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the E-Builder Payment Application Process. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor. 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder. Approval of the Payment Application by the Architect shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Section 12.02 – Stored Materials & Equipment A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days after contract
approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written request to Cornell University for permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated into the work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as those items affecting project schedule or budget as determined by Cornell University's evaluation of the project schedule. This includes finished goods normally shipped to the job site in a condition ready for incorporation into the work that require significant time for delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible for such consideration unless the Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save money by purchasing material in bulk quantities at the beginning of the project.
24 Rev 4-2021
B. Cornell University will be under no obligation to accept such requests. C. Payment authorized by Cornell University for such "long-lead" critical materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made provided the Contractor submits
Exhibit H and complies with the following: 1. Items shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on the Application for Payment. 2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for Payment. 3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the Contractor's request to invoice for such materials and equipment. Cornell University shall give prior approval of the location of off-site storage. Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their integrity (temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such an environment. 4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University, and a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the Application for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary insurance on items in storage. 5. A written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify such inventory, including Contractor's certification that all quantities have been received in good condition at the job site or other location acceptable to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application for Payment. 6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's invoice. Packing lists will not be accepted. D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage by physical inspection prior to payment approval and at any time thereafter. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly installing the equipment or materials. The Warranty and Guarantee period shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of the completed work by Cornell University. The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and
equipment incorporated into the Work. F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work, materials, and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property of Cornell University. Partial payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by Cornell University, nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim by Cornell University. Section 12.03 – Retention
25 Rev 4-2021
A. Retention in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the value of the Work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.06.
B. Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application thereof, release retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding claims associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an acceptable partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the project is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well. Section 12.04 - Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of contemporaneous or subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As-Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction
differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications.
26 Rev 4-2021
b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto.
c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23. f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and sub-subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable.
D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor.
27 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption
A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS
Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract and made a part hereof, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract
28 Rev 4-2021
The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such
purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.07 - Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative (Patrick Conrad) shall be recognized by the Contractor. ARTICLE 16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 – Definitions
The terms "Minority-owned business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section 310 of the New York State Executive Law, as the same may be from time to time amended. Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises
29 Rev 4-2021
A. The Contractor shall, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provision of the Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate with the Owner in the implementation of MBE and WBE programs. These requirements include equal employment opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities for
certified minority and women-owned business enterprises (“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination provisions required by New York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws. B. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every Agreement and/or Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon each subcontractor and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement. C. For purposes of this procurement: Facilities and Campus Services supports Cornell University’s ongoing commitment to encourage business opportunities and diversity among its vendor community by promoting minority owned and controlled business’ development as a shared responsibility. The University’s intention is to create and expand opportunities for minority, women, veteran, LGBTQ, small and locally owned businesses through construction labor opportunities and the procurement of goods and services. Positive good faith efforts to advance the University’s objectives shall be made by all Contractors, engaging, and maximizing these diverse enterprise goals, and to positively drive Cornell's economic impact. Cornell University Diversity Council Statement: "Cultivate partnerships with the widest spectrum of Off-Campus entities and include a fully diverse range of Off-Campus participants in Cornell's events, contracts, services, and initiatives." Section 16.03 – Reports and Records A. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Reports when requested
by the Owner. 1. MWBE Utilization Report 2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report B. The Contractor shall submit an Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a single monthly report, or as requested by the Owner, inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor and such report must document the use of MWBE businesses in the Contract.
30 Rev 4-2021
ARTICLE 17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files
used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project. ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner may schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached “Contractor Performance Evaluation”, Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 19 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 - Release of Information The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news
releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager.
31 Rev 4-2021
Section 20.02 - Confidential Information The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell
University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 20.03 - Use of Owner's Name on Non-Work Related Content The Contractor shall not use or permit on the job site, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other content unrelated to the Contracted Work, or any representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the -resentative. ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within
the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077.
32 Rev 4-2021
CORNELL UNIVERSITY Construction Contract Change Order Forms
Instructions to Change Order Documentation
Cornell University has several standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard Construction Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to facilitate preparation of change order requests in conformity with construction contract requirements. These forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration and shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request.
Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate as entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields at time of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract.
EXHIBIT "A"
EXHIBIT "A"
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY
DATE:
PCO #
PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1 DIRECT COST OF WORK:
NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TO TAL
PERFORMING WORK COST
TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0
TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B"
FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS
Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title:
Date Contract Date
Project Contract Price
Address Net Extras and Deductions
City Adjusted Contract Price
County Amount Previously Paid
State Balance Due - Final Payment
The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract.
In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: . The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "C"
GUARANTEE
Date:
In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell
University dated , we hereby guarantee
the as found in the specifications
for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title)
from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from
, the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) (COMPANY) By: Title:
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
1
MWBE Utilization Report
PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION e-Builder Project No. Project Name: Contract Value:
Contractor Name and Address:
Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date:
Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number, Email:
PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit) Subcontractor Name, Address, Contact, Email, MBE or WBE
(List your firm if also MBE or WBE)
Federal ID Number Dollar Value of Contract or Purchase Order
Description of Work or Supplies Subcontractor or Supplier Start and End Dates
(Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list) Print Name of Principal or Officer: Title:
Signature: Date:
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
2
MWBE Utilization Report
PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors fill this out and submit to General Contractor to compile into a single form.) Double click on table to edit. Month/Year:
General Contractor, Subcontractor, Sub-
Subcontractor, or Vendor Trade
Dollar Value of
SubContract or
Purchase Order
MBE,
WBE, or
N/A
% of Total
Contract
TOTALS 0 0
EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II
SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS
Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT:
Name of Prime Contract Bidder:
Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code):
Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number):
MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination
EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary)
OFFICER OF FIRM:
Name and Title: Date:
Signature:
EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III
EXHIBIT "E"
LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN
PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:TRADE:
EFFECTIVE DATE:
EXPIRATION DATE:
Base Hourly Rate:$
Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour
F.I.C.A.
Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work)
State Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work)
*Worker's Compensation
*Bodity Injury & Property Damage
Disability
TOTAL %
Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % =$
*
Supplemental Benefits $ per Hour
Vacation
Health & Welfare
Pension
Annuity
Education / Training
Industry
Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $
Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe Benefits $
Adjustment for a composite rate which includes apprentices:$
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
Signature of Authorized Representative:
Print Name:
Print Title:
I certify that the labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance
with actual and true cost incurred.
Rates are net Contractor cost after premium discounts and experience
modifications have been applied against manual rate.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "F”
STORED MATERIALS INVOICING
DOCUMENTATION
PROJECT TITLE:
CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:SUBCONTRACTOR:
REASON FOR REQUEST:
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________DATE:
1 Material Identification
Description:
Quantity:
Provide Specific Location of Materials Stored:
2 Material Value
Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value.$
3 Certificate of Insurance
Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name
"Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials.
4 Transfer of Title
The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the
time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains
responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and
providing of all warranties.
Signed:
Date:
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "G"
Contractor Performance
Evaluation
Project Information
Project Name:____________________________________________Date Of Evaluation___________________
Project Number___________________________Evaluators;
Project Team_____________________________
Campus_________________________________
Project Start Date_________________________Substantial Completion________________
Contractor______________________________________________Prequalification Status_________________
Original Contract Amount__________________________________Total Change Order Amount_____________
Contractor Project Manager___________________________________________Initial Evaluation_____
Contractor Superintendent____________________________________________Final Evaluation_____
Type Of Contract
Prime Contractor___Subcontractor___Construction Manager___
Project Comments/Description
Performance Evaluation
Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating.
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
1 Quality of Workmanship
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to quality of work
a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications
b. Workmanship quality and accuracyc. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity
d. Equipment - sufficient quantity and operating condition
e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel
Comments:
2 Scheduling/Productivity
Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and
meeting contract schedules and milestones
a. Project schedule quality and completenessb. Controlling of project schedule
c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule
d. Material deliveries to support project schedulee. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones
f. Productivity of work force
g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues.
Comments:
3 Subcontractor Management
Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating
subcontractors(if no subcontractors rate overall management performance)
Comments:
3A Major subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation
For contractor information only
a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
b. HVAC Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
4 MBE/WBE Participation
Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation effort and participation for this
project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors
Comments:
5 Safety
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safetya. Timely submission of site specific safety program
b. Knowledge of OSHA standards
c. Implementation of safety rules and regulationsd. Promotion and creation of safety awareness
e. Daily overall housekeeping
f. Safety record
g. Response to safety concerns
h. Awareness of public safety
Comments:
6 Contract Administration
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract
administration as per criteria below
a. Timely submission of complet and correct
documentation required for insurance and bond
b. Change order processing
c. Timely submission of RFI's, Shop Drawings,
and change orders
d. Subcontractor payments made promptlye. Timely submission of complete and correct payment
applications
f. Quality of paperwork
Comments:
7 Working Relationships
Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties
(Cornell, Design Team, subcontractors,ect.)
Comments:
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
8 Supervisory Personnel Rating
Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory
personnel and project management staff
Comments:
9 Contract Close-Out
Rate this contractor's overall ability to efficiently close out the project
a. Timely completion of all punchlist items
b. Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders
c. Timely submission of all close out documents(O&M's,
As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety)
d. Quality of close out documentation and timely completion
of any outstanding audit questionsComments:
Summary Sheet
Project:___________________________________________
Contractor:________________________________________
Rating Per Weight
Performance Categories Category %Scoring
1 Quality of Workmanship 0 15.00%0
2 Scheduling 0 10.00%0
3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00%0
4 MBE/WBE Participation 0 10.00%0
5 Safety 0 10.00%0
6 Contract Administration 0 10.00%0
7 Working Relationships 0 10.00%0
8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00%0
9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00%0
Over All Rating 0
Rating Reference
Fails to achieve expectation 1
Needs improvement 2
Fully achieves expectation 3
Frequently exceeds expectation 4
Consistently exceeds expectatio 5
OWNER COMMENTS:
OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings:
CONTRACTOR COMMENTS:
(To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting)
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT PATHOGENS CONTAGIONS COVID-19
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
PROTOCOLS AND SAFETY REQUISITES TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY APPLICABLE
TO PATHOGENS, CONTAGIONS AND/OR COVID-19 VIRUS
In response to the public health emergency for the COVID-19, requirements, recommendations and
guidelines from civil authorities including, but not limited to, New York State Executive Orders, CDC,
OSHA and New York State Department of Health (herein after referred to as “COVID-19 Authorities and
Guidelines”) surrounding health and safety measures designed to eliminate or reduce the transmission of
the COVID-19 virus, these Supplemental Conditions are provided for guidance for construction related
work. Contractors and businesses are further required to comple with applicable “COVID-19 Authorities
and Guidelines” mandatory directives and health and safety practices issued.
1.0 These Supplemental Conditions apply to the current COVID-19 pandemic, but may also apply to
any existing or future pathogen or contagion impacting construction activity and necessitating
protective health and safety measures for worker safety, the general public, and any personnel
connected to the advancement of Work on this, or any applicable project.
1.1 The purpose of this document is to set forth recommended elements and practices to
safeguard the public and all persons connected to each project for Cornell University.
1.2 The direction from “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” are applicable to businesses,
entities, and services, and they must comply with the most recent direction. Contractor
obligations include modification of all their existing protocols and practices as necessary
to adhere to the most current modifications to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”.
2.0 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions
and General Requirements are unchanged. Nothing contained herein shall alter or modify the
Contractor’s exclusive control over the job site, subcontractors, project labor, Health & Safety
Plans, Protocols, Measures, or the Contractor’s exclusive control over the methods and means
associated with any and all of the foregoing elements.
2.1 Cornell University possesses neither control nor any right of control over the job site,
project labor, health & safety practices or programs, or methods and means of advancing
the Contracted Work.
2.2 These Supplemental Conditions are provided to the Contractor for the attainment of
Contractor’s fully compliant health and safety measures and practices communicated by
applicable civil authorities as requirements, recommendations, and/or guidance necessary
to engage in qualifying construction activities.
2.3 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General
Conditions and General Requirements shall remain and include, but not limited to:
2.3.1 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required at all times to guard
the safety and health of all persons on and in the vicinity of the work site
2
2.3.2 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required to comply with all
applicable rules, regulations, codes, and bulletins of the New York State
Department of Labor and the standards imposed under the Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended (“OSHA”) and New York State
Executive Orders
2.3.3 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are also required to comply with
all applicable job site safety requirements
2.3.4 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must comply with all County,
City or State of New York safety requirements for projects within the City or State
of New York constructed in accordance with the applicable Building Code, and
contractors are required to provide written Safety Plans for the site demonstrating
how all applicable safety requirements are to be implemented for all elements of
the Work for the duration of the contract.
3.0 Contractors, their subcontractors and suppliers, and workers are required to adhere to “COVID-19
Authorities and Guidelines” to prevent or limit the possible exposure or spread of COVID-19,
pathogens, or contagions (as applicable).
3.1 To that end, Contractor shall develop a written Health & Safety Plan related to the
protective measures and protocols Contractor shall employ on the Project in response to
“COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” necessary to manage and mitigate the exposure
or transmission of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable).
3.2 This Plan shall be submitted to the Owner prior to start of Construction Activity on the
Campus. Owner’s receipt of the subject Plan is to document that measures and practices
are in place, not for substantive review or approval.
3.3 Health and safety practices constitute a continuing compliance obligation, Contractors and
their subcontractors and suppliers must remain current with, and immediately implement
updated health and safety protocols and practices as they are published. The Campus may
request updated elements of the Contractor’s written safety plan to address evolving best
practices for measures and/or practices of the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”.
3.4 The Contractor must notify Cornell immediately upon discovery of any employees of their
firm, or subcontractors, or suppliers that are, or have been working on the Cornell Campus
that have been confirmed to have COVID-19 contagion.
4.0 Guidance & General Recommendations for Inclusion in the Plan:
4.1 Information for local health departments can be found at www.health.ny.gov
4.2 OSHA Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for COVID-19 can be found at
www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf
4.3 Comply with all OSHA requirements in accordance with the Hazard Communication
(Global Harmonization) Standard at https://coronavirus.health.ny.gov/home
4.4 Centers for Disease Control -- https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/index.html
3
5.0 Project Closure:
5.1 Where work is suspended on a project, contractors are directed to follow any additional
project shut-down protocols as provided by the Owner. Including, but not limited to,
photographs, securing the work site and project status narrative.
6.0 Contractor expressly agrees to fully comply and remain exclusively responsible for the
implementation of applicable Contractor Health and Safety Protocols and Measures as set forth in
applicable and then current Guidance for Construction Activities. Express Contractor agreement to
the foregoing and Contractor submission of the Plan are conditions precedent to engage in any on-
site construction activity.
MAY 7, 2021
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR CORSON HALL ROOM E136-E142A LAB RENOVATION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK ....................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS ........................................................... 2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 2
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 2
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .................................................................................. 1 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES ................................................................ 1 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ................................................................................. 2 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION ............................................................................ 2
1.5 PARKING .............................................................................................................. 2
1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................. 3
1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION............................. 4 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS ..................................................................... 5 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ......................... 5 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. .................................... 5
1.11 STAND DOWN DATES ...................................................................................... 6
1.12 WORKING HOURS ............................................................................................. 6
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 6
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 6
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................... 2
1.4 PRODUCTS LIST ................................................................................................. 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2 1.6 PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 3 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL .......................................................... 3 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS .............................................................................. 4
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS ................................................................................................ 6
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS ............................................................................. 7
1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ............................................................ 8 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ...................................................................................... 8
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 8
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 8
MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ........................................................................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING ................................................................... 1
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ..................................................................................... 3 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)........................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT .................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ........................................................................................ 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.4 PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 1 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 2 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ........................................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ......................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................... 1
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ............................................................................. 1
1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS .................................................................................... 2
1.5 SUBMISSIONS ..................................................................................................... 3
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 DISTRIBUTION ................................................................................................... 3
SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ......................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 1
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 1
3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS...................................................... 1 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS ............................................................................ 1 3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS ......................................................... 2
MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ............................................................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE .................................................. 1
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .............................................................................................. 3 1.4 PRODUCT DATA ................................................................................................ 3 1.5 SAMPLES.............................................................................................................. 4
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS ...... 5
1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ......................................................................... 6 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES .............................................................. 9 1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES .......................................................................... 10 1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS .................................................................................. 11
1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS............................................................... 12
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES .................................................................................... 12
1.13 DISTRIBUTION ................................................................................................. 13
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED........................................................................................... 13
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ........................................................................................ 13
SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY...................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ..................................... 1 1.3 ASBESTOS ........................................................................................................... 2 1.4 LEAD ..................................................................................................................... 3
1.5 MERCURY COLLECTION................................................................................. 3
1.6 ANIMAL USE FACILITIES-HAZARD COMMUNICATION ....................... 3 1.7 SITE VISITS.......................................................................................................... 3 1.8 CONFINED SPACE ............................................................................................. 3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ........................................................................................ 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................... 2 1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION .................................................................................. 2
1.6 DUST CONTROL ................................................................................................. 2
1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ....................................................... 2 1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK .................... 3 1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS ......................................................... 4 1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ......................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL ................................................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION .......................................................................................... 1
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES .................................................................... 1
1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................. 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 35 45 REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE ...................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.3 RECORD DOCUMENTS .................................................................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 2
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 2
3.1 LEAK TESTING ................................................................................................... 2
3.2 DEMOLITION PROCEDURE FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVED BY CONTRACTOR .................................................................................................... 3
MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES ................................................................................ 1
1.2 INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.3 COMPLIANCE ..................................................................................................... 2 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 2
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 2
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ....................................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ........................................................ 1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS .................................................................................. 2
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 2
1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS .................................................................................... 4 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS ................................................................................. 4 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ............................................................ 5
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ........................................................................................... 17
3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ......................................................................................... 17
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL.......................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION .................................................... 1
1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS ........................................................ 2
1.4 TESTING ............................................................................................................... 3
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................... 3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3
MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ............................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ....................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................... 1 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES........................................................... 1 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION.................................................................. 1
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ..................................................................................... 3
2.5 SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................ 3 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES ........................................................................... 4 2.7 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ........................... 4
2.8 SECURITY ............................................................................................................ 5
2.9 FIELD OFFICES ................................................................................................... 5
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 PREPARATION.................................................................................................... 5 3.2 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 5
3.3 REMOVAL ............................................................................................................ 6
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ................................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ....................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................... 1 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER ........................... 1 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR ................................................................ 2 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION ................................................... 3
2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................. 4
2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES ......................................................... 4
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 REMOVAL ............................................................................................................ 4
MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION........................................................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING .......................................................... 1
1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE ............................................................................................ 1 1.4 CAMPUS SITE/PALM ROAD STORAGE........................................................ 2 1.5 PROTECTION ...................................................................................................... 3
1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ......................................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING .................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2 1.4 WARRANTIES ..................................................................................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 4
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 INSPECTION ........................................................................................................ 4 3.2 PREPARATION.................................................................................................... 5 3.3 PERFORMANCE.................................................................................................. 5
3.4 CLEANING ........................................................................................................... 7
SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT ....................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 2
1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ............................................................................................... 3
1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................... 3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY.................................................................. 1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3
MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA .................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................... 1
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL ................................................................................... 2 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES............................................... 3 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS .............................................. 4
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 6
1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ............................................... 6 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.......................................................................... 7
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 7
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 7
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ............................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2
1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 2
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 3 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED ................................................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................... 4
3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS..................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS ..................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES................................... 1 1.3 RECORDING ........................................................................................................ 1 1.4 SUBMITTAL ........................................................................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
CORSON HALL ROOM SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 11 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work to be Done
1. The purpose of this project is to renovate approximately 1,000 GSF of the first floor of Dale R. Corson Hall to accommodate research involving the developmental mechanisms that give rise to new animal traits as a means to understand the processes driving the evolution of biodiversity. This is an Academic Renovation Program on behalf of the College of Arts & Sciences comprised of, but not limited to, reconfiguring casework, updating existing infrastructure, and refreshing finishes in the spaces.
B. The Scope of the Work
1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity.
2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included.
3. It is the intent and purpose of the Contract Documents to cover and include under each item all materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions of the installation specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment, apparatus,
machinery, material and small items not mentioned in detail, and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portion of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity, highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or Work. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or materials unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
CORSON HALL ROOM SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 11 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including providing labor, materials and other costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract work with work performed under others contracts.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 11 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws and regulations.
B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times.
C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges.
D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area.
E. The Contractor shall post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required.
F. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner’s Representative.
G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work.
H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the
normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces.
J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor will take protective measures to minimize damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel
lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material storage, etc. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include lawn restoration and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work.
K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative.
L. Parking may be made available for staging at Palm Road or other pre-determined area for the duration of the project. The Contractor will be responsible for fencing, securing, and maintaining the designated area. All vehicles at Palm Road must be registered with Transportation Services.
1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES
A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement, follow their internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement, as to whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus. They should make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns, emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will not be to normal operating standards.
B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police allows you the ability to take advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification System that enables your cellphone to become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate may text the following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set up to receive alert messages. Be advised that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert. There will also be a system generated “stop” every year on August 1st at which point you will need to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist.
1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION
A. The Contractor shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions in place at the time of construction.
1.5 PARKING
A. Two (2) N permits along Tower Road in Alumni Field may be purchased from Cornell University Transportation for essential parking. Current fees for N permits are $149.32 plus tax, per permit, per month.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
B. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade persons from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary.
C. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Patrick Conrad) for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee Form” for each permit requested. This form may be found at
http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm.
D. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having jurisdiction, as follows:
1. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area.
2. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc.
3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements.
4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site.
E. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore.
1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding.
B. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased.
C. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses.
D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative.
E. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major, affecting life safety or outside contract limit lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department.
G. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative.
H. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY.
1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION
A. General
1. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS.
2. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment
locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered.
3. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes.
4. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have
been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect.
B. Interference
1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS
A. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "basis-of-design equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned.
B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions:
1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required.
2. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assumes responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades.
3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for
removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications.
1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC.
A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit
complete list to Owner. All items that Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed and salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from the site and legally disposed.
1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC.
A. Before Submitting Proposal
1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work.
2. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building.
3. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities.
B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area
1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building.
2. Inspect all adjacent work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
C. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement
1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings.
2. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding.
D. Existing or Archived Drawings
1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended in electronic format only for reference and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The Owner makes no representation as to the accuracy of the drawings as representing
current conditions.
1.11 STAND DOWN DATES
A. Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the following dates and hours is required.
1. Student and Campus Life
Residence Halls Open
August TBD, 2021 January TBD, 2021
No deliveries, no hauling materials into or out of the project site.
All work to be contained to the fenced area of the project site.
1.12 WORKING HOURS
A. Normal work hours are 7AM-dusk Monday-Saturday except during above noted restrictions. This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb campus occupants or residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 14 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO PRODUCT OPTIONS MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s control, such as unavailability of product, or regulatory changes.
a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not constitute unavailability of product.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Items salvaged from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO PRODUCT OPTIONS MAY 7, 2021
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request Form, attached hereto, for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. In addition to submission of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form with description, specification references, and corresponding change in base bid
1.4 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation.
B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number.
C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product:
1. Name and address of the manufacturer.
2. Trade name.
3. Model or catalog designation.
4. Manufacturer's data:
a. Reference standards.
b. Performance test data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with other products and construction methods.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO PRODUCT OPTIONS MAY 7, 2021
2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted substitutions and approved comparable products.
1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL
A. Equivalents or Approvals - General
1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of similar content and meaning shall for the purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A and B of this Section 1.4 and for the purposes of Bidding Documents, the word “products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”, “equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract documents one or more products are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted.
2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference to the name, trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has determined is necessary for the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is approved by the Architect in accordance with the procedures set forth in Paragraph B of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a proposed product is to be approved and the Contractor shall have the burden of proving, at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product. In making such determination the Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved.
3. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product similar and equal to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make
no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of a product similar and equal to any named product.
4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the failure of the Architect to approve a product proposed by the Contractor.
5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only from the Contractor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO PRODUCT OPTIONS MAY 7, 2021
B. Equivalents or Approvals After Bidding
1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named product cannot be obtained by the Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect for consideration of the proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior, in the opinion of
the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner, e.g., the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or the Owner determines that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction of the Project should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than
ninety (90) calendar days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract.
2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a revision or redesign
of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all new Drawings and details required therefore shall be subject to approval of the Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part of the work from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide the same at its own cost and expense.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named.
1. Products:
a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include the phrase “provide one of the following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO PRODUCT OPTIONS MAY 7, 2021
b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an
unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “provide products by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers that complies with requirements.
- Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-6 E136-E142A LAB RENO PRODUCT OPTIONS MAY 7, 2021
C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Proposal Submission Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will
be allowed.
D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form as
provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will be at the sole discretion of the Owner.
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need
for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of contract award.
C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with:
1. Completed "Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be formally submitted as such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿ is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in detail and construction of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage.
2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents:
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.
b. Manufacturer's literature; identify:
- Product description.
- Reference standards.
- Performance and test data.
c. Samples, as applicable.
d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation.
3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations.
4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-7 E136-E142A LAB RENO PRODUCT OPTIONS MAY 7, 2021
5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project.
6. List any changes required in other work or projects.
7. Designate any required license fees or royalties.
8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials.
D. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum.
E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from the Contractor.
2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier.
3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
F. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner.
G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution.
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an
unnamed product or manufacturer:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight,
size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product specified.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-8 E136-E142A LAB RENO PRODUCT OPTIONS MAY 7, 2021
1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that:
1. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations to existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified.
4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent.
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 25 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
CORSON HALL ROOM PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work.
1. Prepare agenda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at meetings.
5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions.
6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting.
a. To all participants in the meeting.
b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
c. To the Architect.
B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties.
C. Attendance:
1. Owner's Representative(s)
2. Contractor(s)
3. Architect and its professional consultants
4. Major Subcontractors
5. Major suppliers
6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
CORSON HALL ROOM PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
D. Minimum Agendum:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers
b. Projected Construction Schedules
2. Critical work sequencing
a. Identification of major shut downs and approximate schedule
3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities
4. Project Coordination
a. Designation of responsible personnel
5. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions
b. Proposal requests
c. Submittals
d. Change Orders
e. Applications for Payment
f. Requests for Information
g. Daily Reports
6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents
7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
8. Use of premises:
a. Office, work and storage areas
b. Owner's requirements
c. Job site personnel conduct
d. Building access and security
9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids
10. Temporary utilities
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
CORSON HALL ROOM PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
11. Safety and first-aid procedures
a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan
12. Security procedures
13. Housekeeping procedures
14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period.
B. Attendance:
1. Architect
2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed
3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent
4. Owner's Representatives
5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda
6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda
7. Safety Representative
C. Minimum Agenda:
1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting
2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades
3. Review of work progress since previous meeting
4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts
5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule
6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules
7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule
8. Revisions to Construction Schedule
9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period
10. Coordination of schedules
11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
CORSON HALL ROOM PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
12. Maintenance of quality standards
13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders
14. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project
15. Other business
D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor.
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)
A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where required by individual specification sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect and/or their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing & inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda would include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics, material procurement, quality control, etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior to meeting as well as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven (7) calendar days after the meeting.
B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within fifteen (15) days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 19***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
CORSON HALL ROOM ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project.
1. The Owner shall manage the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the entire project team for the period of its use on the Project.
B. There are no fees to utilize this system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation.
B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and secured repository. All project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored and routed within the ePM system.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Users will be provided a username and password. The Contractor shall log into the e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence should be communicated through the e-PM system.
B. Training
1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions or otherwise receive proper training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
CORSON HALL ROOM ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MAY 7, 2021
C. The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM Website System in a timely and efficient manner. At a minimum the Contractor is to provide the following equipment and software:
1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/downloading capability.
2. Color printer and plotter capable of full-size document production.
3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and quickly.
4. Digital Camera: (1) single lens reflex (SLR) type camera.
5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software.
D. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary to be kept fully appraised of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s, action items, meeting minutes, discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals, submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and pre-construction surveys.
1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW
A. The Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes within the ePM system.
B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who are engaged on this project.
C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is the Contractor’s exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect. Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and the like, will be uploaded to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI electronically.
D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the system for all applicable meetings as designated by the Owner.
E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall be created in or posted to the ePM Website System in PDF format electronically linked to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond, time frame within which action is to be taken and any solutions the Contractor recommends.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
CORSON HALL ROOM ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MAY 7, 2021
F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain the right to assign download rights to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be edited.
G. Submittals: All submittals shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00.
H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis.
I. Field Reporting: The Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to, daily construction reports, material location reports, unusual event reports, safety and accident reports.
J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system, field by date and type including but not limited to:
1. General Progress Photographs
2. RFI Issues
3. Non-Conforming Work
4. Special Events
5. As required by individual Specification Sections
K. Project Schedule: The contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM in both native and PDF formats.
L. Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits and agency approvals that relate to the project.
M. Issue Tracking: Contractor to log and respond to issues that are related and affect other stakeholders within the project team.
N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue reports on conforming items in the ePM system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective actions in the system.
O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed by the e-PM system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders.
P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices for review by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to by the Owner then the invoices should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system.
Q. Budget and Cost Management – Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
CORSON HALL ROOM ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MAY 7, 2021
1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
A. The Owner may change the standards for distribution and process prescribed above as required to suit the project.
B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall administrate and distribute all information contained therein.
C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on the project shall actively participate in the e-PM system. Requirements for participation in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 50***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
CORSON HALL ROOM CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work.
B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed.
C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner.
D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values.
E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules.
1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart.
1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation.
2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week.
3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions.
B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers.
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity.
2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list:
a. Mobilization
b. Selective demolition & temporary partitions
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
CORSON HALL ROOM CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
c. MEP rough-in & trenching
d. Casework/millwork installation
e. Framing & drywall
f. Finishes
g. Pre-Installation meetings
3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month.
4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified.
B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show:
1. The dates for Contractor's submittals.
2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect.
3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule.
1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:
1. Major changes in scope
2. Activities modified since previous submission
3. Revised projections of progress and completion
4. Other identifiable changes
C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define:
1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
CORSON HALL ROOM CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract.
1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt.
2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment.
C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work.
D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction.
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1. Owner Job Site personnel
2. Subcontractors
3. Other concerned parties
B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 16***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
CORSON HALL ROOM PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commencement of Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress of the Work, and final photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Progress Submittals
1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project area and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph.
2. Submit digital photograph electronic files, organizationally filed by week, to E-Builder within five (5) days of taking photographs.
3. Each photograph shall be identified with project title, date, and a description of the view.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Before commencement of selective demolition, take photographs of Project area and surrounding areas, including existing items to remain during construction.
3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the work.
B. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first week for review.
C. Provide photographs of any wall, ceiling or floor assembly containing MEP, A/V or any infrastructure that will thereafter become concealed-prior to closure. Note location on Key Plan.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
CORSON HALL ROOM PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographs shall be taken in a manner which completely documents the completed work, for submission as project record documents.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 33***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Samples
4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals
5. Coordination Drawings
6. Certification of Asbestos free products
7. Owner audio/visual
8. Owner furnishings and fixed equipment
B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be
needed.
C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images in PDF format created electronically (saved
with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any non-electronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative.
1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE
A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry in the template needed for eBuilder importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in native format for their use. The Contractor shall be responsible for review and completion of the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed necessary by the Owner.
B. The submittal registry and schedule shall list all submittals required by the specifications,
listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with the Contractor's Critical Path Method Construction Schedule and other related documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information:
1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review)
2. Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor review)
3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review)
4. Category of Submittal (Certification, Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual, Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for
Contractor review)
5. Submittal Description including description of the part of the Work covered by the submittal (by Architect for Contractor review)
6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional)
7. Date due from Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional)
8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required)
9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required)
10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional)
11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required)
12. Priority. Low, normal or high (Contractor provided, required)
D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the contract documents, provide review times for submittals in accordance with Submittal Procedures and Architect’s Duties below.
E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the electronic Project Management system. A submittal schedule compliant with the requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s preliminary schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after the initial preliminary schedule submission duration period, although the date for these submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all submittals for the entire project shall be included in the baseline schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16.
F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all submittals are approved. Failure to provide the requested information, or delay in submitting required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until the required schedule or submittals are received.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner.
1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents.
2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings.
3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements.
6. Submittal:
a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken.
b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free, see Section 01 35 29.
B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will result in rejection of the submission.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply.
6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work.
7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required.
8. Submittals:
a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken.
b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”.
1.5 SAMPLES
A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices.
2. Full range of color, texture and pattern.
C. Field samples and mock-ups:
1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect.
2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section.
3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished.
4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect.
5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition.
D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed.
1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated.
2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer.
3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of variations.
5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices.
6. Submittals:
a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the submittal item electronically via the electronic project management.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports.
B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents.
D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product.
E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or instructions.
F. Submittals:
1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken.
2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate and manage the preparation and submittal of coordinated layouts of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide electronic record of each coordination drawing submitted in TIFF and PDF formats to the Owner. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated
installation of work within the space available.
B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required thirty (30) days prior to commencement of fabrication and/or installation of any work item.
C. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 3/8 inch =1 foot (1:32) showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide copies of each coordination drawing submitted. Provide coordination drawings for all spaces, including but not limited to, corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and other areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available.
1. Show architectural, structural and other adjacent work requiring coordination with services. Show items, including but not limited to, access doors, ceiling grids, ceiling construction, structural decks and framing, fixtures, devices, and other adjacent work coordinated with services and architectural layouts shown on Drawings.
2. Prepare plans, sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
3. Include room names and numbers of each space.
4. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple entities in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.
5. Contract drawings are diagrammatic. Exact location of receptacles, light fixtures, exit signs, fire alarm devices, and other devices shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings and shall not be scaled from locations indicated on the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. Coordinate modifications in layout as necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the design intent.
6. Coordinate modifications in layout and components necessary to ensure maintenance accessibility and prevent conflict between each portion of the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
7. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. Unless indicated otherwise, all mechanical and electrical systems and associated components are to be installed as tight to underside of structure as possible.
8. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, electrical systems, communications systems, security systems, and other portions of the Work. Drawings shall indicate dimensions, to avoid interference with existing conditions, structural frame, ceilings, partitions,
services, and other portions of the Work. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various portions of the Work, Contractor shall be responsible to resolve conflicts and coordinate the available space to accommodate each portion of the Work. Adjustments resulting from coordination shall be initialed and dated by the entity(s) affected by the adjustments.
9. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.
10. Show location and size of access doors and access panels required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.
11. Indicate required installation sequences.
12. Indicate dimensions, elevations, and alignments shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions, elevations, and alignments that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements and notify Architect. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor
dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.
13. Indicate suspended ceiling heights and show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
14. Indicate locations of fire-rated partitions, smoke partitions, and other required barriers.
15. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, toilet partitions, overhead-mounted equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures
and other components and notify Architect.
16. Exposed Ceiling Construction: In addition to other indicated information, show fully-dimensioned locations of all items exposed at ceiling space. Indicate alignment requirements and centerline locations of light fixtures, ducts, piping, conduit, and other services. Show dashed outline locations of laboratory casework, shelving, and other items that extend 7 feet or more above the floor.
17. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical and electrical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. Indicate paths of egress from rooms. Indicate paths for equipment removal from rooms. Indicate clear areas required for access and maintenance.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
18. Structural Penetrations: Indicate scheduled and requested penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. Request un-scheduled penetrations and openings where Contractor has reviewed, analyzed, and coordinated all possible routing options and structural penetrations are only feasible option to accommodate indicated ceiling
heights. Refer to the drawings for general guidelines and request confirmation by Architect for structural penetrations.
19. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show dimensioned locations, sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, accessories, and support systems. Show locations of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
20. Electrical Work: Show electrical distribution, systems, equipment, and runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. Show light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, fire alarm, and other device locations. Show panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, bus way, generator, and motor control center locations. Show location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. Show lighting control systems. Show cable tray layouts including vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions,
clearances for access above and to side of cable trays, and vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
21. Fire Suppression System: Show locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.
22. Refer to individual Sections for additional Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.
23. Contractor Sign-Off: Contractor and each entity performing portions of the Work shall sign and date coordination drawings.
24. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. Review of coordination drawings shall not reduce Contractor’s responsibility for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of systems and equipment with existing conditions and each portion of the Work.
D. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any given area of the building.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-9 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect.
B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options.
C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened with all costs to remediate the situation.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for:
1. Compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions.
3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction.
4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades.
5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule.
7. All other provisions of the agreements.
E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost.
F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work.
G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time.
H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work.
I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled.
J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-10 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings.
L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section 01 35 39.
1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination
1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities in accordance with the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner.
2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity.
3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all entities involved.
4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened.
An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules.
6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review.
7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal.
8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing.
9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect.
10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule.
11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-11 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
B. Submittal Preparation
1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract
Documents.
4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system including meaningful description.
5. Include the following information on submittal documentation:
a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product.
b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
d. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps
f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations.
6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals.
7. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor.
C. Submittal Transmittal:
1. Transmit submittals via the electronic project management system to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed.
2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples. Package sample and other each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a record copy of the submittal (electronic format) for the O&M Manual.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-12 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section.
B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following:
1. "Approved (APP)" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed.
2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly.
3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
4. “Rejected (REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
5. “On Hold (ONH)” is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor should not take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to revise and resubmit.
6. “Not Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error, duplicate, or other reason that does not require review by the Architect but need to be closed by the Contractor upon return to them
7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect.
a. Architect will forward informational submittals without action.
b. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORSON HALL ROOM SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-13 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action.
D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action.
E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission.
1.13 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data when possible via the electronic project management system to:
1. Job site file
2. Record Documents file
3. Subcontractors
4. Installers
5. Suppliers
6. Manufacturers
7. Fabricators
8. Architect
9. Owner
B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 33 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
CORSON HALL ROOM GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such
requirements.
1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN
A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should
address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates to the entire scope of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site Specific Plan Template below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/campus-health-safety/occupational-safety/contractor-safety
1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific information, controls and requirements.
2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address site specific operations will be returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP may result in delay of project and/or denial of the payment.
3. All projects must have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment.
B. PSSP submittal should be submitted a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement of work on site. The Contractor may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must
submit a phase submission plan using the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP template for approval by Owner’s Representative with initial submission. Submit remaining phases no later than ten (10) days prior to the start of a new, predetermined project phase or milestone.
1. Projects having less than a ten (10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with the Owner’s Representative, who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
CORSON HALL ROOM GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
C. The Contractor is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are required to submit their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work.
D. The General Contractor is required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained throughout the duration of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements not previously addressed by the Contractor’s original PSSP.
E. Definitions:
1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP): A structured document that details the scope of the contract work and related site specific controls, requirements and information for University and Contractor personnel. This document is not intended to be all inclusive of all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations for which the General Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply.
2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
• The organization, office or individual responsible for approving equipment, an installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code).
• The local government, county government or state agency responsible for the administration and enforcement of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building Code-§202.2).
3. Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell University’s Environmental Safety and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be
contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email at askEHS@cornell.edu
4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert.
1.3 ASBESTOS
A. All products provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos. At Substantial Completion, prior to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed certification form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are 100% asbestos free. The Contractor has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material Safety Data Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University may provide random testing of products for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed product found to contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor as specified in the General Conditions.
B. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building.
C. Based on the above, disposal of asbestos containing material is not anticipated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
CORSON HALL ROOM GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.4 LEAD
A. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint.
1.5 MERCURY COLLECTION
A. Building may contain mercury. Mercury is a metal that is liquid at room temperature and is toxic to humans and the environment. Mercury can accumulate under laboratory benches and especially in the pipes in old laboratories. Dismantling old fixtures with care can prevent unnecessary spills. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. Mercury is regulated by OSHA and the EPA. If encountered, mercury shall be collected safely utilizing proper measures to prevent exposure and must be turned over to
Cornell Environmental Health & Safety for disposal. In the event of a spill, leave and secure the area, call Cornell Dispatch 255-1111 and request the campus Spill Response Team.
1.6 ANIMAL USE FACILITIES-HAZARD COMMUNICATION
A. Certain facilities at Cornell may be used for research, testing or teaching with animals. Some individuals may be at greater risk for health symptoms and effects from direct or indirect exposure to animals. Individuals with medical conditions such as immunocompromised health status, allergies, pregnancy or anticipated pregnancy may be at greater risk. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to inform their employees of associated potential risks and take appropriate action with respect to their health and safety. Questions regarding the presence of animals in a specific facility may be directed to the Owner’s Representative or
Facility Manager.
1.7 SITE VISITS
A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers or the Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of any persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person.
1.8 CONFINED SPACE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of confined space in accordance with OSHA requirements.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
CORSON HALL ROOM GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
April 5, 2021
Mr. Steven Fernaays, Project Manager
SWBR Architects, P.C.
387 East Main Street
Rochester, New York 14604-2107
Re: Corson Hall (1019E) Rooms E136, E138, E142 and E142A Lab Renovation Project
Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Report
SWBR Project No.: 20625.01
Delta Project No.: 2016.159.005
Dear Mr. Fernaays:
Enclosed, please find the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form, the associated Laboratory Analytical
Result Sheets, and the Sample Location Drawing for the bulk sampling performed by Delta Certified
Inspector Thomas Ferro. Sampling was performed on March 30th, 2021 and addressed suspect materials
with the potential to be impacted by the upcoming Corson Hall Rooms E136, E138, E142 and E142A Lab
Renovation Project. Based on a review of Design Submission Drawings dated February 5th, 2021, a
review of existing bulk sample information for the building, and a visual inspection of the affected rooms
/ associated suspect materials, a total of sixteen (16) bulk samples were collected representing eight (8)
separate homogenous materials. Fourteen (14) of the samples collected were “Non-Friable Organically
Bound” (NOB) representing seven (7) homogenous materials. The remaining two (2) samples collected
were non-NOB, “friable” materials representing one (1) homogenous material. Results for all samples
were reported as “No Asbestos Detected”. In addition to the samples collected, other suspect materials
with the potential to be impacted were observed to be present but were addressed through previous
sampling efforts. A breakdown of the suspect materials is as follows:
1) Non-Asbestos Materials
• Sheetrock/Joint Compound Wall System: The sheetrock / joint compound wall system present in
the renovation areas was previously sampled and both materials were reported as being non-
asbestos.
• 2’ x 4’ White Ceiling Tile: This ceiling tile is present in all four rooms. It was sampled as part of
this survey and reported as being non-asbestos.
• Mastic from non-suspect vinyl cove base: The mastic associated with the non-suspect vinyl cove
base is present in all four rooms. It was sampled as part of this survey and reported as being non-
asbestos.
• Grey Stone Patterned Sheet Flooring: This sheet flooring is present in all four rooms. It was
sampled as part of this survey and reported as being non-asbestos.
• Sheet Flooring Mastic: This mastic is present in all four rooms. It was sampled as part of this
survey and reported as being non-asbestos.
• Grey Floor Leveler: This leveler is present in all four rooms. It was sampled as part of this survey
and reported as being non-asbestos.
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 2 of 11
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
• End Cap Sealant: This end cap sealant on non-suspect in-line fiberglass pipe insulation was
sampled in Rooms 136 & 142 as part of this survey and reported as being non-asbestos.
• Grey Metal Duct Seam Sealant: This seam sealant associated with the metal duct was sampled in
Room 142 and reported as non-asbestos.
• Grey Lab Top Mastic: The lab top mastic was sampled in Rooms 142 & 142A as part of this
survey and was reported as being non-asbestos.
2) Non-suspect Materials The following non-suspect materials were observed to be present in the
affected rooms:
• All accessible piping was observed to either un-insulated or covered with non-suspect fiberglass.
• Lab-tops / Sink-Tops / Counter Tops other than the fume hood lab-top referenced above were
observed to be non -suspect resin.
• Peg Board (drying rack) and the fume hood lab top were observed to be non-suspect trespa.
• All Wall Cabinets / Shelf Brackets were mechanically fastened.
• Metal duct seam putty observed in the ceiling plenum of Room 142 was observed to be non-
suspect silicone.
• All ductwork was observed to be either un-insulated or covered with non-suspect fiberglass.
Based on the above, no asbestos containing materials to be impacted by the Corson Hall Rooms
E136, E138, E142 & E142A Lab Renovation Project.
Bulk sample analysis was performed by AmeriSci New York, Inc., an independent laboratory approved /
accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American Industrial Hygiene Association
(AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). Analysis of all Non-
Friable Organically Bound (NOB) materials was initially performed by Polarized Light Microscopy
(PLM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.6 Methodologies. If the PLM results were reported as “non-
asbestos”, the sample was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the
NYS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology. Analysis of all Non-NOB materials were performed by Polarized
Light Microscopy (PLM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.1 Methodology. “Positive Stop” sample
analysis protocol was utilized for a given homogenous material set with multiple samples and based on
this; all 16 samples collected were analyzed. Please reference the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form for
sample particulars and details. I have also attached Delta Company, Personnel, and Laboratory
Licenses/Certifications. If you have any questions or require any other information, please feel free to
contact me at your convenience.
Respectfully,
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC
Stephen Prislupsky
Director of Environmental Services
Att: Project Paperwork
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 3 of 11
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment A
Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form
Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result
Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos
2016.159.005 -01A 01 1
Grey Stone Patterned Sheet Flooring, Room
142 Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -01B 01 1
Grey Stone Patterned Sheet Flooring, Room
142A Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -02A 02 1 Mastic from HA 01A Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -02B 02 1 Mastic from HA 01B Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -03A 03 1 Grey Floor Leveler, Room 142 Misc.ND ND NA
2016.159.005 -03B 03 1 Grey Floor Leveler, Room 142A Misc.ND ND NA
2016.159.005 -04A 04 1
End Cap Sealant, In line Fiberglass Pipe
Insulation, Room 136 Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -04B 04 1
End Cap Sealant, In line Fiberglass Pipe
Insulation, Room 142 Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -05A 05 1
Grey Metal Duct Seam Sealant, Ceiling
Plenum, Room 142 Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -05B 05 1
Grey Metal Duct Seam Sealant, Ceiling
Plenum, Room 142 Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -06A 06 1 2' x 4' White Ceiling Tile, Room 142 Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -06B 06 1 2' x 4' White Ceiling Tile, Room 142 Misc.ND ND ND
Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 16 / TEM -14
Client Project No.: 20625.01
Number of Samples Collected: 16
Sample
www.deltaengineers.com
Building Code: 1019E
Project: Corson Hall Rooms
136,138,142 and 142A Lab Renovations
- Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
Floor
Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form
Dates Sampling Performed: 03/30/2021
Date of Report: 04/05/2021
Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs
Number
860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640
Client: SWBR Delta Proj. No.: 2016.159.005
Asbestos Inspector: Thomas Ferro
HA*
Cornell University Corson Hall
Rooms W136, W138, W142 and W142A Renovations
Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Page 1 of 2
Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result
Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos
Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 16 / TEM -14
Client Project No.: 20625.01
Number of Samples Collected: 16
Sample
www.deltaengineers.com
Building Code: 1019E
Project: Corson Hall Rooms
136,138,142 and 142A Lab Renovations
- Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
Floor
Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form
Dates Sampling Performed: 03/30/2021
Date of Report: 04/05/2021
Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs
Number
860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640
Client: SWBR Delta Proj. No.: 2016.159.005
Asbestos Inspector: Thomas Ferro
HA*
2016.159.005 -07A 07 1
Mastic, 4" Non-Suspect Tan Cove Base,
Room 142A Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -07B 07 1
Mastic, 4" Non-Suspect Tan Cove Base,
Room 142A Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -08A 08 1 Grey Mastic, Lab Top, Room 142 Misc.ND ND ND
2016.159.005 -08B 08 1 Grey Mastic, Lab Top, Room 142A Misc.ND ND ND
HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop
TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition
Cornell University Corson Hall
Rooms W136, W138, W142 and W142A Renovations
Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Page 2 of 2
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 4 of 11
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment B
Laboratory Analytical Result Sheets
AmeriSci New York
117 EAST 30TH ST.
NEW YORK, NY 10016
TEL: (212) 679-8600 • FAX: (212) 679-3114
04/01/21 AmeriSci Job #221041048
04/02/21
ELAP #11480 1 4
2016.159.005; SWBR; Corson Hall - Laboratory Renovation
Rooms 136, 138, 142 And
142A - Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
PLM Bulk Asbestos Report
Date Received
Date Examined
RE:
ofPage
P.O. #
Delta Engineers
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Attn:Stephen Prislupsky
Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No.
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-01A 221041048-01 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - Grey Stone Patterned Sheet Flooring1
Off-White, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material
Fibrous glass 1%, Non-fibrous 1.9%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-01B 221041048-02 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142A - Grey Stone Patterned Sheet Flooring1
Off-White, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material
Fibrous glass 2%, Non-fibrous 3.4%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-02A 221041048-03 NAD
1st Floor - Mastic From HA 01A2
Yellow, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 4.1%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-02B 221041048-04 NAD
1st Floor - Mastic From HA 01B2
Lt. Yellow, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 100%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-03A 221041048-05 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - Grey Floor Leveler3
Gray, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100%
(by NYS ELAP 198.1)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/01/21
See Reporting notes on last page
AmeriSci Job #:221041048 Page 2 of 4
2016.159.005; SWBR; Corson Hall - Laboratory Renovation
Rooms 136, 138, 142 And
142A - Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
PLM Bulk Asbestos Report
Client Name:Delta Engineers
Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No.
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-03B 221041048-06 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142A - Grey Floor Leveler3
Gray, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100%
(by NYS ELAP 198.1)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/01/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-04A 221041048-07 NAD
1st Floor - Room 136 - In Line Fiberglass Pipe Insulation - End Cap Sealant4
White/Yellow, Heterogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material
Fibrous glass 5%, Non-fibrous 9.9%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-04B 221041048-08 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - In Line Fiberglass Pipe Insulation - End Cap Sealant4
White/Yellow, Heterogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material
Fibrous glass 3%, Non-fibrous 9.2%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-05A 221041048-09 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - Ceiling Plenum - Grey Metal Duct Seam Sealant5
Gray, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 7.8%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-05B 221041048-10 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - Ceiling Plenum - Grey Metal Duct Seam Sealant5
Gray, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 8.2%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-06A 221041048-11 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - 2' X 4' White Ceiling Tile6
White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 22%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
See Reporting notes on last page
AmeriSci Job #:221041048 Page 3 of 4
2016.159.005; SWBR; Corson Hall - Laboratory Renovation
Rooms 136, 138, 142 And
142A - Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
PLM Bulk Asbestos Report
Client Name:Delta Engineers
Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No.
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-06B 221041048-12 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - 2' X 4' White Ceiling Tile6
White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 19%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-07A 221041048-13 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142A - 4'' Non-Suspect Tan Cove Base - Mastic7
Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 4.9%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-07B 221041048-14 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142A - 4'' Non-Suspect Tan Cove Base - Mastic7
Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 5.1%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-08A 221041048-15 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - Lab Top - Grey Mastic8
Gray, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material
Wollastonite 3%, Non-fibrous 29%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
Location:
Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types:
Other Material:
No2016.159.005-08B 221041048-16 NAD
1st Floor - Room 142A - Lab Top - Grey Mastic8
Gray, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material
Wollastonite 2%, Non-fibrous 15.6%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu
on 04/02/21
See Reporting notes on last page
AmeriSci Job #:221041048 Page 4 of 4
2016.159.005; SWBR; Corson Hall - Laboratory Renovation
Rooms 136, 138, 142 And
142A - Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
PLM Bulk Asbestos Report
Client Name:Delta Engineers
Reporting Notes:
*NAD/NSD =no asbestos detected; NA =not analyzed; NA/PS=not analyzed/positive stop, (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite;
(SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis using Olympus, Model BH-2 Pol Scope, Microscope, Serial #: 229915, by
Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 quantified by either CVES or 400 pt ct as noted for each analysis (NVLAP 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY
friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite, or ELAP 198.6 for NOB samples, or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 600-
M4-82-020 (NY ELAP Lab 11480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound
materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be
considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National Institute of Standards
and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the lab.This PLM
report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA-LAP, LLC Lab ID 102843, RI Cert AAL-094, CT Cert PH-0186, Mass Cert AA000054, NJ Lab ID #NY031.
____________END OF REPORT___________
Analyzed by: Valeriu Voicu
Date: 4/2/2021
Reviewed by: Marik Peysakhov
Client Name:
221041048
Delta Engineers
2016.159.005; SWBR; Corson Hall - Laboratory Renovation Rooms 136, 138, 142 And
142A - Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
AmeriSci Job #:Page 1 of 2
Table I
Summary of Bulk Asbestos Analysis Results
Client Sample#
Sample
Weight
(gram)
Heat
Sensitive
Organic %
Acid
Soluble
Inorganic %
Insoluble
Non-Asbestos
Inorganic %HG
Area
** Asbestos % by
PLM/DS
** Asbestos % by
TEM
AmeriSci
Sample #
01 2016.159.005-01A 1 0.151 62.2 34.9 2.9 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - Grey Stone Patterned Sheet FlooringLocation:
02 2016.159.005-01B 1 0.151 44.4 50.2 5.4 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142A - Grey Stone Patterned Sheet FlooringLocation:
03 2016.159.005-02A 2 0.047 68.2 27.8 4.1 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Mastic From HA 01ALocation:
04 2016.159.005-02B 2 0.060 61.4 34.8 3.8 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Mastic From HA 01BLocation:
05 2016.159.005-03A 3 ----------------NAD NA
1st Floor - Room 142 - Grey Floor LevelerLocation:
06 2016.159.005-03B 3 ----------------NAD NA
1st Floor - Room 142A - Grey Floor LevelerLocation:
07 2016.159.005-04A 4 0.125 50.2 34.9 14.9 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 136 - In Line Fiberglass Pipe Insulation - End Cap SealantLocation:
08 2016.159.005-04B 4 0.127 51.4 36.4 12.2 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - In Line Fiberglass Pipe Insulation - End Cap SealantLocation:
09 2016.159.005-05A 5 0.153 50.3 41.9 7.8 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - Ceiling Plenum - Grey Metal Duct Seam SealantLocation:
10 2016.159.005-05B 5 0.099 50.3 41.5 8.2 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - Ceiling Plenum - Grey Metal Duct Seam SealantLocation:
11 2016.159.005-06A 6 0.126 13.8 64.2 22.0 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - 2' X 4' White Ceiling TileLocation:
12 2016.159.005-06B 6 0.129 14.9 66.1 19.0 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - 2' X 4' White Ceiling TileLocation:
13 2016.159.005-07A 7 0.107 42.4 52.7 4.9 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142A - 4'' Non-Suspect Tan Cove Base - MasticLocation:
14 2016.159.005-07B 7 0.123 39.9 55.0 5.1 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142A - 4'' Non-Suspect Tan Cove Base - MasticLocation:
15 2016.159.005-08A 8 0.171 64.3 3.6 32.0 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142 - Lab Top - Grey MasticLocation:
16 2016.159.005-08B 8 0.188 59.5 22.9 17.6 NAD NAD
1st Floor - Room 142A - Lab Top - Grey MasticLocation:
See Reporting notes on last page
Client Name:
221041048
Delta Engineers
2016.159.005; SWBR; Corson Hall - Laboratory Renovation Rooms 136, 138, 142 And
142A - Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
AmeriSci Job #:Page 2 of 2
Table I
Summary of Bulk Asbestos Analysis Results
Client Sample#
Sample
Weight
(gram)
Heat
Sensitive
Organic %
Acid
Soluble
Inorganic %
Insoluble
Non-Asbestos
Inorganic %HG
Area
** Asbestos % by
PLM/DS
** Asbestos % by
TEM
AmeriSci
Sample #
**Quantitative Analysis (Semi/Full); Bulk Asbestos Analysis - PLM by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 or NYSDOH ELAP 198.1 for New York friable samples or NYSDOH ELAP 198.6 for New York NOB samples;
TEM (Semi/Full) by EPA 600/R-93/116 (or NYSDOH ELAP 198.4; for New York samples). Analysis using Hitachi, Model H7000-Noran 7 System, Microscope, Serial #: 747-05-06. NAD = no asbestos detected
during a quantitative analysis; NA = not analyzed; Trace = <1%; (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite; (SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; Quantitation for beginning
weights of <0.1 grams should be considered as qualitative only; Qualitative Analysis: Asbestos analysis results of "Present" or "NVA = No Visible Asbestos" represents results for Qualitative PLM or TEM
Analysis only (no accreditation coverage available from any regulatory agency for qualitative analyses): NVLAP (PLM) 200546-0, NYSDOH ELAP Lab 11480, AIHA-LAP, LLC (PLM) Lab ID 102843, NJ Lab ID
#NY031.
Warning Note: PLM limitation, only TEM will resolve fibers <0.25 micrometers in diameter. TEM bulk analysis is representative of the fine grained matrix material and may not be representative of non-
uniformly dispersed debris for which PLM evaluation is recommended (i.e. soils and other heterogenous materials).
Analyzed by: Marik Peysakhov
Date: 4/2/2021
Reviewed by: Marik Peysakhov
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 5 of 11
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment C
Sample Location Drawings
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 6 of 11
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment D
Photos
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 7 of 11
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
HA 01 – Grey Stone Patterned Sheet Flooring, “No Asbestos Detected”
HA 02 – Sheet Flooring Mastic, “No Asbestos Detected”
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 8 of 11
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
HA 03 – Grey Floor Leveler, “No Asbestos Detected”
HA 04 – End Cap Sealant, “No Asbestos Detected”
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 9 of 11
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
HA 05 – Grey Metal Duct Seam Sealant, “No Asbestos Detected”
HA 06 – 2’ x 4’ White Ceiling Tile, “No Asbestos Detected”
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 10 of 11
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
HA 07 – Mastic from Non–Suspect Vinyl Cove Base, “No Asbestos Detected”
HA 08 – Grey Mastic, Lab Top, “No Asbestos Detected”
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 11 of 11
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment E
Delta / Laboratory Licenses and Certifications
New York State – Department of Labor
Division of Safety and Health
License and Certificate Unit
State Campus, Building 12
Albany, NY 12240
ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE
Delta Engineers, Architects, Land Surveyors, &
Landscape, Architects, D.P.C.
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
FILE NUMBER: 05-0851
LICENSE NUMBER: 29322
LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED
DATE OF ISSUE: 10/06/2020
EXPIRATION DATE: 10/31/2021
Duly Authorized Representative – Stephen Prislupsky:
This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material.
This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor.
Eileen M. Franko, Director
SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO REQUIREMENTS MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood
to reduce or eliminate such requirements.
C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control
B. Section 01 35 45 – Refrigerant Compliance
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals:
1. Analytical laboratory sample results and material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials (“borrow”).
2. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan.
3. Weight tickets from the Borrow Material Supplier.
4. Proposed methods for dewatering and construction water management.
5. Analytical laboratory sample results for all waste materials.
6. Copies of manifests for all waste materials disposed of off-site.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO REQUIREMENTS MAY 7, 2021
1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION
A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site.
B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval.
C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications.
1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements
1.6 DUST CONTROL
A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading, saw cutting or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction.
B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative means to control dust.
C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA.
1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations.
Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO REQUIREMENTS MAY 7, 2021
1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations.
2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters.
3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters.
4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities.
5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or
specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative.
6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream.
7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials.
B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work.
C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer.
D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures.
1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK
A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to the Owner’s Representative in writing.
The following shall require approval of the Owner:
1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections.
2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions.
B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO REQUIREMENTS MAY 7, 2021
1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS
A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith.
B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance.
C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder.
D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal.
1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE
A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations.
B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions. Forms may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resource-files/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf
C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO REQUIREMENTS MAY 7, 2021
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 43***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
CORSON HALL ROOM SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION
A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects:
1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site.
2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products.
3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes.
B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials.
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES
All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up the spill, the following procedures shall be followed:
A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall:
1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
CORSON HALL ROOM SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area.
3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not
compromise worker safety.
a. Stop the spill at once (if possible).
b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.).
c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area.
d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread.
e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source.
f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill.
g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified.
h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion.
i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment.
B. Spill Cleanup:
1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated.
a. Use proper waste containers.
b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container.
c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
CORSON HALL ROOM SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid.
e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill.
f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product.
g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor.
h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B.
C. Fire or Explosion:
1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall:
a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified.
b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel.
c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area.
d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so.
e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers.
f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
CORSON HALL ROOM SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION
In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required.
The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING
CRITERIA DESCRIPTION
Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons.
Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment.
Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious
surface.
Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water.
A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or “harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802.
Spill Reporting Information: When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible:
1. The date and time of the spill or release.
2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance.
3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event.
4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill.
5. The source of the release or spill.
6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill.
7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
CORSON HALL ROOM SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site.
9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation.
10. The extent of injuries, if any.
11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals.
12. Assistance required, if any.
If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following:
1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675.
2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases.
(1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you.
(2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3).
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 44***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 45 Ithaca, New York REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE
CORSON HALL ROOM REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 35 45 REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible and accountable for compliance with the EPA Clean Air Act (CAA) Section 608, 40 CFR Part 82 and any state or local codes for all refrigerant-related work. In general, an EPA-certified technician shall perform any activity involving refrigerant-containing equipment that includes: (1) attaching and detaching hoses and gauges
to and from refrigerant containing equipment to measure pressure; (2) adding refrigerant to, or removing refrigerant from equipment; or (3) any other activity that violates the integrity of a refrigerant containing circuit (for example any activity where a refrigerant containing circuit is ‘opened’ in any manner).
B. Refrigerant and oil shall be recovered from any equipment that does not meet the definition of a small appliance in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F before removal and subsequent disposal. Small appliances (as defined in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F) may be removed from the site with the charge (refrigerant) intact, provided it is properly labeled and handled in such a manner so as to prevent damage to coils. Small Appliances are defined in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F as: Any appliance that is fully manufactured, charged, and hermetically sealed in a factory with five (5) pounds or less of a Class I or Class II substance used as a refrigerant, including,
but not limited to, refrigerators and freezers (designed for home, commercial, or consumer use), medical or industrial research refrigeration equipment, room air conditioners (including window air conditioners and packaged terminal air heat pumps), dehumidifiers, under-the-counter ice makers, vending machines, and drinking water coolers.
C. All new equipment installed shall utilize non-CFC refrigerants.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to starting construction, demolition, or service work Contractor shall provide to Owner a list of all service technicians with EPA certification numbers and level of certification. (Copies of EPA certification cards are acceptable for those who will be working on the site.)
1.3 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Contractor shall provide to the Owners Representative all Service Invoices (or equivalent service documentation acceptable to owner) for all work performed by EPA- certified Technicians. Service Invoices (or equivalent documentation) shall include the following information at a minimum for each piece of refrigerant containing equipment serviced:
• Date of Service
• Name of EPA-Certified Technician
• Technicians Certification Level
• Type of Equipment Serviced
• Equipment Manufacture
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 45 Ithaca, New York REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE
CORSON HALL ROOM REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
• Equipment Model and Serial Number
• Description of Service Performed
• Date Leak Discovered (if applicable)
• Date Leak Repaired (if applicable)
• Date Follow-Up Leak Test Performed (if applicable)
• Type of Refrigerant
• Normal System Full Charge (in pounds)
• Amount of Initial Refrigerant Charge Recovered During Service
• Amount of Recovered Refrigerant Returned to System
• Type of Additional Refrigerant Added to System
• Amount of Additional Refrigerant Charged to System
• System Charge at End of Service
B. Contractor shall provide to Cornell’s Environmental Health and Safety Office and IPP Facilities Management Administration Preventative Maintenance Group, via the Owner’s Representative, complete equipment documentation including: make, model number, serial number, refrigerant type and full refrigerant charge (quantity), equipment ID tag number and location (room number) for all equipment installed that does not meet the definition of a small appliance (40CFR Part 82).
C. Contractor shall provide Owners Representative a copy of complete manifests, invoices, or other documentation showing any refrigerant removed from the project by the contractor was disposed of appropriately or reclaimed by an EPA-certified reclaimer.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 LEAK TESTING
A. All new equipment not meeting the definition of a small appliance, including packaged equipment, factory charged, field charged, split systems or field-constructed systems with field-installed refrigerant piping shall be leak tested prior to or during startup. Leak testing shall utilize appropriate electronic leak-testing equipment.
B. Leak testing shall be conducted by an EPA-certified technician. The contractor shall provide written verification of the leak testing and results.
C. If a leak is detected, the following procedure shall be followed:
1. Notify the Owner’s Site Representative (who will notify the Refrigerant Compliance Coordinator).
2. Document the leak.
3. Repair the leak.
4. Document the procedures followed.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 45 Ithaca, New York REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE
CORSON HALL ROOM REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
5. Leak test to verify the leak was repaired.
6. Schedule and provide a 30-day follow-up verification leak test witnessed by a designated HVAC technician.
7. Document follow-up leak testing.
8. Repeat the above process if follow-up leak is detected.
3.2 DEMOLITION PROCEDURE FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVED BY CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor, in contractor-provided refrigerant recovery cylinders, shall take ownership of the recovered refrigerant and transport off site to a proper disposal company or certified reclaimer.
B. Service Invoices, as described in RECORD DOCUMENTS, shall be provided.
C. The Contractor technician shall tag the unit that the refrigerant was removed.
D. Once an EPA-certified technician has removed the refrigerant and tagged the unit, a non-certified person may perform the remainder of the demolition.
***END OF SECTION 01 35 45***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES
A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe, fill, street use and building demolition.
1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the regularly scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition.
C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and maintained through the City of Ithaca.
D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting:
1. A permit is required from the Ithaca Fire Department to install or substantially repair a fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the Uniform Code of New York State.
2. If the scope of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration –Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for this type of work.
3. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not require a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department.
1.2 INSPECTIONS
A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.3 COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work.
1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner.
B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the Contractor shall so state, in writing, upon completion of the project.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 41 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings.
B. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents.
C. Install All Work in Compliance with:
1. NYS Uniform Code
a. International Building Code
b. International Residential Code
c. International Existing Building Code
d. International Fire Code
e. International Plumbing Code
f. International Mechanical Code
g. International Fuel Gas Code
h. International Property Maintenance Code
i. Uniform Code Supplement
2. NYS Energy Code
a. International Energy Conservation Code
b. ASHRAE 90.1
c. Energy Code Supplement
3. National Electric Code
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101.
6. All local ordinances
7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. “General”: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents listed in the Agreement, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement.
C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent the entire integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
D. “The Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction and all materials
and equipment incorporated in such construction.
E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation.
F. “Architect/Engineer”: The Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized representative.
G. “Contractor”: The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction Agreement contract is made by Owner.
H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or materials for work at site of the project for and under separate contract or agreement with Contractor.
I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval.
J. “As Directed”: Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
K. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as “indicated.”
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
N. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former position.
P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for.
Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable.
S. “Exposed”: All capital Work not identified as concealed.
T. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to record all conditions which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the course of project construction.
V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the project and the final location of all services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed items. The “record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect based on the working as-built drawings and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor.
W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts, brochures, and other data that are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, for some portion of the work.
X. “Samples”: Physical examples furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged.
Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions describing the responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction contract.
Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the
contractor for construction purposes.
AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor;
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS
A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division have entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division are as follows: Local #241 - International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters Local #281 - United Brotherhood of Carpenters Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades
Local #112 - International Brotherhood of Sheetmetal Workers Local #785 - Laborers International Union of North America The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows: All work associated with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement to or construction of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft maintenance for trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to individuals employed as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other employees covered by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such work; provided, however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees covered by this agreement.
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board
www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-6 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888
www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100
www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-7 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-8 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772
www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-9 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208
www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch
Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690
www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-12 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550
www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA International Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016
www.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-13 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400
NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700 www.nybfu.org PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com
RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SBI Steel Boiler Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-14 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org
SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com
SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-15 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700
Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization (800) 962-7962 www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943
www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-16 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 NEC National Electric Code
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORSON HALL ROOM REFERENCES 01 42 00-17 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112
www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 42 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
CORSON HALL ROOM QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities,
instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program.
1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION
A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection:
1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. When practical, pre-installation
meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the same day as regularly schedule progress meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products.
a. Agenda to include the following:
i. Appointment
ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project.
iii. Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required.
iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements.
v. Review of environmental and site condition requirements.
vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work.
vii. Schedule of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners consideration.
viii. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, Section 01500.
ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect for review of the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
CORSON HALL ROOM QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
x. Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertake inspections and tests in accordance with Section 01410.
xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment.
xii. Special safety requirements and procedures.
b. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting:
i. Project Manager.
ii. Project Field Supervisor
iii. Subcontractor
iv. Architect’s Representative
v. Owner’s Representative
vi. Commissioning Agent, when applicable
vii. Testing Agency, when applicable
2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine
materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand.
3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements.
4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work.
1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS
A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
CORSON HALL ROOM QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.4 TESTING
A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements.
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents.
1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track non-conforming materials or sub-standard workmanship identified by Owner’s Representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 45 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORSON HALL ROOM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND CONTROLS MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every kind, as required by the Contractor and by its subcontractors for their performance of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and complete such services upon the completion of all other work, or as Cornell University may
direct.
B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide, construct, or install, as well as operate, maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and
services.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor’s option.
B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications.
2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES
A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site.
B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical services: Physicians, ambulance services and hospitals.
2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. Any fire watches as a result of construction operations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and
establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORSON HALL ROOM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND CONTROLS MAY 7, 2021
1. Impairments “Fire Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different levels of impairments
a. Partial Impairment. The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be performed.
- Basic Impairment Notification will be sent to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and FM Global.
- No fire watch will be required in most cases.
b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system” or sprinkler “system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler system at the same time is not allowed.
- Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority Having Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service.
- Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch Person’s name and contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Equipment:
1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard.
2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards.
3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system.
4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building.
5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide additional temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas.
6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, siamese connections, standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting.
7. Where existing or temporary fire protection services are being replaced with new fire protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new services are placed into operation and use.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORSON HALL ROOM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND CONTROLS MAY 7, 2021
8. At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during
construction.
C. Enforce fire-safety discipline:
1. Store combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location.
2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project.
3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions.
4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings.
5. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions.
6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel.
D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher.
E. Welding or burning operations shall be conducted under a Hot Work Permit issued in accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety.
F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness, tie-off points, and other such equipment.
B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel.
C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition.
2.5 SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORSON HALL ROOM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND CONTROLS MAY 7, 2021
B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation shall be designed by the Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations provided for same.
2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations from construction work.
1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards.
a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture.
b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations.
2. Do not remove existing HVAC systems connected to louvers at existing exterior enclosure systems until new HVAC systems and louvers at exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing HVAC systems and louvers as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new HVAC systems and new louvers and complete installation as soon as possible.
2.7 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION
A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing the construction site.
1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards.
2. Closed sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper barricades.
3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and employees.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORSON HALL ROOM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND CONTROLS MAY 7, 2021
2.8 SECURITY
A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner.
2.9 FIELD OFFICES
A. The Owner will not provide a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work.
1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work.
2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 02 through 40.
B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout.
C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner.
D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation.
E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site.
F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week.
G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORSON HALL ROOM TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND CONTROLS MAY 7, 2021
3.3 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services:
1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction.
2. At completion of the Project.
B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal.
C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition.
***END OF SECTION 01 50 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
CORSON HALL ROOM TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work.
B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition.
B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER
A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to
meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor.
C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
CORSON HALL ROOM TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in
all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code.
E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting to be provided is as follows:
1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal-resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside of the construction fence.
2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel.
F. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so that such equipment may be operated when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat.
G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of
the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns.
H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal
The Contractor shall:
1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby.
2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner.
2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR
A. Use of Existing Elevator
1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall:
a. Provide adequate protection for such equipment and shall operate such equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
CORSON HALL ROOM TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
b. Provide for the maintenance and cleaning of the elevator equipment as approved by the Owner's Representative.
c. Prior to start of construction, accurately record the condition of the existing elevator. Promptly repair or replace items that are damaged as a result of Contractor’s use. Service calls that arise as a result of Contractor misuse will be charged to the Contractor. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use.
d. Use only elevators designated by Owner’s Representative at dates and times designated by Owner’s Representative. Dates and times available for Contractor’s use shall be scheduled with, and at the convenience of, the Owner, and may vary during the course of the Project.
e. Owner will not provide elevator operators or other monitoring of elevator use.
f. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
g. Provide code compliant protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator maintenance contractor to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
h. Procure and coordinate the elevator maintenance contractor to gain access to the elevator shaft as required to complete the work
2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary for constructing the Work.
B. The Contractor will be permitted to use the building's permanent heating system for temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent heating system shall in no way constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work.
C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, prior to utilizing the equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts, lubrication, operation outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing.
1. If the Contractor elects to use the building’s permanent heating system for temporary heat, the Contractor shall provide filters with a minimum MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system, maintain to keep them free of dust and debris, replace if necessary and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout.
D. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required.
E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
CORSON HALL ROOM TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
F. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture
intrusion that is detrimental to the Project.
2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times.
B. Provide phone number to Cornell project representatives for communication during Work.
2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during construction.
B. Existing plumbing facilities must be maintained during the project’s duration and thoroughly cleaned at the project’s completion. The Contractor will be responsible for any damage the facilities incur during the project’s duration.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities.
C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition.
***END OF SECTION 01 51 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
CORSON HALL ROOM STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source.
B. Obscure from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas.
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space.
C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation.
E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged.
F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage.
1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE
A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution.
B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds.
C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
CORSON HALL ROOM STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus.
E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored
materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work.
F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment.
1.4 CAMPUS SITE/PALM ROAD STORAGE
A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the Palm Road or other Campus site shall be stored at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely responsible for repair or replacement of property due to any cause of loss. Due to work at the Palm Road lot, staging space is limited and not guaranteed to be provided. It staging space is needed a request should be submitted to the Project Manager.
B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell harmless from any accident or injury occurring at Palm Road storage or other assigned Campus site associated with the Contractor’s storage.
C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty regarding any security at the Palm Road or other assigned Campus site.
D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination caused by the Contractor’s storage or storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found.
E. It shall be assumed that the Contractor is responsible for site contamination unless the Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the site. Each Contractor shall be responsible for their own general area whether defined formally or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all
contractors, the Contractor agrees as follows:
1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon location of the
incident agree to share the expense of cleanup equally.
F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the Palm Road or any Campus site. All barrels must have labels affixed identifying contents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
CORSON HALL ROOM STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
G. The Contractor will be responsible for securing and maintaining any Campus site area designated to them. All contractor trailers or storage containers located on Cornell Campus Property will need to file for a building permit with the Town of Ithaca. If the trailer/container is there longer than 180 days, the trailer/container will need to meet the
Building Code requirements of a permanent structure. The trailer/container will need a means of egress that can be operated from the inside and a fire extinguisher. The contractor will also need to file for a demolition permit when the trailer/container is removed.
H. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled in the Cornell standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305 West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579, Email – db@ithacaplastics.com.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work.
B. Protection of Utilities
1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage.
2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation.
C. Protective Covering
1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows:
a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades.
b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner.
c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
CORSON HALL ROOM STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation.
e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc.
2. HVAC ductwork shall be protected by the Contractor as follows to prevent introduction of contaminants:
a. Ductwork with interior lining shall be wrapped at the factory using plastic wrap to exclude moisture and contaminants. The wrapping shall not be removed until immediately prior to installation.
b. Ductwork shall not be exposed to moisture or contaminants at any point in the manufacturing, shipping, storage or installation process.
c. Ductwork shall not be staged or stored outside or otherwise exposed to the weather.
d. Ductwork shall be transported only inside of covered vehicles.
e. Once installed, ductwork shall be protected from contamination during the construction process.
1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas.
C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel.
D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage:
1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic.
2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects.
3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
CORSON HALL ROOM STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces:
1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.
2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas.
F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 66 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORSON HALL ROOM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND REPAIRING MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to:
1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and finishes to match adjacent existing or new surfaces and finishes.
B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative:
1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work.
2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified.
3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work.
4. Patch work uncovered or removed.
C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof.
D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative.
E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure.
F. Openings and Chases
1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract.
2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings have been provided, build in, over, and around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORSON HALL ROOM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND REPAIRING MAY 7, 2021
3. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include:
1. Identification of the Project.
2. Description of the affected work.
3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation.
4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the Project.
5. Description of the proposed work:
a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work.
c. Products proposed to be used.
d. The extent of refinishing to be done.
6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation.
7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching.
8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected.
B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options.
C. Submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity for load-deflection ratio.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements, including but not limited to the following:
a. Foundation construction
b. Bearing and retaining walls
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORSON HALL ROOM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND REPAIRING MAY 7, 2021
c. Structural concrete
d. Structural steel and lintels
e. Structural decking
f. Miscellaneous structural metals
g. Exterior wall back-up supports and anchoring systems
h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports
i. Equipment supports
B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment
b. Air or smoke barriers
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers
d. Membranes and flashings
e. Fire protection systems
f. Control systems
g. Communication systems
h. Electrical wiring systems
i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner.
D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the Owner.
1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes
a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORSON HALL ROOM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND REPAIRING MAY 7, 2021
b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane.
2. Water Tightness
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight.
b. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight.
c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 WARRANTIES
A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved.
B. Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will
equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual appearance of in-place or existing materials.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during:
1. Cutting and patching.
2. Excavation and backfilling.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORSON HALL ROOM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND REPAIRING MAY 7, 2021
B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.
C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties.
D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water.
E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORSON HALL ROOM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-6 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND REPAIRING MAY 7, 2021
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes:
a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit.
4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance.
5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU units matching in-place units for type and size. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials.
8. Brick and Masonry: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new brick and masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place brick and masonry walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORSON HALL ROOM CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-7 E136-E142A LAB RENO AND REPAIRING MAY 7, 2021
9. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-tight condition.
a. Existing Roofing: Comply with requirements of existing roofing manufacturer for cutting and patching existing roofing system. Provide flashing and trim, base sheets, base flashing, adhesives, insulation, blocking, substrate boards, accessories, and other required items to patch roofing at penetrations and roof-top mounted items.
D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent settlement or damage to other work.
F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
***END OF SECTION 01 73 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
CORSON HALL ROOM PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INSPECTIONS
A. Substantial Completion:
1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list),
indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection of the Work to determine that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is acceptable for use. The Architect will submit a marked-up list of items to be completed and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, on the basis of an inspection, when the Architect has determined that the work is substantially complete.
3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective.
4. All work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation/Alteration Operating Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so delegated by the Ithaca Building Department.
a. A member of the Ithaca Fire Department shall witness all acceptance or reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be in compliance with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code of NYS.
b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS and NFPA.
c. The Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance Testing for the Following Conditions:
- Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
CORSON HALL ROOM PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
- Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated from the rest of the system
- Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump.
- A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components.
- A Fire Alarm System where the wiring or control circuits have been modified.
- A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been replaced or the control unit software has been replaced.
- A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified
- An alternative fire suppression system that has been replaced or the actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement.
- A modification or extension of the piping for a fire standpipe system where a hydrostatic test is required by NFPA 14.
B. Final Acceptance:
1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect. After receipt of this notification and Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work will be furnished to the Contractor.
2. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels, casework, equipment, and building systems.
B. Contractor's Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final Completion.
C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
CORSON HALL ROOM PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications.
2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned.
3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring.
5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition.
6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean.
7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning.
8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began.
1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
CORSON HALL ROOM PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 77 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
CORSON HALL ROOM FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and an Excel template.
B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the Owner’s Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of equipment shall include:
1. Name of Product
2. Equipment Classification
3. Manufacturer
4. Model Number
5. Serial Number
6. Cost
7. Location (including Building and Room Number)
8. Acquisition Date (Date of Installation)
C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name plate and specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of the equipment and its’ disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using an electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable from the access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects.
E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with the equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e. - O&M manuals) to the Owner’s Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
CORSON HALL ROOM FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST
• Building Equipment
• AC Drive/VSD
• Air Dryer
• Backflow Preventor
• Air Compressor
• Building
• Sprinkler
• Control
• Vacuum
• Pump
• Condensate
• Glycol
• CWC
• HWC
• Potable
• Sanitary Sewer
• Storm Sewer
• Sump
• Quality Water
• Fuel
• Fan
• Exhaust
• Supply
• Return
• Fume Hood
• Furnace
• Generator
• Hot Water Heater
• Heat Exchangers
• Boiler
• Tank
• Unit Heater
• Fan Coil
• VAV Box
• Transfer Switch
• Motor
• Pump
• Fan
• Lift/Levelers
• Water Softener
• Reverse Osmosis
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
CORSON HALL ROOM FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 22***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORSON HALL ROOM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAINTENANCE DATA MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work.
2. Operations and maintenance data, in final format, shall be available to the Owner prior to substantial completion.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems.
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Submit a CD with electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system of complete manual in final form.
1. Format:
a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11”.
b. Text: Manufacturer's, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file.
c. Drawings in electronic format
- Drawings are required in PDF format. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD v14 or higher format.
d. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment.
- Provide type description of product, and major component parts of equipment.
- Provide indexed PDF bookmarks.
- Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORSON HALL ROOM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAINTENANCE DATA MAY 7, 2021
e. Cover: Identify each volume with title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
List:
- Title of Project
- Identity of separate structure as applicable.
- Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Table of contents, typewritten, for each volume, arranged in a systematic order.
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume.
3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of:
a. Subcontract or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
c. Identify the area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation.
c. Delete reference to inapplicable information.
C. Submittal Data:
1. Include a record copy of the final, approved product submittal. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect the “as-installed” system.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORSON HALL ROOM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAINTENANCE DATA MAY 7, 2021
D. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation.
3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
F. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give:
a. Proper procedures in the event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds.
1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system.
B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products:
a. Catalog number, size, and composition.
b. Color and texture designations.
c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products.
d. Certification as to asbestos free
2. Instructions for care and maintenance:
a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.
b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORSON HALL ROOM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAINTENANCE DATA MAY 7, 2021
C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Applicable standards
b. Chemical composition
c. Details of installation
2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications.
1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.
2. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication required:
a. List of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORSON HALL ROOM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAINTENANCE DATA MAY 7, 2021
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
9. Each contractor's coordination drawings.
a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams.
10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.
11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Circuit directories of panel boards:
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORSON HALL ROOM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-6 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAINTENANCE DATA MAY 7, 2021
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions.
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit through ePM system preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents thirty (30) calendar days after approved submittals.
B. Submit completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior the Acceptance Phase of the Project.
C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance.
1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems:
1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel.
B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction:
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORSON HALL ROOM OPERATING AND 01 78 23-7 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAINTENANCE DATA MAY 7, 2021
C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing:
1. Method of Instruction.
2. Equipment and Systems Operated.
3. Length of Instruction Period.
D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing.
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 23***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
CORSON HALL ROOM WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall:
A. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
C. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties.
1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials.
2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout."
3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 40.
4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
CORSON HALL ROOM WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed requirements relating to warranties and bonds.
B. Verify that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. In addition to standard and special warranties described in Divisions 2 through 40, Contractor shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following acceptance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by Owner, to cover performance, materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents.
B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar days when requested by Owner. Perform services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance of corrective work. Where designated service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written statement to Owner upon completion of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding items, if any.
1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the malfunction of a system affects the environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time (employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner, an EMERGENCY may be declared by the Owner. The Owner may declare an emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours and may require action during non-normal working hours.
2. When an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments and/or repairs when necessary to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way jeopardize the existing warranty.
3. The Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment or facility.
4. If the Contractor fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four (24) hours, the Owner will have the authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and charge the Contractor for parts and labor.
5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the Owner in relation to the above conditions are
done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future
warranty claims.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
CORSON HALL ROOM WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted Work, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect or Owner.
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
CORSON HALL ROOM WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution.
1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include the title of the Project and the name of the Contractor.
B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents and or references.
C. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.
D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Item description.
3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat)
4. Warranty Provider. Is the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer?
5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number.
6. Scope.
7. Duration.
a. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract
b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
CORSON HALL ROOM WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-5 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
8. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment.
B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period.
***END OF SECTION 01 78 36***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions.
6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
7. Field Test records
8. Construction photographs
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples.
B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s Representative and the Architect.
1.3 RECORDING
A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters.
B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
C. Drawings
As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall be kept current by the contractor on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional,
or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall be subject to approval of the Owner.
The day-to-day construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all changes to the following areas of construction:
1. Architectural:
a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code
b. Wall, door, window locations
c. Built in casework locations
d. New rated door and wall schedules/ locations
e. Material and products where submittals are requested
2. Civil and Structural
a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical
b. Materials and products where submittals are requested
c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems
d. Site related elements including:
- Building outlines, entranceways, areaways, roof overhangs, downspouts, significant architectural projections and other pertinent data.
e. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during construction.
f. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems
g. Geotechnical subsurface information
h. Items that will require future maintenance
i. Life safety critical items
3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection)
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
a. Products where submittals are requested
b. Final locations of all equipment.
c. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork.
d. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork.
e. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and actuators.
f. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance dampers and fire dampers.
g. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations.
h. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage.
4. Electrical
a. Products where submittals were requested.
b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type.
c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access Control/Security systems.
d. Final locations of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and power supplies.
e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions.
5. Environmental
a. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
CORSON HALL ROOM RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4 E136-E142A LAB RENO MAY 7, 2021
D. Specifications and Addenda
Legibly mark each section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. At Contract close-out, deliver copies of all record documents to the Owner’s Representative.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name and address
4. Title and number of each record document
5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate
6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 39***
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CORSON HALL ROOM E136-E142A LAB RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-210500-BASICFPREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
SECTION 21 05 00 - BASIC FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ROUGHING
A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are
diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction.
B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing.
C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate
interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new
materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work.
D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural
Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans.
E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of
connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows:
1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation
in new location.
2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time,
obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-210500-BASICFPREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255.
2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label.
3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards.
4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label.
5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such.
1.3 CONCEALMENT
A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In
areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance.
1.4 CHASES
A. New Construction:
1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work.
2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work.
3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings.
4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-210500-BASICFPREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above
finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment
damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves.
6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade.
B. In Existing Buildings:
1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings.
2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening.
3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors.
4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves
at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings.
1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies:
1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent
testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814.
2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction.
3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal.
4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or
addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items
passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-210500-BASICFPREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars.
6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations.
7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants.
2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP.
3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts.
4. Carborundum Fyre Putty.
5. 3-M Fire Products.
6. Hilti Corporation.
1.6 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size
shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper
information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as
manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels.
1.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-210500-BASICFPREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains.
C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required.
D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting
any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops,
sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow
prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves.
C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment.
D. Install controls and devices furnished by others.
E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required.
F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required.
G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 05 00 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-210500-BASICFPREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC.
B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required.
C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
END OF SECTION 21 05 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 21 10 10 - PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the
complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a schedule of pipe materials, fittings and connections.
B. Provide a detailed matrix listing the specific UL approved firestop system assembly to be used for each type of piping provided and each type of construction to be penetrated along with all associated UL assembly details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards.
2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe: ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 seamless, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or grooved for grooved mechanical connections.
B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe.
1. Welded Fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than
main size, use of "Weldolets", "Thredolets" or "Sockolets" acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples, and job fabricated reductions not acceptable unless specifically called for. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for.
2. Threaded Fittings: Class 125, cast or malleable iron, black or galvanized, as called for; UL listed and FM approved for fire protection systems. Street type 45° and 90° elbows are not acceptable.
C. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings:
1. Threaded Connections:
a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in.
and smaller.
c. Couplings: Malleable iron. Steel thread protectors are not acceptable as couplings.
2. Welded Connections:
a. Flanges: Welding neck type. Slip-on type not allowed unless noted and shall not be installed in conjunction with butterfly valves.
3. Grooved Mechanical Connections:
a. Couplings: Ductile iron, ASTM A395 and ASTM A536, with painted coating, designed for rolled grooved piping, hot dipped galvanized finish complying with ASTM A153 where called for.
b. Gaskets: Grade "E" EPDM synthetic rubber, -30°F to 230°F temperature range, suitable for water service.
c. Bolts and Nuts: Heat treated, hex head carbon steel, ASTM A183, cadmium plated or zinc electroplated.
d. Fittings: Elbows, tees, laterals, reducers, adapters as required shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A395 and A536. Fittings shall have grooves designed to accept grooved end couplings of the same
manufacturer.
e. Victaulic, rigid system, Style 005 couplings cast with offsetting angle pattern bolt pads to provide system rigidity and support in accordance
with ANSI B31.1 and B 31.9. UL listed and FM approved; 300 psi wwp; follow all terms of listings/approvals.
f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Grinnell, Gruvlok by Anvil, Victaulic or approved equal.
D. Gauge and Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass.
2.3 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS
A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
B. Unions: Factory fabricated, for 250 psi minimum working pressure at 180°F, threaded or solder ends, insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure and temperature.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
C. Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum
pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Victaulic, Watts or approved
equal.
2.4 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing.
B. Hangers:
1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Copper plated or PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. Hot-dipped galvanized finish for exterior locations.
2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller.
3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger.
4. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Hot-dipped
galvanized finish for exterior locations.
C. Spacing Schedule (Maximum Distance between Hangers (ft.-in.):
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (IN.) 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6 8
Steel Pipe N/A 12-0 12-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 Copper Tube 8-0 8-0 10-0 10-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0
Rod Size (in.) 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/2
D. Beam Attachments:
1. C-Clamp style, locknut, restraining strap, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller, complying with NFPA 13.
2. Center loaded style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements, complying with NFPA 13 .
E. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal, complying with NFPA 13.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
F. Supports:
1. For all piping larger than 2 in., provide intermediate structural steel members for hanger attachment. Members shall span across the bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum
factor of safety of four.
2. For weights under 1,000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts, "U" shaped Channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations.
3. For Metal Decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head" or approved equal.
G. Hangers for fire protection piping as specified and in accordance with NFPA 13. Hangers and building attachments shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service. Adjustable swivel ring type hangers are permitted for 3 in. and smaller piping.
2.5 PIPING ACCESSORIES
A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished areas.
B. All bushings and nipples required for instruments and gauges shall be brass.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Standard Type:
1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two (2) pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Provide full circle water stop collar for sleeves located within below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference.
2.7 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL AND FLOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated
wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing
laboratory's listing for the specific installation.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
2.8 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE
A. See Exhibit "A" - Piping Materials at end of this Section for Fire Protection piping.
B. See Exhibit "B" - Testing at end of this Section for Fire Protection piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable section of these Specifications, and Local/State Codes/Regulations having jurisdiction. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing, except where specifically called for, making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Changes in size shall be made with reducing fittings. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required, to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for.
B. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing.
C. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and
flanges in inaccessible locations. Materials within a system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric fittings.
3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment, including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters, motor control center, adjustable speed drives and fused switches.
B. Piping shall not be installed in the dedicated electric and working space as defined by NEC 110. Dedicated electrical space is generally equal to the depth and width of electrical equipment, and extends 6 ft. above the electrical equipment, or to a structural ceiling. Dedicated working space is a minimum of 30 in. wide or the width of equipment (whichever is larger) a minimum of 6 ft.-6 in. tall, with a depth of 3ft. to 9 ft. depending
on the voltage.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS
A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, from other piping, or by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, wood construction, welded supports, or beam clamps of proper configuration and loading
design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size called for, using four (4) nuts per rod. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers on diesel engine exhaust piping where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger than 2-1/2 in.; "C" types are permitted for piping 2 in. and smaller on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor.
3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed
until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application.
B. Grooved Mechanical Joints: Pipes joined with grooved fittings shall be joined by a listed combination of fittings, couplings, gaskets and grooves of a single manufacturer.
Lubricate and install gasket and couplings. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. Grooved ends shall be clean and free of indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove.
C. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Protect fittings from excessive heat.
3.5 WELDING
A. Welding shall be performed in compliance with the welding procedure specifications prepared by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Welded piping fabricated by qualified welder. Use certified welder where specifically required by code or insurance company. If indicated and permitted for fire protection systems, all provisions for welded pipe shall additionally be in accordance with NFPA Standard 13. Use full length pipe where possible; minimum distance between welds, 18 in. on straight runs. Welds must be at least full thickness of pipe with inside smooth and remove cutting beads, slag and excess material at joints; chamfer ends. Minimum gap 1/8 in., maximum 1/4 in., for butt welds. Overlaps on position and bench welds to be not less than 3/4 in. One internal
pass and one external pass minimum required on slip-on flanges. Do not apply heat to rectify distorted pipe due to concentrated welding; replace distorted pipe.
B. When welding galvanized pipe, apply cold galvanizing on joint following welding.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 7
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
3.6 SLEEVES
A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors that are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms and other areas with floor drains
use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings.
3.7 SLEEVE PACKING
A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows:
1. Interior locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk.
2. Cored holes: Use sealing element.
3. Fire rated, partitions and floor slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop.
4. Waterproofed walls/floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device or compound.
3.8 ESCUTCHEON PLATES
A. Provide polished chrome setscrew type escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms.
3.9 PIPE LINE SIZING
A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative and shall be justified by hydraulic calculations. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 10 10- 8
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS
SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS
Sprinkler (wet) Schedule 40, black steel, 2 in.
and smaller
Cast or malleable iron Threaded
EXHIBIT "B" - TESTING
SERVICE TEST REQUIREMENTS
Sprinklers Test hydrostatically at system pressure for two (2) hours in accordance with NFPA 13.
END OF SECTION 21 10 10
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 21 13 00 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the
complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the 2020 Building Code of New York State referenced edition of the following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards:
1. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
2. NFPA 25: Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems.
3. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code.
4. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition Operations.
B. Follow all requirements, recommendations and appendices to comply with the latest
edition of the following publications, codes, standards, and listings/approvals:
1. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) Approval Guide.
2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Fire Protection Equipment Directory.
3. 2020 Building Code of New York State.
4. 2017 Uniform Code Supplement.
5. OSHA Rules and Regulations.
6. Requirements of Insurance Underwriter and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
C. Equipment, devices, hangers and components shall be UL listed or and FM approved and labeled for the intended fire protection service.
D. The fire protection work shall be performed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection sprinkler systems.
E. Preparation of working plans, calculations and site observation of systems shall be completed by a NICET Level III technician under the direction of a qualified New York State Registered Professional Engineer.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC May 7, 2021
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The fire protection system shall be a wet pipe automatic sprinkler system arranged to properly protect spaces as indicated.
B. Water is supplied from the existing system and fire pump.
C. The system shall be hydraulically calculated in accordance with all provisions of the Contract Documents and any Authority Having Jurisdiction.
D. Calculations shall be based upon the specific hazard for the areas being protected. Refer to drawings for minimum requirements.
E. Maximum coverage for any sprinkler head shall not exceed NFPA requirements and the listing for the sprinklers provided.
F. A minimum 10 psi safety factor shall be provided between the available municipal water supply curve and the total system demand point. The total system demand point shall be at the municipal water main and include the calculated sprinkler and interior hose stream demands plus the exterior hose stream demand at the residual pressure required for proper system operation.
G. The maximum flow velocity shall not exceed 20 ft. per second in the piping system and 15 ft. per second in mains with paddle type waterflow indicators.
H. Water supply control valves shall be electrically supervised and mechanically locked for
proper position. Waterflow and supervisory circuits shall be in accordance with the requirements of electrical specifications. Electric connections to sprinkler system shall be by Division 26. Furnish wiring diagrams for all equipment.
I. Chains and locks provided by Cornell EH & S.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's catalog cut, specifications and installation instructions for each item or component of fire protection system. Clearly indicate pertinent information such as, but not limited to:
a. Manufacturer's model number.
b. Materials, size, finish and type of connection.
c. Pressure ratings of components.
d. FM approval/UL listing.
B. Certification: Submit Contractor's NICET certification and number.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC May 7, 2021
C. Drawings and Calculations:
1. All drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a New York State Registered Professional Engineer.
2. Submit complete NFPA 13 drawings and hydraulic calculations with cross
reference to applicable drawings, water supply data, and equipment schedule with ratings for the system to the Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter, and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
3. Submit hydraulic calculations for each design density/remote area with items in NFPA 13 incorporated including sketches to indicate flow quantities, sprinklers operating and direction of flow for pipes in looped and gridded systems.
4. Drawing shall be fabrication drawings provided to indicate actual sprinkler, standpipe and equipment layouts. Drawings shall be 1/4" = 1'-0" scale on reproducible sheets of uniform size. Drawings shall show all data required by NFPA 13.
5. Submit drawings in one (1) complete package.
6. Include Cornell EH & S and FP Engineer on submittal process.
D. Record Drawings and Documents:
1. Submit Record Drawings, hydraulic calculations, test reports, and NFPA Above
and Below Ground Material and Test Certificates to the Owner's Representative, Insurance Underwriter and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Mixing of manufacturers or models of the same or similar component will not be acceptable.
2.2 SPRINKLERS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Brass or bronze, 1/2 in. orifice, 1/2 in. NPT. 165°F ordinary temperature classification
for light and ordinary hazards. Use 286°F sprinklers in Mechanical, Electrical and Elevator Rooms; in vicinity of heat equipment/sources; and in accordance with NFPA 13.
1. Finished Ceiling Areas: Semi-recessed pendent sprinklers.
2. Unfinished Ceiling Areas: Natural brass/bronze finish pendent or upright sprinklers as required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Sprinkler Types and Design Equipment:
1. Quick Response Pendent and Upright: Reliable Model F1FR.
2. Quick Response Horizontal Sidewall: Reliable Model F1FR-HSW1.
3. Quick Response Dry Pendent and Horizontal Sidewall: Reliable Model F3QR.
C. Flexible Sprinkler Drops:
1. FM Approved braided Type 304 stainless steel tube with union joints, factory tested to 400 psi and listed for up to three (3) 90° bends including bracket for mounting to ceiling or building structure.
a. Design Equipment: Victaulic "VicFlex".
D. Sprinkler Guards:
1. Steel wire cage with base plate and retaining clamps. Same manufacturer as sprinkler.
2. Design Equipment: Reliable Model C-1.
E. Sprinkler Cabinets and Spare Sprinklers:
1. Steel or aluminum construction with shelves and shell holes to accommodate the
number of spare sprinklers required by NFPA 13.
2. Bright red finish with hinged front door and label.
3. Sprinkler wrenches compatible for each type used.
4. Spare sprinklers for each system of the type and proportion of those used in each system.
5. Design Equipment: Reliable Model A-4.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Reliable, Tyco, Victaulic, Viking or approved equal.
2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
A. At control, test and drain valves, provide permanently marked identification signs constructed of 18 gauge steel with baked enameled finish. The signs shall be permanently mounted on the piping or wall at the valve, or on the valve, but shall not be hung on the valve with wires or chains which permits easy removal of the sign. The sign shall clearly indicate the valve's purpose and what portion of the structure it serves. Additional signs, shall be provided at each alarm check and dry pipe valve to clearly indicate hydraulic calculation data.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC May 7, 2021
2.4 ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS AND SPRINKLER GUARDS
A. Include allowance for providing 5 additional sprinklers with related piping, fittings, hangers installed at locations where job conditions or equipment selections may be required. Provide a credit for sprinklers and guards not installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The nature of the work requires coordination with other trades. Shop fabrication shall be done at the Contractor's risk. Relocation of piping and components to avoid obstructions may be necessary. Relocation, if required, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. The installation shall be performed in a workmanlike manner as determined by the Owner's Representative and in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturer's printed installation instructions, and submitted and Owner's Representative reviewed drawings.
B. Piping shall not pass directly over electric panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and similar electric and telephone equipment. However, protection for these spaces shall be provided.
C. Piping shall be installed concealed above finish ceiling area with sprinklers located in the center of ceiling tiles where ceiling tiles are used.
D. Provide a readily removable flushing connection consisting of a cap at each end of cross
mains.
E. Provide sprinkler guards for sprinklers in mechanical and storage spaces, less than 8 ft. above finished floor subject to mechanical damage.
F. Upright sprinklers directly on branch lines shall be installed with their frame parallel to the piping.
G. Provide sprinkler protection under ductwork, groups of ductwork and other obstructions to water spray and distribution. Use intermediate level sprinklers if subject to waterspray from above.
H. Exposed pipe shall be left clean for painting.
I. Coordinate and activate the systems or portions of the system to operational status as soon as possible.
J. Temporary heat detectors need to be installed and tested before removal of any sprinklers that will last more than one work shift.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21 13 00 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-211300-FIRESUPPRESSIONSPRINKLERSYSTEMS.DOC May 7, 2021
3.2 PIPING, VALVES AND HANGERS
A. Refer to other applicable sections.
B. All piping shall be installed to permit drainage of the system through a main drain valve. Where a change in piping direction prevents drainage of the system, auxiliary drains shall
be provided. The auxiliary drain assembly shall consist of a lockable ball valve, nipple and cap or plug and shall be located 7 ft. or less above the finished floor. Pipe drain to an accessible location.
3.3 TESTS
A. General:
1. Pipe installation shall be inspected by Owner's Representative prior to being covered by building construction or backfill.
2. Perform tests in a safe manner. Provide written certification that tests have been successfully completed. Use NFPA Above and Below Ground Material and Test Certificate Forms.
3. Correct system leaks prior to final test. Do not utilize water additives, caulking,
etc. to correct leaks. Provide appliances, equipment, instruments, devices and personnel.
4. Flushing: Follow Contract Documents and utilize open end pipe sections if
possible.
5. Coordinate testing with CU EHS. All new joints to be exposed and pressure gauge to be located within work area.
B. Pressure Tests:
1. Hydrostatic Tests: Tested at building pressure and in accordance with NFPA 13 for two (2) hours. Per 25.2.1.1 and 25.2.1.4.2.
a. Air test not accepted as final test.
2. Do not subject existing systems to excess pressures.
3.4 SYSTEM TURNOVER
A. Prior to final acceptance, instruct the Owner's Representative in the proper operation, maintenance, testing, inspection and emergency procedures for all systems furnished, for a period of time as needed. Provide one (1) new original pamphlet of NFPA 25. Indicate in writing to the Owner's Representative the provisions for proper maintenance, testing, and inspection of the systems as required by local fire codes.
END OF SECTION 21 13 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220500-BASICPLUMBINGREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
SECTION 22 05 00 - BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ROUGHING
A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are
diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction.
B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing.
C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate
interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new
materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work.
D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural
Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans.
E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of
connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows:
1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation
in new location.
2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time,
obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220500-BASICPLUMBINGREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255.
2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label.
3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards.
4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label.
5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such.
1.3 CONCEALMENT
A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In
areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance.
1.4 CHASES
A. New Construction:
1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work.
2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work.
3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings.
4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220500-BASICPLUMBINGREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above
finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment
damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves.
6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade.
B. In Existing Buildings:
1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings.
2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening.
3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors.
4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves
at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings.
1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies:
1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent
testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814.
2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction.
3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal.
4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or
addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items
passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220500-BASICPLUMBINGREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars.
6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations.
7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants.
2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP.
3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts.
4. Carborundum Fyre Putty.
5. 3-M Fire Products.
6. Hilti Corporation.
1.6 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size
shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper
information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as
manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels.
1.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220500-BASICPLUMBINGREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains.
C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required.
D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting
any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops,
sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow
prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves.
C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment.
D. Install controls and devices furnished by others.
E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required.
F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required.
G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220500-BASICPLUMBINGREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC.
B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required.
C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
END OF SECTION 22 05 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation VALVES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220523-VALVES.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 22 05 23 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the
complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Document.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance with Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements. Obtain approval prior to ordering material.
B. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES - GENERAL
A. Valves shall have following requirements:
1. Working pressure stamped or cast on bodies.
2. Stem packing serviceable without removing valve from line.
3. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in
accordance with NSF Standard, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third party testing and certification.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Balance Valves: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Red White, Taco, Tour and Anderson.
2. Ball Valves: Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Red White, Watts.
3. Check Valves: Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Red White, Stockham, Watts.
4. To establish a standard of quality and identify features, certain manufacturer's numbers are given in the following paragraphs.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation VALVES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220523-VALVES.DOC May 7, 2021
2.2 DOMESTIC WATER VALVES
A. Check Valves:
1. 2 in. and Smaller: Lead-free swing check with silicone bronze body, bonnet and trim, PTFE disc seat and stainless steel seat disc washer, 200 psi working
pressure, Nibco T-413-Y-LF (threaded) or Nibco's S-413-Y-LF (solder).
B. Ball Valves
1. For all water services, ball valves shall be:
a. Body Bronze
b. Body Style Standard Port, 2 piece
c. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem, with stem extension to raise handle out of insulation
d. Seat Reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled double seal
e. Seat Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 250°F Minimum
f. Body Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 300°F Minimum
g. WOG Rating 300 psig Minimum
h. Lead free
i. Design Basis Apollo 70LF-240 or approved equal, Nibco T-580-66LF,
S-580-66-LF, Watts LFB6000-SS, LFB6001-SS.
C. Valves For Gauges And Instruments:
1. 1/2 in. size: Use a ball valve as listed above.
a. Provide at all new pressure gauges.
2.3 GAS VALVES
A. Ball Valves:
1. 2 in. and Smaller: Ball type, two-piece, full port, brass body with chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats, threaded ends, 600 psi WOG, UL listed for natural gas, Watts FBV-3C-UL.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation VALVES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220523-VALVES.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Gas Shutoff Valve and System:
1. Gas Shutoff System shall consist of a solenoid valve(s), relay control panel and shutoff valve switch.
2. Solenoid Valve: Aluminum body, explosion proof enclosure, conduit hub, Buna-
N seats, 80-90V DC power, normally closed, suitable for use with natural gas, UL labeled, FM approved; ASCO Series 8215 or approved equal.
3. Relay Panel: NEMA 1 enclosure for surface mounting, 120 V power input, 80-90V DC output, with transformer, relay, contacts for eight (8) valves, steel box enclosure with hinged door; ASCO Series 108D10C or approved equal.
4. Master Gas Shutoff Valve Switch: Key operated normally open switch with a normally closed pushbutton switch mounted in a stainless steel face plate, labeled "Gas Valve Control"; ASCO Series 216B89 or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Install
valves with stems at or above the horizontal position.
B. Inspect valves for proper operation before installation.
3.2 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM
A. Ball valves shall be UL listed for use in natural gas systems, or certified by another acceptable third-party testing agency.
END OF SECTION 22 05 23
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 53 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220553-PLUMBINGIDENTIFICATION.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 22 05 53 - PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A.Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation
designed in Contract Documents.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
A.All identification devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length ofcolor field, colors, and viewing angles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for eachidentification material and device. Submit valve schedule for each piping systemtypewritten on an 8-1/2 in. x 11 in. paper (minimum), indicating valve number, locationand valve function. Submit schedule of pipe, equipment and name identification forreview before stenciling or labeling.
1.4 MAKES
A.Allen Systems, Inc., Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div., Industrial Safety Supply Co.,Inc., Seton Name Plate Corp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A.Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for eachapplication. In cases where there is more than one type specified for an application,
selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.
B.All adhesives used for labels in the interior of the building shall comply with themaximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current versionof U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2.
C.For work within an existing building, the mechanical identification shall meet the intentof this section, but match the Owner's existing identification symbology.
2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A.Identification Types:
1.Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanentadhesive, color coded, pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying withANSI A13.1. Provide a 360° wrap of flow arrow tape at each end of pipe label.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 53 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220553-PLUMBINGIDENTIFICATION.DOC May 7, 2021
2.Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi rigid snap-on,
color coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI-A13.1.
B.Lettering:
1. Piping labeling shall conform to the following list:
PIPE FUNCTION IDENTIFICATION
Cold Water DOMESTIC COLD WATER Hot Water DOMESTIC HOT WATER Hot Water Recirculating DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATING Sanitary Waste SANITARY WASTE Indirect Waste INDIRECT WASTE
Vent VENT
Lab Vent LAB VENT
Lab Waste LAB WASTE
DI Water DI WATER
2.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A.Valve Tags:
1. Standard brass valve tags, 2 in. diameter with 1/2 in. high black-filled numerals.Attach to valve with brass jack chain and "S" hook. Identify between heating andplumbing services with 1/4 in. letters above the valve number.
2.Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton Style No. M4507, or approved equal.
B.Valve Chart:
1.Provide valve chart for all valves provided as a part of this project. Frame andplace under clear glass. Mount in Mechanical Room.
2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.General:
1. Provide engraved vinyl nameplates for each major piece of mechanicalequipment provided, 2-1/2 in. x 3/4 in. size.
2.Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton Style No. M4562, or approved equal.
2.5 ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT LOCATOR
A.3/4 in. diameter adhesive stickers placed on ceiling grid and color-coded.
B.The color for all plumbing valves shall be BLUE.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 53 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220553-PLUMBINGIDENTIFICATION.DOC May 7, 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A.Provide valve tags for all valves provided on project.
B.Provide equipment tags for all equipment provided on project.
C.Provide piping identification with directional flow arrows for all piping on project,maximum intervals of 20'-0". For piping installed through rooms, provide at least one (1)pipe label in each room, for each pipe function.
END OF SECTION 22 05 53
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220700-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 22 07 00 - INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the
complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Shall include product description, manufacturer's installation instructions, types and recommended thicknesses for each application, and location of materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Insulation, jackets, adhesive, and coatings shall comply with the following:
1. Treatment of jackets or facing for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water-soluble treatments not permitted.
2. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of pipes and equipment, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed
rating of 50 or less.
3. Asbestos or asbestos bearing materials are prohibited.
4. Comply with 2015 International Energy Conservation Code as amended by Part
1 of the 2016 Supplement to the New York State Energy Conservation Code.
5. Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items
that have been in satisfactory use for at least two (2) years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA or NAIMA Insulation Standards.
6. Insulation shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name, identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value, out-of-package R value, flame spread and smoke developed indexes in accordance with Energy Code requirements.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Fiberglass: Knauf, Johns Manville, Owen-Corning, Certainteed
B. Adhesives: Childers Products, Foster.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220700-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
2.3 PIPE INSULATION (RIGID FIBERGLASS TYPE)
A. Product meeting ASTM C 547, ASTM C 585, and ASTM C 795; rigid, molded, noncombustible.
B. 'K' Value: ASTM C 335, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service
Temperature: 1000°F.
C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ/SSL conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
D. Field-Applied PVC Fitting Covers with Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: Proto Corporation 25/50 or Indoor/Outdoor, UV-resistant fittings, jacketing and accessories, white or colored. Fitting cover system shall consist of pre-molded, high-impact PVC materials with blanket type fiberglass wrap inserts. Blanket fiberglass wrap inserts shall have a thermal conductivity ('K') of 0.26 at 75°F mean temperature. Closures shall be stainless steel tacks, matching PVC tape, or PVC adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre-forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
2.4 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Piping:
1. PVC Pipe Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll
stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. PVC Jacket Color: White.
2.5 COATINGS, MASTICS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS
A. Lagging Adhesives: Used in conjunction with canvas or glass lagging cloth to protect equipment/piping indoors. Foster 30-36 Sealfas; Childers CP-50AMV1 Chil Seal, or approved equal.
B. Fiberglass Adhesive: Used bond low density fibrous insulation to metal surfaces. Shall meet ASTM C916 Type II. Foster 85-60; Childers CP-127, or approved equal.
C. Insulation Joint Sealant: Used as a vapor sealant on below ambient piping with polyisocyanurate and cellular glass insulation. Foster 95-50; Childers CP-76, or approved equal.
2.6 PIPE SUPPORT INSULATION INSERTS
A. 20 lbs./cu. ft. molded fiberglass, for -120°F to +450°F service temperature, non-combustible, 0.30 thermal conductivity (k), same thickness as pipe insulation.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hamfab "H" Block, or approved equal.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220700-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
2.7 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES
A. See Exhibits at the end of this section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All materials shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged in this type of work. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes, and industry standards.
B. Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation. No glass fibers shall be exposed to the air.
C. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through hangers, sleeves, walls, ceiling, floor, or roof openings, unless not allowed by fire stop system. Refer to Sections 220500, "Basic Plumbing Requirements" and 221010, "Piping Systems and Accessories" for firestop systems.
D. Provide thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces and after piping and equipment (as
applicable) have been tested. Do not cover pipe joints with insulation until required tests are completed.
E. All cold surfaces that may "sweat" must be insulated. Vapor barrier must be maintained;
insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. Cover valves, fittings and similar
items in each piping system with insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Extra care must be taken on piping appurtenances to insure a tight fit to the piping system. For piping systems with fluid temperatures below ambient, all vapor retarder jacket (ASJ) seams must be coated with vapor barrier coating. All associated elbows, fittings, valves, etc. must be coated with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh to prevent moisture ingress. Valve extension stems require Elastomeric insulation that is tight fitting to the adjoining fiberglass system insulation. Pumps, strainers, drain valves, etc. must be totally encapsulated with Elastomeric insulation.
F. Provide protective insulation as required to prevent personal injury.
G. All pipes shall be individually insulated.
H. If any insulation material becomes wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture
or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site.
I. All exposed surfaces shall be white, unless noted otherwise.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220700-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
3.2 PIPE INSULATION
A. Insulate piping systems including fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers, and other attachments installed in piping system, whether exposed or concealed.
B. Insulation installed on piping operating below ambient temperatures must have a
continuous vapor retarder. All joints, seams and fittings must be sealed. Insulation shall be continuous through hangers on all water piping and storm water piping.
C. Hanger Shields: Refer to Section 221010 "Piping Systems and Accessories".
D. Hanger shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed as required.
1. Pre-Insulated Type: Butt insulation to hanger shields and apply a wet coat of vapor barrier cement to the joints and seal with 3 in. wide vapor barrier tape.
2. Field Insulated Type: Provide Hamfab Co. "H" blocks per manufacturers recommended spacing between pipe and shield.
3. Tape shields to insulation.
E. Joints in section pipe covering made as follows:
1. All ends must be firmly butted and secured with appropriate butt-strip material.
On high-temperature piping, double layering with staggered joints may be appropriate. When double layering, the inner layer should not be jacketed.
2. Standard: Longitudinal laps and butt joint sealing strips cemented with white
vapor barrier coating, or factory supplied pressure sensitive adhesive lap seal.
3. Vapor Barrier: For cold services, Longitudinal laps and 4 in. vapor barrier strip at butt joints shall be sealed with white vapor barrier coating. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, flanges, and fittings with white vapor barrier coating.
F. Fittings, Valves and Flanges:
1. Domestic Hot and Cold Water: Premolded fitting insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation.
2. White PVC jacketing, with continuous solvent weld of all seams. Tape all fittings.
G. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1 in. overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220700-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
H. Apply PVC jacketing to exposed insulated pipe, valves, fittings, and specialties, at an
elevation of 8 feet or less above finished floor in mechanical/electrical rooms, penthouses, and services aisles/pipe chases. Fittings of aluminum-jacketed piping may be either aluminum or standard PVC fitting covers. Jacketing for piping in existing areas
shall match existing jacketing.
I. Provide insulation on exposed hot and cold plumbing piping to within 18 in. of fixture or equipment connection.
J. Insulate exposed domestic water and waste piping for plumbing fixtures designated for use by the handicapped.
3.3 EXISTING INSULATION
A. Patch existing insulation damaged during the course of the work.
B. Jacketing for piping in existing areas shall match existing jacketing.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-220700-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
EXHIBIT "I" - PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS
Domestic cold water Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and larger: 1 in.
1-1/4 in. and smaller: 1/2 in.
Domestic hot, tempered and circulation water (105°F - 140°F)
Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and larger: 1-1/2 in. 1-1/4 in. and smaller: 1 in.
END OF SECTION 22 07 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 22 10 10 - PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the
complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a schedule of pipe materials, fittings and connections.
B. Provide a detailed matrix listing the specific UL approved firestop system assembly to be used for each type of piping provided and each type of construction to be penetrated along with all associated UL assembly details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards.
B. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance
with NSF, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third party testing and certification.
2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe: ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 seamless, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or grooved for grooved
mechanical connections.
B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe.
1. Welded fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets", "Thredolets" or "Sockolets" acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples, and job fabricated reductions not acceptable unless specifically called for. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for.
2. Threaded fittings: Cast or malleable iron, black or galvanized, as called for; drainage type where called for; UL listed and FM approved for fire protection systems. Street type 45° and 90° elbows are not acceptable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
C. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings:
1. Threaded Connections:
a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger.
b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in.
and smaller.
c. Couplings: Malleable iron. Steel thread protectors are not acceptable as couplings.
D. Gauge and Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass.
2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe: ASTM B88; Type K or L, hard temper. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube sizes.
B. Fittings: Wrought copper and copper alloy, ASME B16.22 or cast copper alloy, ASME B16.18; solder end connections.
C. Unions and Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast bronze, ground joint,
150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp.
D. Flux Materials: Flux shall comply with ASTM B813 and the provisions of the New York
State Plumbing Code.
E. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. Harris, Inc., "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silvabright 100", Canfield
"Watersafe" or approved equal.
F. Brazing Materials: Class BcuP-5 for brazing copper to brass, bronze to copper. Harris, Inc. "Stay-Silv 15" or approved equal.
2.4 HIGH PURITY POLYPROPYLENE PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Piping: Schedule 40 or 80 polypropylene produced without additives or pigments. Piping shall be sterilized and capped by manufacturer.
B. Fittings: Same material as pipe, sterilized and packed in individual bags by manufacturer, socket fusion weld joints.
C. Valves: Material shall be identical to pipe, socket fusion weld joints.
D. Design Equipment: Orion "Whiteline".
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Enfield, Orion Fitting, Inc., R&G Sloane.
2.5 ACID RESISTANT WASTE PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Polypropylene:
1. Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 40 flame retardant polypropylene, ASTM D4101.
2. Fittings shall be same material as pipe with thermal welded joints.
a. For accessible 1-1/2 in. and 2 in. piping below counters, sinks and equipment, provide mechanical joint or thermal welded unions at traps to permit disassembly.
b. Piping through wall or floor at roughing point for sinks and equipment shall be provided with male IPS threaded adapter.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers: IPEX "Enfield", Orion Fitting, Inc., R&G Sloane.
2.6 SPECIAL FITTINGS
A. Cast Iron to Lead Pipe: Red brass ferrules and wiped joints. Caulk ferrule into cast iron hub.
B. Copper to Cast Iron: Cast bronze, cast iron to sweat adapter.
C. Copper to Steel Piping:
1. Cast bronze copper to iron male or female adapter with shoulder for drainage piping only.
2. Dielectric pipefittings.
D. Steel to Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe connector with spigot and IPS male thread end (Manhoff fittings).
E. No-Hub, Cast Iron, Glass, Polypropylene or High Silicon Cast Iron: Proper adapter to piping being connected.
2.7 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS
A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
B. Unions: Factory fabricated, for 250 psi minimum working pressure at 180°F, threaded or solder ends, insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure and temperature.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
C. Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum
pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Watts or approved equal.
2.8 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing.
B. Hangers:
1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. PVC coated where in contact with copper piping.
2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller.
3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger.
4. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish.
C. Spacing Schedule:
Pipe Size Steel Copper Plastic Cast Iron Rod Size
3/4 in. to 1 in. 8 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. Each 3/8 in.
1-1/4 in. to 2 in. 10 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. Horizontal 3/8 in.
2-1/2 in. to 4 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. Joint 5 ft. 1/2 in. 5 in. and over 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. Maximum 5/8 in. 8 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. O.C. 3/4 in. Over 8 in. To suit loading conditions.
D. Cast Iron No-Hub Supports:
1. In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Vertical piping supported at each stack base, at each floor and 15 ft. on center, maximum. Freestanding vertical pipe should be adequately staked or braced during construction to maintain alignment. Bases of stacks shall be supported on concrete, brick laid in cement mortar, metal brackets attached to the building
construction or by other methods approved by the Owner's Representative.
3. Horizontal piping supported within 24 in. each side of the coupling joint at 10 ft. intervals for 10 ft. pipe lengths and at 5 ft. intervals for 5 ft. pipe lengths. Supports or hangers placed to maintain alignment and grade with provision made to prevent shear. Greater than 3 in. diameter pipe braced at changes of direction to prevent horizontal movement.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
E. Beam Attachments:
1. C-Clamp style, locknut, restraining strap, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller.
2. Center loaded style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam,
electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements.
F. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal.
G. Supports:
1. Provide intermediate structural steel members where required for hanger attachment. Members shall span across the bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety of four.
2. For Weights Under 1000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts, "U" shaped Channel, beam
clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations.
3. For Metal Decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in
concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head" or approved equal.
H. Trapeze Hangers:
1. For plumbing systems only.
2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four.
3. May be manufactured type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. Round off all sharp edges.
4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or pipe clamps, dissimilar metals shall not touch, use isolation gaskets. Fasten piping to trapeze at every third support.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut or approved equal.
I. Cabinet Pipe Space Supports:
1. Piping below casework countertops within space behind cabinet shall be
supported using continuous slot metal channels with pipe clamps.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut or approved equal.
J. Hanger Insulation Shields:
1. Hanger insulation shields shall be provided for all water and storm water piping. Hangers shall attach directly to pipe for all remaining services.
2. Piping 2 in. and Smaller: Pipe insulated with glass fiber insulation shall be protected at point of support by a sheet metal shield. Shield shall be #18 gauge, galvanized steel, minimum 120 degree arc, formed to fit insulation thickness and 12 in. long. Tape shields to pipe insulation.
3. Piping 3 in. and Larger: Pipe insulated with glass fiber insulation shall be protected at point of support by a sheet metal shield and pipe support insulation insert(s) between pipe and hanger. Shield shall be #18 gauge, galvanized steel, minimum 120 degree arc, formed to fit insulation thickness and 12 in. long. Tape shields to pipe insulation. Provide temporary blocking to maintain proper spacing for insulation.
K. Provide continuous support for unpigmented polypropylene piping.
L. Piping systems with material not listed above shall be supported and protected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.9 PIPING ACCESSORIES
A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished areas and at plumbing fixtures.
B. All cleanout plugs, bushings and nipples, required for instruments and gauges shall be
brass.
2.10 SLEEVES
A. Standard Type:
1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Provide full circle water stop collar for sleeves located within below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference.
2.11 SEALING ELEMENTS
A. Expanding neoprene link type, watertight seal consisting of interlocking links with zinc plated bolts.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Thunderline "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 7
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
2.12 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL AND FLOOR
ASSEMBLIES
A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the
standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform with the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation.
2.13 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE
A. See Exhibit "A", "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for (Plumbing) piping.
B. See Exhibit "B", "Testing" at end of this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable Section of these Specifications, and Local/State Codes/Regulations having jurisdiction.
Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing, except where specifically called for, making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing
fittings. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and flanges
in inaccessible locations. Materials within a system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric fittings.
3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment, including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters, motor control center, adjustable speed drives and fused switches.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 8
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Piping shall not be installed in the dedicated electric and working space as defined by
NEC 110. Dedicated electrical space is generally equal to the depth and width of electrical equipment, and extends 6 ft. above the electrical equipment, or to a structural ceiling. Dedicated working space is a minimum of 30 in. wide or the width of equipment
(whichever is larger) a minimum of 6 ft.-6 in. tall, with a depth of 3ft. to 9 ft. depending on the voltage.
3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS
A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, from other piping, or by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, wood construction, welded supports, or beams clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size called for, using four (4) nuts per rod. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger.
Provide continuous support or extra supports for plastic piping per manufacturer's requirements. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger that 2-
1/2 in.; "C" types are permitted for piping 2 in. and smaller on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. Use trapeze hangers where a group of piping can be installed.
B. Provide a pipe hanger within 12 inches of pipe unions and piping connections to equipment, in order to facilitate disconnections of piping without pipe sagging.
3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. No-Lead Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder.
B. Brazed Connections: Make joints with silver brazing alloy in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove working parts of valves before applying heat.
C. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application.
D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type and thickness for service applications. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
E. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Provide dielectric unions at ALL equipment connections where dissimilar metals meet. In addition, provide dielectric unions in all open type piping systems (condensing water, domestic water, etc.) where dissimilar metals are to be
joined.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 9
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
3.5 SLEEVES
A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors that are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed.
B. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms
and other areas with floor drains, use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor.
C. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for.
D. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating.
E. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete.
F. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings.
3.6 SLEEVE PACKING
A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows:
1. Interior Locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk.
2. Cored Holes: Use sealing element.
3. Fire Rated, Partitions and Floor Slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop.
4. Waterproofed Walls/Floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device or compound.
3.7 ESCUTCHEON PLATES
A. Provide polished chrome setscrew type escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms.
3.8 TESTS
A. Refer to Exhibit "B" at the end of this section for testing of Plumbing Systems.
B. Provide all necessary items to complete proper testing of work. Perform all testing in accordance with governing Codes, local utilities and other agencies having jurisdiction and as specified. Pay all costs to perform tests. Perform all testing in a safe manner. Isolate existing systems.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 10
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
C. Domestic Water:
1. Do not cover joints with insulation until required tests are completed and the Owner's Representative accepts the system.
2. Make leaks tight; no caulking permitted. Replace defective fittings, pipe or
connections. Piping shall be tight and show no loss of pressure.
3. Air test not acceptable as final test.
4. Confirm in writing that tests and flushing have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit copy of the test report to Owner's Representative.
D. Lab Waste:
1. There shall be no loss of water when testing interior piping.
2. Air test not acceptable as final test.
3. Should any leaks, defective joints or defective construction be detected in sewers and/or floors or walls of appurtenant structures, they shall be permanently stopped. Should any defective pipes, fitting or accessories be discovered they shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
4. Confirm in writing that tests have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit copy of the test report to Owner's Representative.
3.9 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING CLEANING AND DISINFECTION
A. Cleaning and disinfecting shall be in accordance with requirements of New York State Department of Health and authority having jurisdiction. Prior to disinfecting, flush piping to remove any sediment and debris.
B. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered, extended or repaired.
C. After disinfection procedures, submit water samples in sterile bottles to an approved Department of Health Laboratory. Samples shall be proven equal to the water quality served to the public from the existing water supply system and acceptable to the Department of Health. Flush and disinfect all sections of pipe that fail the laboratory tests. Submit test results indicating water is potable.
3.10 PIPE LINE SIZING
A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 11
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS (PLUMBING) SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS
Domestic water
interior/hot, cold and circulating 3 in. and smaller
Type L copper Wrought or cast copper No-lead solder
Lab waste and vent Polypropylene Polypropylene Thermal fused (joint) including concealed locations, mechanical joint below counters, sink and equipment only
ROD1 supply and return water Schedule 80, unpigmented polypropylene
Same as pipe Thermal fused
Natural Gas Schedule 40, black steet Malleable iron Threaded
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 12
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-221010-PIPINGSYSTEMSANDACCESSORIES.DOC May 7, 2021
EXHIBIT "B" - TESTING SERVICE TEST REQUIREMENTS
Domestic water Test hydrostatically at 150 PSI for two (2) hours or at 1.5 times the working
pressure when working pressure exceeds 100 PSI
Lab waste and vent Maintain 10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours.
Reverse osmosis, Test with inert gas (nitrogen) at a pressure of 125 PSI for two (2) hours.
Natural gas Test at 1-1/2 times working pressure
END OF SECTION 22 10 10
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 40 00 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-224000-PLUMBINGFIXTURESANDTRIM.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the
complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance with Basic Mechanical/Electrical Requirements. Obtain approval prior to ordering material.
B. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 - Products of this section.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF FIXTURES
A. Fixtures and trim shall be of those manufacturers listed, unless otherwise indicated. Fixtures for this project shall be of same manufacturer.
1. Faucets: Chicago Faucets, Delta, Moen, Symmons, T&S Brass or Zurn. All faucets shall be lead-free in accordance with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
2. Supplies, Stops and Traps: Brasscraft, EBC, McGuire or Sanitary Dash.
B. Exposed parts of trim shall have polished chrome plated finish.
C. Tubular drainage products ("P" traps, nipples, etc.) shall be 17 gauge brass.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of the Plumbing Fixture Law of the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation.
B. Comply with the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and ANSI A117.1 "Requirements
for the Physically Challenged".
C. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF Standard 61, Section 9 Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third-party testing and certification.
D. All fixture trim used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 40 00 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-224000-PLUMBINGFIXTURESANDTRIM.DOC May 7, 2021
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SINKS
A. SK-A:
1. This fixture will be supplied and set in place by the General Contractor (GC).
This Contractor shall provide faucet, drain tailpiece, stops, traps, adapters, piping, and fittings to the fixture. Provide the following:
a. Water Saver BT414BH-PCL, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing vacuum breaker gooseneck, hot and cold water, 4" wrist blades, and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish.
b. Water Saver BT691 BH-PCL, Pure water faucet, tin lined, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing gooseneck, 4 in. wrist blade and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish.
c. Town & country #PP-27MT polypropylene 1-1/2 in. jar-type deep seal P-trap with unscrewable cleanout jar. Threaded 90° ells when water piping is through floor. Size to match sink tailpiece.
d. Polypropylene 3 in. open grid strainer and tailpiece.
e. McGuire #LF2167LKF, lead free, 1/2 in. supplies with 1/2 in. O.D. flexible risers, loose key stops and cast brass escutcheons with setscrews.
B. SK-B: (ADA Compliant)
1. This fixture will be supplied and set in place by the General Contractor (GC). This Contractor shall provide faucet, drain tailpiece, stops, traps, adapters,
piping, and fittings to the fixture. Provide the following:
a. Water Saver BT414BH-PCL, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing vacuum breaker gooseneck, hot and cold water, 4" wrist blades, and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish.
b. Water Saver BT691 BH-PCL, Pure water faucet, tin lined, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing gooseneck, 4 in. wrist blade and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish.
c. Town & country #PP-27MT polypropylene 1-1/2 in. jar-type deep seal P-trap with unscrewable cleanout jar. Threaded 90° ells when water piping is through floor. Size to match sink tailpiece.
d. Polypropylene 3 in. open grid strainer and tailpiece.
e. McGuire #LF2167LKF, lead free, 1/2 in. supplies with 1/2 in. O.D. flexible risers, loose key stops and cast brass escutcheons with setscrews.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 40 00 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-224000-PLUMBINGFIXTURESANDTRIM.DOC May 7, 2021
C. SK-C:
1. This fixture will be supplied and set in place by the General Contractor (GC). This Contractor shall provide faucet, drain tailpiece, stops, traps, adapters, piping, and fittings to the fixture. Provide the following:
a. Water Saver BT414BH-PCL, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing vacuum breaker gooseneck, hot and cold water, 4" wrist blades, and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish.
b. Water Saver BT691 BH-PCL, Pure water faucet, tin lined, round serrated hose connections, 6 in. swing gooseneck, 4 in. wrist blade and polished chrome plated finish w/ clear epoxy finish. Provide two (2) of these faucets, one for DI water and one for dechlorinated water with labels on each.
c. Town & Country #PP-27MT polypropylene 1-1/2 in. jar-type deep seal P-trap with unscrewable cleanout jar. Threaded 90° ells when water piping is through floor. Size to match sink tailpiece.
d. Polypropylene 3 in. open grid strainer and tailpiece.
e. McGuire #LF2167LKF, lead free, 1/2 in. supplies with 1/2 in. O.D. flexible risers, loose key stops and cast brass escutcheons with setscrews.
2.2 EMERGENCY FIXTURES
A. EW-A: (for the physically challenged)
1. Guardian G1805, Deck mount 90° swivel eyewash with stay open valve, and
backflow preventer, universal identification sign and meeting ANSI Z358.1.
2. Powers Emergency fixture thermostatic mixing valve meeting ASSE 1071, and cold water by-pass.
2.3 SPECIALITY FEATURES
A. Gas Outlet (GO-A):
1. Water Saver L4200-141FT wall mount, laboratory ball valve assembly, colored plastic disc and forged brass handle. Disc labeled "GAS".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Install fixtures, equipment and systems as shown on Drawings or specified herein in accordance with provisions of each applicable Specification Section and all local and
state codes having jurisdiction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 40 00 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20636.00 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-224000-PLUMBINGFIXTURESANDTRIM.DOC May 7, 2021
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers written installation instructions.
B. Carefully drill holes for through bolts to avoid chipping blocks or plaster.
C. Seal fixtures in contact with walls, floors and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone caulk. Match color to fixture color.
D. Immediately after installation, provide protective covering over fixtures and trim.
3.3 MOUNTING HEIGHT AND LOCATION
A. Mount fixtures at height and location as indicated on Architectural plans and elevations.
B. Mount accessible fixtures in conformance with the requirements of ANSI A117.1.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other sections of Division 22.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to provide proper flow and stream.
C. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
D. Clean fixtures, fittings, spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.
E. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after
units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components and retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly.
END OF SECTION 22 40 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 70 10 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-227010-NATURALGASSYSTEMS.DOCX May 7, 2021
SECTION 22 70 10 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the
complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide manufacturer's data sheets and installation instructions for all equipment and accessories in this section in accordance with Basic Mechanical/Electrical Requirements and Division 01.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Follow all requirements, recommendations, and appendices to comply with the following publications, codes, standards, and listings:
1. 2020 Fuel Gas Code of New York State.
2. American Gas Association.
3. Local Utility Company.
B. Provide equipment and accessories that are listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
1.4 GAS SERVICE
A. The existing gas service will be reused.
1.5 GAS PRESSURE
A. The maximum allowable gas pressure inside the building is 1/2 psi.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GAS PIPING
A. Piping Materials: Refer to Specification Section 221010, "Piping Systems and Accessories".
B. All exposed exterior and interior piping shall be primed and painted with one coat of alkyd primer and two coats of exterior acrylic latex gloss enamel. Color shall be as selected.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 70 10 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-227010-NATURALGASSYSTEMS.DOCX May 7, 2021
2.2 VALVES
A. Refer to Specification Section 220523, "Valves".
2.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Stainless steel construction and in accordance with ANSI Z21.24.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A. Provide distribution system from existing piping, including mains, risers, branches, drips, shut-offs and other required parts. Connect to appliances indicated or specified as requiring gas for their operation.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install gas piping at a uniform slope of 1/4 in. in 15 ft. to prevent traps. Horizontal lines shall slope upward to risers to the equipment.
B. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.
C. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
D. Install unions in pipes 2 in. and smaller, adjacent to each valve, regulator and at final
connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
3.3 GAS PIPING TESTS
A. Test natural gas systems according to 2020 Fuel Gas Code of New York State and the
local utility requirements unless otherwise noted:
1. Test pressure shall be 1-1/2 times working pressure, but not less than 3 psi for two (2) hours for steel piping.
B. Tests shall be witnessed by utility company. Make arrangements, provide all necessary items to complete testing and pay all costs.
C. All tests shall be performed prior to the connection of equipment. Regulator shall be isolated from test pressures. Soap test shall be conducted on all joints. Repair leaks and defects with new materials. Retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.
D. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 70 10 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
P:\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\PLBG\200311-227010-NATURALGASSYSTEMS.DOCX May 7, 2021
E. Provide written certification that tests have been conducted and satisfactorily completed.
Submit to Owner's Representative.
3.4 GAS LINE PURGING
A. At completion of pressure test, purge all natural gas systems according to 2020 Fuel Gas
Code of New York State and the utility company requirements.
END OF SECTION 22 70 10
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230500-BASICMECHANICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ROUGHING
A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are
diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction.
B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing.
C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate
interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new
materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work.
D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural
Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans.
E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of
connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows:
1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation
in new location.
2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time,
obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230500-BASICMECHANICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255.
2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label.
3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards.
4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label.
5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such.
1.3 CONCEALMENT
A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In
areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance.
1.4 CHASES
A. New Construction:
1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work.
2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work.
3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings.
4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230500-BASICMECHANICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above
finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment
damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves.
6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade.
B. In Existing Buildings:
1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings.
2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening.
3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors.
4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves
at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings.
1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies:
1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent
testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814.
2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction.
3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal.
4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or
addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items
passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230500-BASICMECHANICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars.
6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations.
7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants.
2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP.
3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts.
4. Carborundum Fyre Putty.
5. 3-M Fire Products.
6. Hilti Corporation.
1.6 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size
shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper
information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as
manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels.
1.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230500-BASICMECHANICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains.
C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required.
D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting
any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops,
sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow
prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves.
C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment.
D. Install controls and devices furnished by others.
E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required.
F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required.
G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230500-BASICMECHANICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide controlconnections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece ofequipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC.
B.Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring,electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections asrequired.
C.Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratoryequipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
23 05 04 - 1 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
ELECTRIC WIRING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230504-ElectricWiring.doc May 7, 2021
SECTION 23 05 04 - ELECTRIC WIRING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A.Provide labor, materials, equipment and services for the complete installation of motor
control wiring and temperature control wiring as required in Contract Documents.Provide wiring and conduit, required to connect devices furnished as part of or adjunctiveto the automatic temperature control system and for motor control regardless of thesource of supply. Control wiring includes 120 volt and lower voltage wiring for controlsignals directing equipment operation. Control circuits shall be 120 volt maximum.Provide wiring in accordance with requirements specified in Division 26 "Electrical" andthe National Electrical Code. Provide devices required for proper system operation,including special electrical switches, transformers, disconnect switches, relays, andcircuit breaker protection.
B. Coordinate all work with Division 26 "Electrical".
1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A.Power wiring for motors, motor starters and associated starting and control equipment, aswell as the motor starters (except in the case of equipment specified to have packagedcontrol/starters), are included in Division 26 "Electrical", unless otherwise called for.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A.Wiring shall be installed in compliance with all requirements of Division 26 "Electrical".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.Provide complete wiring diagrams for equipment systems. Deliver wiring diagrams toproper trades in time for roughing of conduit, equipment connections, and avoid delay inconstruction schedule. Wiring diagrams and roughing information to be wired as part ofthe Work of Division 26, "Electrical", shall be clearly indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A.Refer to Division 26 specifications for required wiring materials.
23 05 04 - 2 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
ELECTRIC WIRING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230504-ElectricWiring.doc May 7, 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A.Check electrical wiring pertaining to equipment for completeness and correctness ofconnections. Correct any misapplied motor and/or motor starter, improper thermal
overload device, or device which fails to function and resultant damage, whether due toincorrect connections or improper information on wiring diagrams.
3.2 WIRING FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS
A.Provide motor control and temperature control wiring for equipment. All wiring shall bein conduit, unless otherwise noted. Refer to Section 260501 for type of conduit to beused in specific applications. Provide 18 in. length flexible conduit at motors and devicessubject to vibration. Conduit supported on 5 ft. centers. Do not attach directly to hotsurfaces, piping, or ductwork. Control wiring shall be in separate conduit from all otherwiring. Provide green grounding wire circuited from starter, and run ground wirethrough conduit to each remote auxiliary relay, pushbutton station, remote panel heatingdevice, thermostat, or device with potentials in excess of 50 volts. Size ground wire as
required by NEC.
B.All temperature control wiring shall be plenum rated type, meeting the requirements ofNEC Article 300.
C.Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights, selector switches, auxiliary starter contacts, andother devices required to provide specified functions.
D.Where allowable by Code and contract documents, temperature control wiring may be
installed without conduit. Installation and wire insulation types shall be as described byNEC, Article 725. All low voltage wiring circuits 50 volt and under shall:
1. Be adequately supported using bridle rings spaced a maximum of 3 ft. on centersor other approved method when installed horizontally above accessible ceilingsor run exposed in unfinished areas.
2. Be installed in conduit when run in wall cavity or surface metal raceway whereno access is available to wall cavity, in finished areas.
3.Be installed in conduit when installed vertically in Mechanical/Utility Roomsfrom panels and devices up to above ceiling, or 10 ft. above finished floor if notceiling.
4.Be installed in conduit in all cases not specifically covered by the above cases, or
where subject to physical damage.
23 05 04 - 3 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
ELECTRIC WIRING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230504-ElectricWiring.doc May 7, 2021
3.3 EQUIPMENT WIRING
A.Provide power and control wiring between sections of electrical radiation units, betweenshipping splits, and between remote panels, thermostats, disconnect switches, and theirrespective units. Provide control wiring from the package control system, to each
respective electric heat coil, reheat coil or motor. Properly mount control package.Power wiring to and including disconnect switch shall be by Division 26, "Electrical".
3.4 FIELD WIRING IN STARTERS, CONTROLLERS AND PANELS
A.Wiring within starters, controllers, and temperature control panels, shall be routed neatlyin gutter space, away from moving and/or heat producing parts. Provide suitably ratedterminal blocks. Do not place more than two wire connections on pilot device or relayterminal. Where more than two circuit connections are required, use terminal blocks.Provide nylon insulated, ring spade terminal for all control wires. Cables and wires shallbe neatly bundled and lashed with nylon cable straps.
END OF SECTION 23 05 04
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A.Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for
complete adjusting and balancing Work as required in Contract Documents.
B.This Section specifies the requirements and procedures of, mechanical systems testing,adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of thefluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, andrecording and reporting the results.
C.Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:
1.Supply air systems, all pressure ranges; including constant volume and variablevolume systems.
2.Return air systems.
3.Exhaust air systems.
D.This Section does not include:
1. Testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes;
2.Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems;
3.Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices.
If devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to therespective system sections for materials and installation requirements.
4.Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.Provide information in report form listing items required by specifications. Results shallbe guaranteed. Contractor shall be subject to recall to site to verify report informationbefore acceptance of the report by the Owner's Representative.
B.Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice toProceed, submit testing and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specifiedin Section 3.1.B, "Preparation", and consistent with those listed in Part 3 of thisspecification.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
C. System Readiness Checklists: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
AABC agency shall provide system readiness checklists as specified in Section 3.1.C, "Preparation", to be used and filled out by the installing contractors verifying that systems are ready for Testing and Balancing.
D. Examination Report: Provide a summary report of the examination review required in Section 3.1.D to the Engineer, documenting issues that may preclude the proper testing and balancing of the systems.
E. Certified report format shall consist of the following:
1. Title sheet with job name, contractor, engineer, date, balance contractor's name, address, telephone number and contact person's name and the balancing technician's name.
2. Individual test sheets for terminal units, air distribution, duct traverses, and reheat coils.
3. One complete set of reproducible record contract drawings marked up with terminal unit numbers, room numbers, testports locations, register, grille and
diffuser numbers to correlate test sheet. Data shall be provided with reports.
4. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." or
NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System testing, adjusting and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes:
1. The balance of air and water distribution;
2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities;
3. Electrical measurement;
4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls.
B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.
C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling).
D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design quantities.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield
reproducible results.
F. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. This data should also form the permanent record to be used as
the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing.
G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. There are supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on water terminals, and exhaust or return supply or outside air inlets or outlets on terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, and louvers.
H. Main: Duct containing the system's major or entire fluid flow.
I. Submain: Duct containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch mains.
J. Branch Main: Duct serving two or more terminals.
K. Branch: Duct serving a single terminal.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Follow procedures and methods published by one or more of the following:
1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
2. Individual manufacturer requirements and recommendations.
B. Maintain qualified personnel at project for system operation and trouble shooting. TAB contractor shall change sheaves and perform mechanical adjustments in conjunction with
balancing procedure.
C. Balancing contractor shall be current member of AABC or NEBB.
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in the AABC
National Standards for Total System Balance.
1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Before concealment of systems visit the job site to verify and advise on type and location of balancing devices and test points. Make changes as required to balance facilities.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Place systems in satisfactory operating condition.
1. Adjusting and balancing shall be accomplished as soon as the systems are complete and before Owner takes possession.
2. Initial adjustment and balancing to quantities as called for or as directed by the
engineer, to satisfy job conditions.
3. All outdoor conditions (Db, Wb, and a description of the weather conditions) at the time of testing shall be documented in the report.
4. Provide sheaves and belts as required to meet system performance requirements for all belt-driven fan motors 10 HP and greater. Adjust and align sheaves to obtain proper settings and operation. Verify motors are not overloading.
5. Installing contractor shall replace balancing cocks, flow balancers and dampers in new systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements.
6. Identify flow balancers, balancing cocks and dampers in existing systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements.
7. Traverse main ducts to determine total system air quantities after all outlets have
been set prior to final adjustment if the system does not meet design requirements. A sum of room CFM's is not acceptable.
8. If duct construction and/or installation prohibits proper traverse readings, provide coil measurements at main coils and/or fresh air intake traverse with units operating in 100% outside air mode (where applicable).
1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Provide Testing and Balancing agency one complete set of contract documents, change orders, and approved submittals in digital and hard copy formats.
B. Controls contractor shall provide required BAS hardware, software, personnel and assistance to Testing and Balancing agency as required to balance the systems. Controls Contractor shall also provide trending report to demonstrate that systems are complete.
C. Coordinate meetings and assistance from suppliers and contractors as required by Testing
and Balancing agency.
D. Provide additional valves, dampers, sheaves and belts as required by Testing and Balancing agency.
E. Flag all manual volume dampers with fluorescent or other high-visibility tape.
F. Provide access to all dampers, valves, test ports, nameplates and other appurtenances as required by Testing and Balancing agency.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
G. Installing contractor shall replace or repair insulation as required by Testing and
Balancing agency.
H. Have the HVAC systems at complete operational readiness for Testing and Balancing to begin. As a minimum verify the following:
1. Airside:
a. All ductwork is complete with all terminals installed.
b. All volume, smoke and fire dampers are open and functional.
c. Clean filters are installed.
d. All fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.
e. VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified.
f. System readiness checklists are completed and returned to Testing and Balancing agency.
I. Promptly correct deficiencies identified during Testing and Balancing.
J. Maintain a construction schedule that allows the Testing and Balancing agency to complete work prior to occupancy.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide tools, ladders, recording meters, gauges, thermometers, velometers,
anemometers, Pitot tubes, inclined gauge manometers, mangnehelic gauges, amprobes, veltmeters, psychrometers and tachometers required.
B. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six (6) months or more
frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine Bid Documents and submittals and notify Owner's Representative and Engineer of any questions regarding balancing.
1. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper Testing and Balancing of systems and equipment.
2. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
3. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
B. Prepare a Testing and Balancing Strategies and Procedures Plan that includes:
1. Equipment and systems to be tested.
2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.
3. Instrumentation to be used.
4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.
C. Prepare system-readiness checklists, as described in the AABC National Standards for
Total System Balance, for use by contractors in verifying system readiness for Testing and Balancing. These shall include, at a minimum:
1. Airside:
a. All ductwork is complete with all terminals installed.
b. All volume, smoke and fire dampers are open and functional.
c. Clean filters are installed.
d. All fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.
e. Permanent electrical power wiring and VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified.
f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
g. Ceilings are installed.
h. Windows and doors are installed.
i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 7
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
j. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
D. Examine construction and notify Owner's Representative and Engineer of outstanding issues related to balancing, as part of "Examination Report" submittal.
1. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or
relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas.
2. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, clean permanent filters are installed, and controls are ready for operation.
3. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected, configured by the controls contractor and functioning.
4. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
5. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, weld-o-
lets, and manual volume dampers prior to pressure testing. Note the locations of devices that are not accessible for testing and balancing.
3.2 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1. Measure and record the operating speed, water flow, and TDH of each pump.
2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information.
3. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
B. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.
1. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow rates. If 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 8
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and function.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 9
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling
unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and treating equipment.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system affect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align
design and actual conditions.
5. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to sheaves sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 10
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations
prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return-and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering
static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 11
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the
air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the conditions but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Re-measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-
pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that the adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record the final fan performance data.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR LABORATORY FUME HOODS
A. Before performing laboratory fume hood testing, measure, adjust and record the supply airflow and airflow patterns of each supply air outlet that is located in the same room as
the hood. Adjust the air outlet flow pattern to minimize turbulence and to achieve the desired airflow patterns at the face and inside the hood. Verify that adequate make-up air is available to achieve the indicated flow of the hood.
B. Measure, adjust and record the airflow of each laboratory fume hood by duct Pitot-tube traverse with the laboratory fume hood sash in the design open position.
1. For laboratory fume hoods installed in variable exhaust systems, measure adjust, and record the hood exhaust airflow at maximum and at minimum airflow conditions.
2. For laboratory fume hoods designed with integral make-up air, measure, adjust, and record the exhaust and make-up airflow.
C. For laboratory fume hoods that are connected to centralized exhaust systems using
automatic dampers, adjust the damper controller to obtain the indicated exhaust airflow.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 12
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
D. After balancing is complete, do the following:
1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood duct connection with the hood operating at indicated airflow.
2. Measure and record the face velocity across the open sash face area. Measure the
face velocity at each point in a grid pattern. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 in. between points and between any point and the perimeter of the opening.
a. For laboratory fume hoods designed to maintain a constant face velocity at varying sash positions, also measure and record the face velocity at 50 and 25 percent of the design open sash position.
b. Calculate and report the average face velocity by averaging all velocity measurements.
c. Calculate and report the exhaust airflow by multiplying the calculated average face velocity by the sash open area. Compare this quantity with the exhaust airflow measured by duct Pitot-tube traverse. Report
differences.
d. If the average face velocity is less than the indicated face velocity, retest the average face velocity and adjust hood baffles, fan drives, and other
parts of the system to provide the indicated average face velocity.
3. Check each laboratory fume hood for the capture and containment of smoke by using a hand-held emitting device. Observe the capture and containment of
smoke flow pattern across the open face and inside the hood. Make adjustments necessary to achieve the desired results.
E. With the room and laboratory fume hoods operating at indicated conditions all fume hoods installed shall be tested to current ASHRAE 110 Standard. Field test reports must be performed and prepared by an independent third party organization having no affiliation with the manufacturer. Results must indicate tracer gas performance ratings of 4.0 AI 0.05 or better for all tests. Manufacturer must have a representative on-site for all tests and must assist in trouble-shooting and correcting all non-conforming hoods.
F. Mannequin-as-Person Test: This test is intended to simulate real-world laboratory conditions in which a real person manipulates real objects in the hood. This test is performed with the investigator standing in front of the ejector while repeatedly moving
five (5) objects from one side of the ejector to the other, then rotating the body away from the hood with the elbows next to the body and the arms horizontal in front. This series of movements is repeated for the duration of the tracer gas test. The air sampling is
performed with a sampling probe at the same height as the breathing zone of the mannequin. Results must indicate tracer gas performance ratings of 4.0 AI 0.10 or better for all tests.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 13
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
G. Testing Contractor to provide a complete report of the results of the testing program
including an executive summary, an outline of the test procedures and equipment used, a table of the results of each test conducted on each hood and a conclusion and recommendation section discussing the results and (if necessary) recommendations to
improve fume hood performance.
3.8 ROOM DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TESTING
A. Upon completion of airflow balancing of all supply, return and exhaust registers (within specified tolerances), test and record differential pressures between spaces identified in Construction Documents.
B. Adjust volume dampers and/or control set points as required to achieve specified pressure differential. Immediately notify engineer if airflow settings are adjusted beyond tolerances specified in this section to ensure that air change rates or other less apparent considerations have been taken into account.
C. Test and record final differential pressure values and adjusted airflows. Clearly indicate positive or negative pressure differential in relation to which adjacent space as there may
be multiple adjacent spaces measurements are required for.
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Zero to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Minimum Outside Air: Zero to plus 10 percent.
4. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above.
3.10 FINAL TEST & BALANCE REPORT
A. The report shall be a complete record of the HVAC system performance, including conditions of operation, items outstanding, and any deviations found during the Testing and Balancing process. The final report also provides a reference of actual operating conditions for the owner and/or operations personnel. All measurements and test results that appear in the reports must be made on site and dated by the technicians or Test and Balance Engineers.
B. The report must be organized by systems and shall include the following information as a minimum:
1. Title Page:
a. AABC or NEBB Certified Company Name.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 14
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
b. Company Address.
c. Company Telephone Number. d. Project Identification Number. e. Location.
f. Project Architect. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. i. Project Number. j. Date of Report. k. Certification Statement. l. Name, Signature, and Certification Number.
2. Table of Contents.
3. National Performance Guaranty.
4. Report Summary:
a. The summary shall include a list of items that do not meet design
tolerances, with information that may be considered in resolving deficiencies.
5. Instrument List:
a. Type b. Manufacturer c. Model
d. Serial Number e. Calibration Date
C. Required air side data - Test, adjust and record the following:
1. Duct: Traverse Zones
a. Cfm b. Static Pressure
2. Coil:
a. Entering air temperature (DB/WB) b. Leaving air temperature (DB/WB) c. Static differential d. Face velocity and area
e. Cfm f. Complete nameplate data
3. VAV Boxes and Lab Air Valves:
a. Minimum Cfm
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 15
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230593-TESTINGADJUSTINGANDBALANCING.DOC May 7, 2021
b. Maximum Cfm
4. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers:
a. Cfm b. Set, adjust and record air flow pattern
D. One (1) copy of the final test and balance report shall be sent directly to the Engineer of Record. Provide five (5) additional copies to the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230710-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 23 07 10 - INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the
complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit product data, product description, manufacturer's installation instructions, types and recommended thicknesses for each application, and location of materials.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 233100 - Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Insulation, jackets, adhesive, and coatings shall comply with the following:
1. Treatment of jackets or facing for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water-soluble treatments not permitted.
2. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of ductsand equipment, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Asbestos or asbestos bearing materials are prohibited.
4. Comply with 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State.
5. All adhesives, coatings and sealants used for insulation in the interior of the
building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2.
6. Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA or NAIMA Insulation Standards.
7. Insulation shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name, identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value, out-of-package R value, flame spread and smoke developed indexes in accordance with Energy Code requirements.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230710-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Fiberglass: Knauf, Manville, Owen-Corning, Certainteed. (Board, Blanket and Liner)
B. Flexible Elastomeric: Armacell, K-Flex.
C. Adhesives, Coatings, Mastics, Sealants: Childers, Foster.
2.3 DUCT INSULATION
A. Duct insulation shall have a thermal resistance (R) value identification mark by the manufacturer applied no less than every 10 feet, as per Energy Code requirements.
B. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket:
1. Knauf Duct Wrap meeting ASTM C 553 Types I, II and III, and ASTM C 1290; Greenguard compliant.
2. 'K' Value of 0.27 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature (Faced): 250°F.
3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: FSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II.
4. Installation: Maximum allowable compression is 25%. Securement: Secured in place using outward cinching staples in combination with appropriate pressure-
sensitive aluminum foil tape.
5. Density: Minimum 1.0 PCF.
C. Rigid Fiber Glass Board
1. Knauf Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB.
2. 'K' Value of 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 450º F.
3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK or PSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II.
4. Securement: Secured in place using adhesive and mechanical fasteners spaced a minimum of 12 in. on center with a minimum of 2 rows per side of duct. Insulation shall be secured with speed washers and all joints, breaks and punctures sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive foil tape.
a. Concealed Areas: Minimum 3 lb./ft.3.
b. Exposed Areas: 6 lb./ft.3 minimum density for duct less than 8 ft. - 0 in. above finished floor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230710-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
2.4 COATINGS, MASTICS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS
A. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Used in conjunction with reinforcing mesh to coat insulation on below ambient services temperatures. Permeance shall be no greater than 0.08 perms at 45 mils dry as tested by ASTM F1249. Foster 30-65 Vapor Fas; Childers CP-24, or
approved equal.
B. Lagging Adhesives: Used in conjunction with canvas or glass lagging cloth to protect equipment/piping indoors. Foster 30-36 Sealfas; Childers CP-50AMV1 Chil Seal, or approved equal.
C. Weather Barrier Mastic: Used outdoors to protect above ambient insulation from weather. Foster 46-50 Weatherite; Childers CP-10 Vi Cryl, or approved equal.
D. Fiberglass Adhesive: Used bond low density fibrous insulation to metal surfaces. Shall meet ASTM C916 Type II. Foster 85-60; Childers CP-127, or approved equal.
E. Elastomeric Insulation Adhesive: Used to bond elastomeric insulation. Foster 85-75; Childers CP-82, or approved equal.
F. Elastomeric Insulation Coating: Water based coating used to protect outside of
elastomeric insulation. Foster 30-65, or approved equal.
G. Insulation Joint Sealant: Used as a vapor sealant on below ambient piping with polyisocyanurate and cellular glass insulation. Foster 95-50; Childers CP-76, or
approved equal.
H. Metal Jacketing Sealant: Used as a sealant on metal jacketing seams to prevent water entry. Foster 95-44; Childers CP-76, or approved equal.
I. Reinforcing Mesh: Used in conjunction with coatings/mastics to reinforce. Foster Mast A Fab; Childers Chil Glass #10, or approved equal.
2.5 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES
A. See Exhibits at the end of this section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All materials shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged in this type of work. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes, and industry standards.
B. Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation.
No glass fibers shall be exposed to the air.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230710-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
C. All duct insulation shall be continuous through hangers, sleeves, walls, ceiling or floor
openings, or sleeves unless not allowed by fire stop system. Refer to Section 230500 "Basic Requirements" for firestop systems.
D. Provide thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces and after ductwork and equipment (as
applicable) have been tested.
E. All cold surfaces that may "sweat" must be insulated. Vapor barrier must be maintained; insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.
F. If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site.
3.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Provide external thermal insulation for duct. Not required where ducts have internal acoustical insulation. Make special provisions at dampers, damper motors,
thermometers, instruments, and access doors. Apply as follows:
1. Rigid Board Type: Impale board over mechanical fasteners, welded pins or adhered clips, 12 in. to 18 in. centers; minimum of two rows per side. Secure
insulation with washer clips. Self-adhesive clips are not acceptable. Staple all joints. Seal breaks and joints in vapor barrier with 4 in. wide matching tape and 4 in. glass-fab applied with specified vapor barrier coating. Apply tape over
corner beading where exposed.
2. Flexible Blanket Type: Install Duct Wrap to obtain specified R-value using a maximum compression of 25%. Installed R-value shall be per ECC of NYS. Firmly butt all joints. The longitudinal seam of the vapor retarder must be overlapped a minimum of 2 in. Where vapor retarder performance is required, all penetrations and damage to the facing shall be repaired using pressure-sensitive foil tape, and coated with vapor barrier coating prior to system startup. Pressure-sensitive foil tapes shall be a minimum 3 in. wide and shall be applied with moving pressure using a squeegee or other appropriate sealing tool. Closure shall have a 25/50 Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating per UL 723. Duct wrap shall be additionally secured to the bottom of rectangular ductwork over 18
in. wide using mechanical fasteners on 18 in. centers. Self-adhesive clips are not acceptable. Care should be exercised to avoid over-compression of the insulation during installation.
3.3 EXISTING INSULATION
A. Patch existing insulation damaged during the course of the work.
B. Insulate existing ductwork as called for.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation INSULATION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-230710-INSULATION.DOC May 7, 2021
EXHIBIT "II" - DUCT INSULATION MATERIALS
SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS
HVAC Supply Within mechanical rooms
or exposed at 8 feet or less above finished floor: Rigid fiberglass
Concealed: Flexible fiberglass
……………..……..1-1/2 in.
……………..………….2 in
Min. installed
R value of 6 Min. installed R value of 6
Supply ducts, exposed within the conditioned space served
………………. …NOT INSULATED… Does not include the associated supply ductwork within the
Mechanical Room or supply duct to the conditioned space.
Return-air ducts within heated building
envelope
………………. …NOT INSULATED… ……………
END OF SECTION 23 07 10
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
23 09 23 - 1 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
SECTION 23 09 23 - BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
A.The Building Automation Control System (BACS) is configured as a network with
control functions at multiple levels, and with multiple points of operator control andsupervision. The BACS includes centralized head-end computers, the EnergyManagement and Controls System (EMCS) workstations, data transmission systems,field panels and controllers, necessary interfacing controls, sensors and actuators. Thecontrollers contain microprocessors and other supporting electronics that perform localcontrol functions and execute application programs without requiring communicationswith the centralized head-end computers or workstations.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A.Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installationdesigned in Contract Drawings. Provide a complete Direct Digital Control System, toperform the functions described in this Section. Provide wiring and conduit required to
connect devices furnished as a part of, or accessory to, this automatic control system.Control wiring is defined as wiring up to and including 120 volts. Install wiring inaccordance with requirements of "Electrical Wiring" in Section 15A019, and the National
Electrical Code. Provide all required devices for proper system operation, includingspecial electrical switches, transformers, relays, pushbutton stations, etc.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.The complete automatic temperature control system shall be comprised of electroniccontrol devices with a microprocessor based Direct Digital Control System. All workshall be installed only by skilled mechanics.
B.The Temperature Control Trade/Supplier shall have a minimum of five years experiencein systems of similar size, type and complexity installed within a 100 mile radius.
C.The Temperature Control Trade/Supplier shall have a local service department (within a50 mile radius) and have available a minimum of three factory trained technicians withina 24 hour period.
D.All components shall be fully tested and documented to operate as a complete system.
E.Supplier must guarantee that all replacement parts will be carried in stock for a period of10 years minimum from the data that the system is commissioned.
23 09 23 - 2 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.Submit for review, a brochure containing the following:
1.Detailed piping and wiring control diagrams and systems description for eachsystem under control.
2. Detailed layout and nameplate list for component control panels and DDCpanels.
3. Submit a valve and damper scheduled showing size, pressure drop configuration,capacity, and locations. Provide apparatus Bulletins and data sheets for allcontrol system components.
4. A complete listing of input and output points, control loops and/or routines,including time of day functions, and facilities management system functions foreach controlled system. This listing shall include point logical names, identifiers,and alarmable ranges.
5. Provide as part of a separate submittal a hard copy of all graphics showingsystem components, sensor locations, setpoints and fixed/variable data. Engineer
shall review and approve graphic format prior to final acceptance of system.
1.5 WORK INCIDENTAL TO TEMPERATURE CONTROL TRADE
A.Furnish the following materials:
1. For piping work:
a.Control valves in piping.
b.Immersion sensing wells in piping systems.
c.Valved pressure taps.
2.For sheet metal work:
a. All automatic dampers, assemble multiple section dampers with requiredinterconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts throughduct for external mounting of damper and motors.
b.Provide access doors to other means of access through ducts or ceilingsand walls for service and adjustment of controllers, valves, and dampers.
B.Furnish written details, instructions and supervision for the above trades to Ensure properinstallation size, and location of any equipment furnished for installation by others.
C.Electrical trade to provide 120 volt dedicated emergency power with surge protection toall DDC panels and operator workstations.
23 09 23 - 3 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
D.Provide 120 volt dedicated emergency power and control transformers at all
microprocessor based VAV terminal unit controllers and laboratory air valve controllers.As an option, provide control transformers sized to serve multiple VAV terminal unitcontrollers and laboratory air valve controllers. Provide a junction box or boxes to obtain
power, on a per floor basis. See electrical plans for locations.
1.6 CONTROL SYSTEM GUARANTEES
A.Guarantee the new control system to be free from defects in material and workmanship,for a period of one year after final acceptance. Guarantee System to:
1.Maintain temperatures within 1°F above and below setting.
2.Humidity devices shall maintain relative humidity conditions within 3% of span0-100% RH.
B.Provide one year maintenance service of control components, to start concurrently with
the guarantee specified above. Such service shall include software updates and 24-hour,7-day emergency and seasonal inspection and adjustment of operating controls andreplacement of parts or instruments found deficient and defective during this period.
C.The Contractor will provide monitoring of the DDC system as soon as the system isoperating and then for a minimum of one (1) year (24 hours/day, 7 days/week) after theacceptance date. A monthly report will be sent to the Owner with a description ofgeneral system status and any alarms or off-normal conditions.
D.The Contractor will guarantee future availability of continuous, 24-hour, 7-day a weekservice for the systems through available maintenance contracts.
1.7 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION
A.When the Work has been completed, completely adjust and calibrate the control system.
Review the operation of each system input and output, control loops and/or softwareroutings, timing functions, operator entered constants and facilities managementfunctions and observe that they perform their intended functions. Provide a complete
values and points log, printed every hour, for one week to demonstrate control functionsand programming. Provide one point log for summer operation and one winter. Points tobe trended shall be selected by the engineer. When above procedure has been completed
and the control system is operating satisfactorily, submit a letter with one copy ofcompleted values and points log to the Owner's Representative advising them that thecontrol system is 100% complete and operates in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
B.After review and approval of points log by the Engineer, the control system trade shallschedule a technician on site for field review of system components, operation andgraphics as part of final system appearance.
23 09 23 - 4 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
1.8 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A.The following standards shall govern the design and selection of equipment supplied tofulfill the requirements of this section:
1.ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2012: BACnet®. - A Data Communication
Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks, as amended, andhereinafter referred to as "BACnet". American Society of Heating, Refrigeratingand Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 2012.
2. ATA/ANSI 878.1 (1992), ARCNET Local Area Network.
3. ISO/IEC 8802-3 (1993), Information processing systems - Local area networks -Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) accessmethod and physical layer specifications. .
1.9 PROCEDURES
A.For connection of devices and reconfiguration of existing devices on the CornellUniversity Building Automation and Control System Network:
1.Contractor making changes to existing devices or installing new devices on the
Cornell University Building Automation and Control System Network shallcontact the Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) Operation at 607-255-5777 at least one (1) business day in advance of the anticipated work to
initiate a service request with the Cornell Control Shop. The requestor shallprovide the following information:
a.Desired time to ,start work and the expected duration
b.The IP address of the device to be installed or configured
c.The physical location of the device including facility and room number.
d.Cell phone contact information for the installer.
2. Work will be permitted from 7:00 AM — 1:00 PM on business days Mondaythrough Thursday. The one (1) day notice requirement and hours restrictions willbe waived if the work is deemed an emergency. Personnel shall notify EMCSwhen the work is complete. Personnel are expected to be able to respond on siteif contacted by EMCS to correct any anomalies related to the work for a periodof up to four (4) hours after work is complete or if released by the FMCS,whichever is sooner.
23 09 23 - 5 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
1.10 BACNET/IP CHECKOUT
A.Prior to connection to the campus backbone network, it must be demonstrated to Cornellpersonnel that these criteria have been met:
1.The LP address, subnet mask and IP gateway address of the device to be
connected must be shown to be correct for the network connection about tomade.
2. The device's Device Instance Number (DIN) must be shown to conform toCornell standards.
3. In the case of devices that route to subordinate BACnet MS/TP or ARCNETnetworks, the network numbering must be shown to conform to Cornellnumbering standards.
4.The BACnet alarm Recipient List must contain the DIN (or BACnet Address,i.e., (BACnet Network Number, MAC Address)) of both the appropriate vendorserver (ALC) and the EMCS alarm server (currently Jarlsberg, DIN 510).
5. For each device containing network variables, a list of network variables must be
provided showing that each references a valid network-accessible point.
6. For each device containing points that are to issue Unconfirmed COVNotifications, a list of the points and their respective Change of Value (COY)
increments must be provided to prove that the device will not generate COVstorms.
7.BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) capability must be shown to be
disabled unless explicitly authorized by Cornell, i.e., the device's BroadcastDistribution Table (BDT) must be shown to be empty or non-existent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A.This section defines requirements for the sensors, controllers, computers, and generallythe components that make up the system and the means and methods by which they areinstalled.
B.Software and Hardware Updates - At the end of the first six months, and during thesecond six months, the Contractor shall update the equipment and any controllers,servers, workstations and HMI Web servers with the latest modifications andimprovements in software, firmware, and hardware that the manufacturer may have
incorporated in the furnished equipment.
C.Devices (i.e., sensors, meters, instruments, etc.) that are resettable must be installed in areadily accessible location (e.g., the device must be accessible at floor level without the
use of a ladder). No device shall require shutting down a building system for calibration.
23 09 23 - 6 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
D.Devices that are installed in an exposed location (i.e., not mounted within a cabinet) must
be suitable for such installations (e.g., do not install a device that is intended to beinstalled in a cabinet in an exposed location).
2.2 CONTROLLERS
A.Overview
1.The control system shall consist of an inter-network of controllers.
B.Controller Installation Requirements
1.Building- and system-level controllers shall be capable of operatingindependently, in stand-alone fashion, with no communication to other deviceson the network while performing their monitoring and control routines usingprograms and operating parameters stored in the controllers’ memory.
2. All points and functions that make up a functional system (typically that shownon one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for thisstand-alone functionality. Where control sequences depend on global variablessuch as OAT, the controller shall have the capability of either using the last value
or a default value. Design professional shall specifically indicate point groupingsfor stand-alone capability. Examples of required functional point groupings are:
a.All points and functions required to control an air handler with all
directly associated supply, return, and exhaust fans. This excludes theterminals that may be associated with that air handler. Values that maybe received across the network include:
1)Humidity;2) Emergency power source indication;3)Terminal based reset parameters;4)Smoke modes.
b. All points associated with the supply side of a hydronic system: pumps,flow meters, temperature and pressure sensors, proof indications, valvesetc. This excludes the terminals on that hydronic system. Values thatmay be received across the network include:
1)OAT and humidity;2) Emergency power source indication;3)Terminal based reset parameters.
c.All points and functions required to control one terminal systemincluding dampers, valves, flow meters, temperature and humiditysensors, etc. This does not include the scheduling period or any OA that
may be necessary for control.
23 09 23 - 7 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
3.Controller software must be capable of detecting hardware and software failures
and forcing all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the failure moderequirements defined on the drawings. In this state it shall issue an alarm.
4. Controllers must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all
required trending, when trending is buffered in the controller. Where controlsystem operation is hindered by the shortage of memory, contractor shall, at nocost to the Owner, either upgrade the memory or provide multiple controllers.The mix of points for multiple controllers shall not violate the stand-alonerequirements. Volatile memory is required to be backed up in the event of powerloss. Software stored in non-volatile memory will not have to be downloadedfrom the central server after an interruption of power occurs.
5. Controllers used for time-scheduled operations must be equipped with a batterybacked internal real-time clock function to provide a time base for implementingtime-dependent programs. Provision shall be made for the routine updating ofthe controllers’ clocks via a time master.
6.Resumption of power after an outage shall cause the controllers to automaticallyrestart and establish communications as needed by their applications. Controllershutdown based on a self-diagnosed failure in the power supply, hardware, or
software must set each piece of controlled equipment to a predetermined failuremode.
7. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source that powers any of the
systems it serves. In the situation where a controller will be required tocontinuously collect data to be transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitorscritical recovery information such as the presence of emergency power, it may benecessary to provide a UPS for the controller as well as any critical sensors.Where panels are provided with a different power source as the equipment (suchas when the panel is on a UPS), the panel shall be provided with a means ofmonitoring the power source to the controlled equipment. This can be adedicated power monitor or a value coming from transfer switch contacts.
2.3 SENSORS
A.General
1.The following indicates basic requirements for the I/O devices.
2.All sensors and transmitters shall be located in accessible locations that do notrequire system shutdown for calibration. Locate all remote transmitters incontrol panels 5' above finished floor.
B.Temperature Sensors
1. Sensor Resolution - When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensorrange shall provide a resolution of no less than 0.4°F (unless noted otherwise).
23 09 23 - 8 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
2. Room Temperature Sensor - These shall be an element contained within a
ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated base.
a. Sensing element – RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibrationpoint;
b. Provide set-point adjustment and appropriate cabling where indicated forzones. Public spaces shall not have setpoint adjustment. The setpointadjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable viathe BACS system;
c.Provide an occupancy override button on the room sensor enclosure andappropriate cabling where indicated (this shall include all office spaces).This shall be a momentary contact closure;
d. Provide the sensor with an alphanumeric display;
e.Provide sensor with communications jack and appropriate cabling forconnection to the BACS.
f.Temperature sensor shall be mounted at 46" A.F.F. to center line of
device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a common wall.All devices shall be installed in alignment.
3. Single Point Duct Temperature Sensor - These shall consist of a sensing element,
junction box for wiring connections, and a gasket to prevent air leakage orvibration noise. The temperature range as required for resolution is indicatedabove. The sensor probe shall be stainless steel.
a. Sensing element - RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibrationpoint.
4.Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor - These shall consist of an averagingelement, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage.Provide sensor lengths and quantities to result in one foot of sensing element foreach, two square feet of coil/duct face area. Temperature range shall be asrequired for resolution as indicated above.
a. Sensing element - RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibrationpoint.
5.Liquid Immersion Temperature Sensor
a. These shall include brass or stainless steel thermowell, sensor and
connection head for wiring connections;
b.Sensing element - RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°Faccuracy at calibration point. The temperature range shall be as required
for resolution of 0.3°F;
23 09 23 - 9 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
c. Refer to Cornell’s metering specification for temperature sensors that are
used for metering.
6.OA Sensors
a.These shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight
gasket to prevent water seepage. The temperature range shall be asrequired for the resolution indicated above;
b.Sensing element - RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°Faccuracy at calibration point;
c. On major/critical systems, one shall be provided for each;
d.Sensors shall be located on a north wall of the building and installed withstand-offs. On 100% OA systems and lab buildings, locate sensor inoutside air plenum.
e.Provide one sensor per mechanical room or building-level controller.
C.Pressure Sensors - The pressure transducers will be either diaphragm or strain gaugetypes:
1.Air Differential Pressure Transmitters:
a.Applications: Duct static pressure, air flow VP, filter DP, Fan DP, etc.;
b.Provide the smallest range feasible for the application. Provide zero and
span adjustments;
c.Accuracy: Plus or minus 1% of full scale for static and 0.25% for airvelocity;
d.Acceptable Manufacturers (Airflow): Air Monitor, Paragon;
e. Acceptable Manufacturers (Filter DP): Dwyer;
f.Acceptable Manufacturers (General and Static Pressure): Mamac, Setra.
2.Liquid Differential Pressure Transmitters:
a. Pressure transmitters shall gauge pressure in the form of a linear 4 to 20mA or 0-10 VDC signal. Sensor shall be installed with a valve manifoldand pressure/temperature test ports in lieu of pressure gauges. DPtransmitter shall be rated for 150 PSIG static pressure;
b. Span shall be no greater than 2 times the working differential pressure ofthe system to allow the highest possible resolution;
23 09 23 - 10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
c. Pressure transmitters shall meet the following performance criteria:
1)External span and zero adjustments;
2)1% accuracy over the entire span;
3)Wetted parts: Stainless steel with a silicone fluid-filled
diaphragm;
4) Repeatability: Plus or minus 0.5% at maximum span.
d.Install all transmitters with a three-valve manifold for venting, draining,and calibration;
e. Acceptable Manufacturers (Gauge and Differential Pressure): Mamac,Setra.
D.Flow Sensors
1.General - Flow sensors shall be carefully placed to ensure flow profiles that arerequired for accurate flow sensing. Designs shall specifically indicate thelocation of the sensors and indicate the length of unobstructed duct or pipeupstream and downstream from the sensor.
2.Water:
a.Water flow sensors shall meet the requirements necessary for use for testand balance duty as defined in the DCS specifications;
b. Water flow sensors for monitoring only shall follow CHW standardsdefined in the DCS specifications.
3.Air Flow (For Laboratory VAV and AHU/Duct Flow Stations):
a. Use a pitot-tube averaging grid of a material compatible with theenvironment. Fan inlet grids shall be used where possible to measure fanflow;
b.Accuracy: +/- 0.25%;
c.Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or less;
d.Auto-zero capability by venting ports to atmosphere;
e.All fan inlet style flow elements shall be provided by the fan vendor andshall not block or affect fan efficiency;
f.Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Monitor, Paragon;
23 09 23 - 11 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
g.Field calibrate to +/- 5% of field-measured airflow.
4.Air Flow (For Duct Airflow Monitoring):
a. Use a pitot-tube averaging grid of a material compatible with theenvironment;
b.Accuracy: +/- 0.25%;
c.Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or less;
d.Field calibrate to +/- 5.0% of field-measured airflow.
E.Current Switches (CS)
1. For Constant Speed Motors:
a.CS shall be provided for status indication of constant speed motors;
b.Switch shall indicate loss of status when current falls below an adjustabletrip point;
c.CS shall include LED indication of status;
d. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries (H708/ H908 series).
2.For Variable Speed Motors:
a.Typically, status indication that indicates VSD or bypass operation shallbe derived from contacts on the VSD. The VSD must be specified toinclude this option;
b. Otherwise, a current switch shall be provided for status indication. Theswitch shall be microprocessor based and suitable for use on a VSD;
c.Self-adjusting trip setpoint;
d. Factory programmed to detect belt loss undercurrent conditions;
e.CS shall include LED indication of status;
f.Acceptable Manufacturer: Hawkeye.
F.Combination Temperature/CO2 Sensors/Humidity:
1. Wall mount: Combination transmitter shall be mounted at 46 in. A.F.F. to centerline of device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a common wall.All devices shall be installed in alignment.
2. Power requirements: 12 VDC @ 15 mA to 190 mA.
23 09 23 - 12 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
3.Temperature sensing element: +/- 0.5 deg. F accuracy at calibration point.
4. CO2 sensing equipment: +/- 30 PPM or +/- 3% accuracy at 400 to 1,250 PPM.
5. Humidity sensing elements humidity from 10% to 90% with +/- 1.8% accuracy.Element shall have less than 1% drift per year.
6.Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic ZSP-HC-ALC or designequal.
G.Combination Temperature/Humidity:
1. Wall mount: Combination transmitter shall be mounted at 46 in. A.F.F. to centerline of device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a common wall.All devices shall be installed in alignment.
2. Power requirements: 12 VDC @ 15 mA to 190 mA.
3.Temperature sensing element: +/- 0.5 deg. F accuracy at calibration point.
4.Humidity sensing elements humidity from 10% to 90% with +/- 1.8% accuracy.Element shall have less than 1% drift per year.
5.Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic ZSP-H-ALC or design equal.
H.Dewpoint Sensors
1. Units shall be suitable for duct, wall (room) or outdoor mounting. Units shall betwo-wire transmitters utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or thin filmcapacitance change humidity sensors. Units shall produce linear continuousoutput of 4-20 mA for dewpoint temperature (°F). Sensors shall have thefollowing minimum performance and application criteria:
a. Accuracy: +/- 1.8°F;
b.Sensor Operating Range: As required by the application;
c. Long Term Stability: Less than 1% drift per year;
d.Digital display.
2.Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.Vaisala only.
23 09 23 - 13 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
2.4 CONTROL VALVES
A.General
1.All valves shall be provided and sized by the control trade.
2.Valves shall be applicable for the rated pressure and temperature service. Close
off pressures must be determined in concert with the actuators and valves shall beprovided to close off against extreme anticipated conditions.
3.Modulating valves shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stablefashion across the range of anticipated conditions. “Split ranging” of heating andcooling valves controlled by the BACS is not acceptable. A separate output fromthe BACS shall be provided for all control valves. General guidelines areindicated below. When the selection criteria indicated below are not met, flowcharacteristic analyses shall be submitted to demonstrate reasonable correlationbetween stroke and flow.
Valves with a CV greater than 30 may be pneumatically actuated, but should onlybe used if a cost benefit analysis shows they are preferred. Actuator positioning
requirements are as follows for each type, if used:
a.Electric Input: 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC;
b.Electrically piloted valves shall have a pneumatic actuator withpositioner;
c. Pilot positioners shall be required as necessary to keep the valve closedunder the maximum differential pressure.
4. The BACS output to modulating valves shall be analog. In addition:
a.Terminal reheat valves shall be proportional;
b.Fan coils and similar terminal device valves shall be proportional;
c.Radiation valves shall be two-position or proportional;
d.Unit heaters shall be two-position or proportional.
B.Water
1.General - Modulating water valves will generally be ball valves with an equalpercentage characteristic. Modulating water valves shall typically be sized for50-100% of the typical controlled circuit pressure drop at 70% wide open CV.The minimum design CV shall be no less than 1.9.
23 09 23 - 14 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
2.Chilled Water Building Mixing Valve (two-way)
a.Rotary-segmented ball ported industrial control valve;
b. Body: Flanged carbon steel;
c.Seat: Composition or stainless/Teflon;
d.ANSI leakage class: IV;
e.Trim: 316 Stainless;
f.Actuator: Electric
g.Typically CV shall be selected to give a 2 PSIG drop @ maximumbuilding flow with the valve at the 90% open CV. Verify the necessarypressure drop with the Department of Utilities and Energy Management(Utilities). For buildings located at extremities, check with Utilities sincerequirements may not be typical;
h.Valve shall seat against 40 PSI differential pressure (typical values;check with Cornell Utilities for location-specific values);
i.Flow Characteristic Equal percentage or modified equal.
j.Valve shall be normally open.
k.Acceptable Make: Fisher, Neles, Valve Solutions.
3.Coil Valves
a. Water and glycol control valves shall be rated to remain closed (zeroleakage) against 120% of the full shutoff head of the pumps, when thecontrol signal is set to "fully closed";
b.Type: Valves shall all be two-way, V-port valve with characterizingdisc, 1/4 turn;
c.Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated;
d.Stem: Stainless steel;
e. Seat: Fiberglass reinforced Teflon;
f.Actuator: Electric, one motor only;
g.Flow characteristics: Equal percentage;
h.Ball and Stem shall be stainless steel;
23 09 23 - 15 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
i.Fail positions shall generally be as follows, contact Cornell for special
circumstances requiring deviation from these requirements:
1)Terminal hot water radiation: fail last
2)Duct mounted re-heat coils serving animal rooms: normally
closed spring return.
3)Duct mounted re-heat coils serving laboratories: fail last
4)Duct mounted re-heat coils serving offices: fail last
5) Fan Coil Unit cooling coils: normally closed spring return
6)Pre-heat coils in Air Handling Units: normally open springreturn
7)Chilled water coils in Air Handling Units: normally closedspring return
8) Chilled Beam terminal cooling: normally closed spring return
j.Acceptable Manufacturers: Belimo, Valve Solutions.
C.Steam
1.Steam control valves shall be rated for the highest system pressure andtemperature and shall not lift when subjected to that pressure with the controlsystem set to “fully closed.”
2.All steam control valves shall be pneumatically or electrically actuated and havea flanged or screw body with a rating of 400°F or higher, as appropriate. Trimshall be rated for 400°F.
3.Use high performance segmented V-ball control valves for all steam controlapplications. Since Cornell does not require 1/3-2/3 sizing, these valves areextremely cost-effective; the energy savings associated with the reduced pass-through leakage often pays for the higher cost premium. In addition, these valvesrequire less packing maintenance and use much less vertical space thancomparable valves. Steam valves shall have the following characteristics:
a. Leakage Class: ANSI Class IV, minimum
b.Flow Characteristic: Equal Percentage
c.Rangeability: 300:1 turndown
4.On steam control valves with a normal differential pressure of 15 PSIG orgreater, stainless steel noise reducing trim shall be used.
23 09 23 - 16 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
5.Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.Fisher
b.Neles
c.Valve Solutions, Inc.
6.Fail positions shall generally be as follows:
a. Heat Exchangers/Converters: Normally closed spring return (to protectfor high temperature).
2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS
A.Dampers shall be applicable for the rated pressure and velocity service. Damperstructural rating shall exceed extreme anticipated conditions like fan deadhead.
B.Modulating dampers shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashionacross the range of anticipated conditions. Except where size dictates a single blade,dampers shall always be opposed blade. When a large section of damper is to beconnected to a single jackshaft, size limitations shall be followed. This will preventexcessive damper area or, more importantly, length from being connected to a single
jackshaft. Typically, the manufacturer’s recommendation shall be sufficient forspecifying a limit to the size of a damper bank that may have field fabricated jackshaftconnections.
C.Whenever possible, dampers shall have external crankshafts to allow the connection ofthe damper actuator outside of the air stream. This will allow for easier access to theactuators for maintenance.
D. OA control dampers shall be low leakage dampers with damper seals.
E.Output to modulating control dampers shall be analog.
F.Design make: Ruskin.
G.Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Ruskin, and Nailor.
2.6 DAMPER ACTUATORS
A.General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves withsufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or two-positionaction and adequate close off rating as required.
B.For AHU/ duct mounted dampers:
1. Actuators shall be electronic.
23 09 23 - 17 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
2.Standard Electronic Actuators: Shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full
cycles at full torque and be UL 873 listed. Provide stroke indicator. Actuatorsshall have a positive positioning circuit and selectable inputs. Full stroke shall bewithin 90 seconds. Where fail positions are required, provide spring return on
the actuator with adequate close off force.
3.Acceptable Manufacturers: Belimo.
C.For terminal unit dampers:
1. Standard Electronic Actuators: Shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 fullcycles at full torque. Provide stroke indicator. Output to modulating damperactuators may be analog or floating.
2.Fast Acting Electronic Actuators: Provide fast acting electronic actuators forVAV terminals on fume hood and associated tracking zone dampers. Theseactuators shall move full stroke in less than one second. Output to modulatingdamper actuators shall be analog.
3.Venturi Style Air Valves: Provide a factory mounted and calibrated electronic
positioner and fast acting (less than one second full stroke) electric actuator withposition feedback.
2.7 CONTROL PANELS
A.Enclosures
1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, I/Omodules, power supplies, termination strips, battery (if not integral to the
controller or I/O module) and a spare AC outlet.
2. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shallbe from the bottom of the enclosure with wireway and conduit stubs from thewireway up to the panel.
3.All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the centralpanel.
4. Enclosures located in mechanical rooms shall be NEMA 4.
5.Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may beNEMA 1.
6. Enclosures shall be mounted on walls or free-standing supports.
7.Provide enclosures with key lockable doors.
23 09 23 - 18 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
B.Power Supplies
1. The Contractor shall provide a regulated, protected power supply as requiredwith the ability to produce at least 33% more current than required by thetransmitters and controls being installed. Output regulation shall be less than
0.5mV. There shall be no overshoot on turn on or off. Operating temperatureshall be -20 to +70ºC
2.The BACS Trade shall certify in writing at the time of shop drawing submittalthat the DDC equipment provided will not cause, as a result of its operation,either directly or indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into thebuilding’s electrical power systems.
3.Class II transformers shall be used.
C.Panel Fabrication
1. The Contractor shall size the panel such that no more than 80% of the surface ofthe enclosure back plate is used.
2.Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel.
3. Sufficient wire way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no morethan 80% capacity.
4.Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional.
5. All controllers, wiring, and components in the panels shall be labeled. Alllabeling shall match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall beprovided for each panel.
6.Label the power source and circuit number for each panel.
2.8 CONTROL WIRING
A.General:
1. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it isreadily accessible shall be installed in electrical metal tubing (EMT) withcompression or set screw couplings.
2. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cabletray or raceway.
3. All control wiring installed outdoors or any area subject to moisture shall beinstalled per code.
4.All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT.
23 09 23 - 19 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
5. All control wiring above non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT.
6.All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are notlaboratories or AHU’s shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatlyrun with generous use of rings or ties.
7.Wire shall be un-spliced from the controller to the sensor or device.
8. Control wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring.
9.Unless specifically required otherwise by the BACS equipment manufacturer, allI/O wiring shall be twisted shielded pair cable. For sensors, the shield shall begrounded at the panel and taped back at the sensor. For communications, theabove control wiring requirements and the BACS equipment manufacturer’sinstallation guidelines and recommendations shall apply.
10. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination.
11. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing,boxes, enclosures, components, and other controls-related work.
B.Responsibilities - The BACS Trade wiring responsibilities shall include the following:
1.All wiring from mechanical and electrical alarms and functions (as scheduled onthe drawings) as required to report these alarms and functions to the BACS head-end.
2.All line and low voltage wiring for the control of all HVAC motors (whetherindividual or as part of packaged equipment), automatic control valves, anddampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats,
actuating devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls, except asnoted below.
3.The electrical trade shall provide "lock-out stop" control wiring.
4.A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of motors which are to beautomatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system willbe run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures by the electrical trade.
5.A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to beautomatically and/or manually controlled directly by the fire protective alarmsystem (i.e., not in response to motor operation), will be run by the electricaltrades except for the power supply wiring to electric damper motors that isspecifically excluded from the electrical trade work.
6.ATC Trade shall provide all power supply wiring for all ATC suppliedcomponents.
23 09 23 - 20 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
PART 3 - DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1 GENERAL
A.This section of the guideline defines the requirements for the documentation of theinstalled systems. The BACS vendor shall generally provide the documentation covered
herein.
3.2 BACS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
A.Vendors providing controls for Cornell University shall maintain site-wide configurationdocumentation. Whenever the BACS is extended, the documentation required in thissection shall be provided/updated per configuration management requirements to reflectthe entire installation on the campus. Device naming and addressing must conform toCornell’s specific conventions as detailed in Cornell Design & Construction Standard15956. No device will be connected to a Cornell network until these conventions havebeen understood and met.
3.3 DOCUMENTATION FORMAT
A.Hard Copy (General): Paper copies of the indicated deliverables shall be provided as
directed by the project manager. Quantities shall be enumerated in the contractdocuments. At a minimum, three sets of hard copies shall be maintained; one at thefacility, one in the HVACR shop, and one in the project maintenance manual.
B.Hard Copy (Control Panels): Each control panel on the project shall include an as-builthard copy of all drawings and documentation associated with that panel and its fielddevices. This documentation shall be provided in a plastic protective pocket mounted
inside the panel door. In addition, see Operation and Maintenance Materials.
C.Electronic Copy: All submittal and as-built documents shall be provided electronically,to the HVACR shop. Different documents may be in different formats, however eachshall be provided in one of the first two formats as well as in the format in which thedocument was originally created, if it is different.
1.Microsoft Office format (Word, Excel, etc.)2. Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF).
3.4 SUBMISSIONS
A.Submittals: BACS documentation indicated herein shall be submitted for approval of thedesign professional and the project manager who shall get review and feedbackinformation from the HVACR Shop.
B.As-Built Drawings: As-built documentation as indicated herein shall be maintained andsubmitted to reflect the final installed condition of the BACS. The as-built documentsshall be kept up to date throughout the warranty period and submitted as final at the end
of the warranty period. One set of documents and files shall be provided to be storedlocally at the new facility and two sets shall be provided to be stored centrally.
23 09 23 - 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
3.5 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED
A.Control Schematics: Control schematics shall be utilized to graphically indicate thesystems, show the schematic configuration of the systems and location of control devices,define the point names and addresses (as applicable), and define the setpoints for control
elements. Control schematics are required both as part of the contract documents(generated by the design professional), shop drawing submittals, and as-built documentsubmittals. The following shall be included in the controls schematics at a minimum:
1. Point names.
2.Point addresses (not applicable to the contract documents).
3.Point type.
4.Normal position of output devices.
5.Device ranges.
6.Initial design intent setpoints modified as refined during construction/commissioning for as-built submittals.
7.Bill of materials listing all devices and manufacturer numbers (not applicable to
the contract documents).
8. Legend of device symbols.
B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each control device,
panel, controller, and accessory furnished indicating dimensions, capacities, performanceand electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation, start-up,calibration, and maintenance instructions as well as all cable and tubing requirements.
Provide these as a part of the shop drawings and as-built submittal.
C.Valve Schedules: Either with the control schematic or separately in shop drawingsubmittal and as-built submittal provide a valve schedule listing the following:
1.Size.2.CV.3. Design maximum flow.4. Pressure drop at design maximum flow.5. Position of valve at design condition.6.Manufacturer.7. Model/product number.8.Close off rating.
9. Normal positions.10.Valve characteristic.11.Valve turndown.
12.Actuator information.
23 09 23 - 22 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
13.Design controlled circuit pressure differential range (coordinated with the
submittals).
D.Valves shall be selected such that they are not, as a practice, “oversized.” Valve sizesshall be picked as close as possible to meet the design pressure drop. The minimum CV
shall be no less than 1.9 on all valves (See Section III, 3.04 “Control Valves” foradditional information).
E.Control System Architecture Diagram: Provide a system architecture one-line diagramindicating schematic location of all controllers, workstations, LAN interface devices,gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each control unit. Indicate physical media,protocol, communication speed, and type of each LAN (See also DCS 15956).
F.Control Sequence of Operations:
1.All projects shall include detailed sequence of operations. Sequences may be onthe control schematics or in the specifications in the contract documents, butshall be included with the control schematics for the shop drawing and as-builtsubmittal. Control sequences shall be highly detailed in the design phase and
shall maintain this detail throughout the as-built submittal phase. The followingshall be included as a minimum:
a.Sequences in all modes of operation (i.e., on, off, occupied, unoccupied,
warm-up, cool-down, summer, winter, economizer, etc.);
b.Detailed steps during mode switches;
c. Details of operation during and after a power outage. Loss of status
associated with power outages must not be indicated as failures with asubsequent alarm or lock out;
d.Specific direction on failure scenarios for loss of proof and all safetydevice trips;
e.Setpoints, trip points, and ranges. Initially these shall be the designer’sintent, and eventually be the actual setting at time of as-built submittal;
f.Smoke control systems;
g.Fire alarm panel interlocks and special operating modes.
2. All related equipment should be grouped together by areas served. Also, groupall sequences into functional sections (i.e., start/stop, static pressure control,economizer, etc.).
23 09 23 - 23 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
G.Points List: A detailed point list shall be provided in tabular form either with the control
schematics or separately. Indicate all physical and virtual points and organize bysystem/sub-system. Include names, descriptors, addresses (when known) and point typeswith applicable range as a minimum. These shall be provided electronically in either a
database format or in a spreadsheet format.
H.Alarms and Alarms List: Either as part of the points list or as a separate list, an alarmslist shall be provided. The list shall include the alarm point name, point type, and alarmparameters. All analog control loops shall include an adjustable setpoint deviation alarmbased upon error and time. The alarm parameters shall be the state the point is in tocause a particular alarm. An example of a point in this list is as follows:
1. Supply air temp (AI) +/-5°F from setpoint.
I.Floor Plans: Provide a set of floor plans with all controllers/control panels, sensors,operator workstations, interface devices, UPS’s, etc., located and identified. All networkcomponents (repeaters, routers, etc.) shall also be identified on the floor plan drawings.All BACS network wiring shall be shown and identified on the floor plan drawings.
J.Detailed Wiring Diagrams: Shop drawings and as-built submittals shall include detailedwiring diagrams. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Wiring diagrams shall includeboth ladder logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed
digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminalblock numbers identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings.Ladder diagrams shall appear on the system schematic. Clearly differentiate between
portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. These shallbe submitted with shop drawing and as-built submittals. All wiring of relatedcomponents that make up a system shall be grouped together in one diagram (e.g., allwiring diagrams for the components and devices on a particular AHU shall be shown onone drawing. The supply fan components and devices should not be shown separate fromreturn fan components and devices, etc.).
K.Sample Graphics and Trends: If the project includes web-based graphics and trends forthe use of interfacing to the BACS, the vendor shall submit for approval draft samples ofthe actual graphics to be used for the project. Design professional and project manager,after consultation with the HVACR Shop, shall approve the graphics.
L.Operation and Maintenance Materials: Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M)
materials generally in concert with training. O&M materials shall include the following:
1.Maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device,control unit, and accessory.
2.BACS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for allworkstation hardware and software and workstation peripheral.
3.BACS Programming Manuals for each controller type and for all workstation
software.
23 09 23 - 24 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
4.All submittals with as-built information (product data, shop drawings, control
logic documentation, hardware manuals, software manuals, installation guides ormanuals, maintenance instructions, and spare parts lists). As-built paneldrawings shall also be included as part of the O&M manual process. The
drawings that are located in each panel shall incorporate all the systemscontrolled from that particular panel. The drawings shall include the systemschematic and detailed panel wiring diagram (as detailed above). Also included(typically noted on the system schematic diagrams) should be the specificlocations of any remote devices such as remote static pressure sensors,differential pressure sensors, etc.).
PART 4 - BACS INFRASTRUCTURE
4.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.Automated Logic Corporation.
4.2 CONFIGURATION OF SYSTEMS
A.The control panels/enclosures housing the controllers will be located on each floor, to the
extent possible, to share vertical and horizontal wire-ways to facilitate and minimize thecost of home-runs to terminal equipment.
B.Control panels shall be located in the equipment rooms, where practicable, and in
locations such that the ambient conditions are between 50 and 90°F and 10 to 85%relative humidity. Control panels located in areas where conditions are outside of theseranges shall have enclosures outfitted with heating or cooling devices to provide the
proper environmental conditions. Hoffman style enclosures with removable back platesand keyed, hinged covers shall be used. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4 when locatedin mechanical spaces and NEMA 1 when located in occupied spaces.
C.The HVACR Shop must have quick, direct access to all control panels to maintainbuilding integrity similar to that provided for fire emergencies without going through userspaces. Field panels will be located outside of user areas where practical. If field panelsmust be located in user areas, they shall be in areas with easy access. Protection andseparation for user activities will be provided.
4.3 CONTROLLERS
A.The controllers provided pursuant to this guideline shall meet the performancerequirements for throughput, response time, point capacity, trend log capacity, etc., as
stated in this section. The controllers shall also be configured and programmed to carryout the sequences of operation contained in the project documents. While thisspecification contains several constraints on the controller system architecture, it is
recognized that a variety of configurations may be equally acceptable. For example, itmay be possible to meet the project requirements with a single large controller or severalsmaller ones.
23 09 23 - 25 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
Therefore, this guideline does not generally prescribe controllers' system architecture or
controllers' detailed characteristics, such as processor speed, amount of memory, amount of I/O, power supply details, etc.
B.Since these guidelines with respect to controllers are performance oriented, rather than
prescriptive, they will generally refer simply to “controllers” meaning computers capableof direct digital control. In those cases where distinguishing between controllers withdiffering capabilities is needed, the following nomenclature will be used:
1.Building-level controller. These are controllers that are connected to the campusbackbone network and communicate over Ethernet using BACnet/IP. They willtypically be used to control and monitor one or more large systems or be appliedto other building-wide functions. They shall, at a minimum, meet therequirements of a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC).
2.System-level controller. These controllers may, or may not, be directlyconnected to the campus backbone network. They will typically be dedicated tothe control of a single large piece of equipment such as an air handler or chiller
and a lab environment with fume hoods. They shall, at a minimum, meet therequirements of a BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC).
3.Field-level controller. These controllers will be on a lower performance BACnet
LAN such as MS/TP or ARCNET. They will typically be used for control of"unitary" devices such as VAV boxes, fan coil units, etc. They shall, at aminimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Application Specific Controller
(B-ASC).
4.4 UPDATING DATABASES AND GRAPHICS
A.Controllers: Controllers shall be provided with a real-time operating system resident inROM. It shall support all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritizationscheme to allow functional override of control functions. At a minimum, the followingshall be provided:
1.Real-time operating system software.
2.Real-time clock/calendar and network time synchronization (except field-levelcontrollers).
3. Controller diagnostic software.
4.DDC software.
5. Alarm processing and buffering software.
6.Energy management software.
7. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software.
23 09 23 - 26 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
8.I/O (physical and virtual) database. Inputs and outputs shall have the capability
to be overridden for emergency modes and testing. If the design documentationdoes not specifically indicate for which points this is required, control vendorshall request in writing a list of such points. If this has not been requested, the
vendor shall reprogram or reconfigure the systems as required during testing.
B.Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented, documented, and titled,and expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain controllogic for a specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve the ability ofthe end user to understand and interpret the logic easily. All software shall be submittedto the engineer and commissioning agent for review.
C.Trending: To support commissioning and building data mining, the BACS shall becapable of trending and archiving all points on building- and system-level controllers at aminimum of 15 minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the capability of trending atleast five points on each field-level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend datashall be uploaded to a central database as needed to prevent buffer overflow in the
controller. Controller memory capability, network architecture, and communicationsbandwidth shall be designed to account for this trending. The controls vendor shallprovide control trends during start up and prior to functional performance testing of the
systems. Reports shall be scheduled to output the data to a common format such ascomma separated text, Microsoft formats such as Excel and Access, and portabledatabase format. Trended data may also be archived in an Owner-accessible SQL
database.
D.Trend Graphs: Web-based software shall provide for displaying graphic plots of thetrended values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point typessimultaneously. Control vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for eachsystem. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager forrequired configuration. Provide a trend for every analog control loop that includes thesetpoint, process variable, and control output.
E.Real-time Plotting: Software shall be provided for real time plotting/graphing of multiplevalues in user-defined time intervals. These graphs will typically be used incommissioning to observe loop responses and system reactions. Control vendor shallconfigure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the
Commissioning Team Members and Project Manager for required configuration.
F.Web-based Graphic: In the event that a Web server is to be supplied to supply access tographic displays, these screens shall be provided:
1. Floor Plan Screens.
a.Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the building.Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the
equipment room screens.
23 09 23 - 27 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
Indicate the location of temperature sensors and the device associated
with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e., reheat coils, VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHU’s etc.) on the floor plan screens. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol.
Indicate room numbers as provided by Cornell University. Provide a graphic link from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen;
b. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, ifmechanical equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate the location ofeach item of mechanical equipment. Provide a link from each equipmentsymbol shown on the plan view screen to each corresponding mechanicalsystem schematic graphic;
c.If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphicbuilding key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to
graphically indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans.Link the graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans.Provide links from each larger scale floor plan graphic to the building
key plan and to each of the other graphic floor plan screens;
d.Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic.
2.System Schematic Screens.
a. Provide graphics for each air handling system. Indicate OA temperatureand enthalpy, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied,unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers tothe heating system and cooling system graphics Link screens for supplyand exhaust systems, if they are not available in a single graphic;
b.Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystemcontrolled. Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least onegraphic. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status,setpoints, current analog input and output values, operator commands,etc., as applicable. General layout of the system shall be schematicallycorrect. I/O devices shall be shown in their schematically correct
locations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed pointvalue. Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be includedfor each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a
pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with thecursor. Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable systemschematic graphic or, if space does not allow, on a supplemental linked
setpoint screen. All outputs shall be represented in terms of percent openand include a pop-up link to the control logic;
c.Provide a graphic for each hydronic system.
23 09 23 - 28 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
d. Provide a graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated
with the unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normaloccupied, unoccupied, warm-up, maximum heating, maximum cooling,etc.). Provide links between the applicable floor plan screen and this
screen. Also provide links to the graphics representing the parentsystems.
e.Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility historyreports showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peakvalues, etc.
f.Link screens to all schedules and setpoints.
PART 5 - MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM OPERATION
5.1 SMOKE DETECTION DEVICES AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A.Installed Smoke Detection Devices and Smoke Dampers
1.Smoke dampers are installed at each duct/smoke barrier penetration.
2.Every smoke damper has a local duct smoke detector.
3.Every smoke damper has a local remote test station.
4.Every duct smoke detector is addressable and is connected to the building firealarm system.
5.The building project area is provided with addressable area smoke detectors.
B.Fire Alarm Activation of Smoke Dampers
1.Duct Smoke Detectors:
a.Upon activation of any duct smoke detector, an addressable signal is sentto the building fire alarm system and the smoke damper associated withduct smoke detector is closed.
b. Upon receipt of the addressable duct smoke detector signal, the buildingfire alarm system shuts down both the supply and return fans or theexhaust fan, associated with the duct system that experienced thedetector activation.
c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drives being shut down, thebuilding fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated withthat duct system on a 30 second delay.
23 09 23 - 29 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
C.Non-Fire Alarm System Activation of Smoke Dampers (These activations do not cause
for a building fire condition to be annunciated)
1.Safety Device Activation
a.Upon activation of either the low-limit switch (freeze-stat) or the supply
duct high static pressure switch, both the supply and return fans are de-energized via hardwiring of the low limit switch in the fan startercircuits.
b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installedat the variable frequency drive of the supply and return fans then sendsan addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that theair handling system has been shut down.
c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drives being shut down, thebuilding fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated withthat duct system on a 30 second delay.
2.BMS (Building Management System) Component Fault
a.Upon activation of any of the following BMS component faults, thesupply and return fans, or exhaust fan are de-energized via BMS.
1) Supply fan VFD fault
2)Return fan VFD fault
3) Exhaust fan VFD fault
4)Exhaust fan current sensor fault
5)Outside air damper end switch fault
6) Return air damper end switch fault
7) Exhaust air damper end switch fault
b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installedat the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of boththe supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressablesignal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handlingsystem has been shut down.
c.Upon receipt of the associated fan system drive/starter being shut down,the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associatedwith that duct system on a 30 second delay.
23 09 23 - 30 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
3.EMCS Operator Activation:
a. When the EMCS system operator overrides the operational status of theair handling system and shuts down the supply, return, or exhaust fans.
b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked
through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fanshall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, thesupply fan shall be shut down automatically.
c.The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installedat the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of boththe supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressablesignal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handlingsystem has been shut down.
d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan systemdrive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall closeall smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second
delay.
4.Maintenance Operator Activation:
a. When a building maintenance staff member manually shuts off the
supply, return or exhaust fan at the starter disconnect switch, the supply,return or exhaust fans are shutdown.
b.The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be
interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is
shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. Ifthe return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut downautomatically.
c.The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installedat the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of boththe supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressablesignal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handlingsystem has been shut down.
d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system
drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall closeall smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 seconddelay.
23 09 23 - 31 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
D.Smoke Damper Testing - M/E Engineering offers the following suggestions for a smoke
damper testing protocol. The actual final protocol needs to be authored and approved byall Cornell parties and agencies of interest.
1.Duct Smoke Detector (Fire Alarm Condition):
a.Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the BuildingManager and Cornell Fire and Safety, apply smoke to any duct smokedetector in the ductwork of any air handling systems which serve theproject area.
b. Upon receipt of the addressable duct smoke detector signal, the buildingfire alarm system shuts down both the supply and return, or exhaust fansassociated with the duct system that experienced the detector activation.
c.The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installedat the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of boththe supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressablesignal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling
system has been shut down.
d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan systemdrive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close
all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 seconddelay.
e. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door.
2.Safety Device Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition)
a.Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the BuildingManager, manually trip the low limit switch (freeze-stat) associated withany air handling system in the project area.
b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installedat the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of boththe supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressablesignal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handlingsystem has been shut down.
c.Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan systemdrive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close
all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 seconddelay.
d.Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door.
23 09 23 - 32 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
3.BMS Component Interlock or Fault:
a.Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the BuildingManager, manually cause for a fault condition to occur in any of thefollowing BMS components:
1) Supply fan VFD fault
2)Return fan VFD fault
3) Exhaust fan VFD fault
4)Exhaust fan current sensor fault
5)Outside air damper end switch fault
6) Return air damper end switch fault
7) Exhaust air damper end switch fault
b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installedat the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of boththe supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressablesignal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling
system has been shut down.
c.Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan systemdrive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close
all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 seconddelay.
d.Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door
4.EMCS Operator Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition):
a.Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the BuildingManager, manually override the operational status of any air handlingsystem via laptop, PC or remote access to EMCS Webcontrol andshutdown the associated air handing system.
b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlockedthrough DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fanshall also be shut down automatically. If return fan is shutdown, thesupply fan shall be shut down automatically.
23 09 23 - 33 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
c.The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed
at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of boththe supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressablesignal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling
system has been shut down.
d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan systemdrive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall closeall smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 seconddelay.
e. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door.
5.Maintenance Operator Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition):
a.Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the BuildingManager, manually shut off any air handling system within the projectarea.
b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked
through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fanshall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, thesupply fan shall be shut down automatically.
c.The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installedat the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of boththe supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable
signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handlingsystem has been shut down.
d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan systemdrive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall closeall smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 seconddelay.
6.Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door
PART 6 - COMMISSIONING, TRAINING AND WARRANTY
6.1 COMMISSIONING
A.The BACS shall be fully commissioned. All acceptance testing, documentation, andtraining shall be required.
B. The BACS Trade’s responsibilities for commissioning and check-out include:
1.Provide all logic, graphics, and trends for review prior to the start of fieldcommissioning activities.
23 09 23 - 34 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
2. Provide a complete calibration and operational check for each individual point
and function contained within the BACS.
3. Conduct the checkout with the use of point/function log sheets to be prepared bythe contractor. The Owner shall approve the log sheet format.
4. Submit log sheets to the Owner prior to the commencement of any finalacceptance testing.
5. Certify, in writing, to the Owner prior to the commencement of final acceptancetesting that all components of the BACS system are functioning as per therequirements of the contract documents.
6. Provide to the Owner as-built drawings and documentation at least four (4)weeks prior to the commencement of any final BACS acceptance testing.
7.The BACS Trade shall issue a report upon project completion stating that thesystem is complete, has been adjusted, and has had all hardware and softwarefunctions verified, that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating inaccordance with the specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or
operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted.
8. The Contractor shall check out the installation with a representative from PDC.The checkout shall consist of verifying the ability of the BACS to communicate
with the central EMCS system, verifying the calibration of each sensor and/ortransmitter, and verifying the operation of each control point.
9. All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated to the Owner’s
representative. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for conformance. Analogcontrol points shall be exercised through their entire range. All control interlocksand sequences shall be completely verified. The checkout shall be a thoroughand exhaustive review of the installation to assure proper operation of the totalsystem.
6.2 TRAINING
A.Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives of thecontrol manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner’s operating personnel whohave responsibility for the mechanical systems and controls installed by the contractor.The contractor shall provide 8-40 hours of training depending on the size of the project.
B.The contractor shall make available to the Owner regular, scheduled training courses for
ongoing training of the Owner’s operating personnel. Programs shall include hardware- and software-oriented courses as well as energy conservation and management courses.
23 09 23 - 35 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018
\\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2020\20-0300\200311\Design\Specs\HVAC\200311-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc May 7, 2021
C.In addition to the normal training listed above, all vendors will be required to provide two
weeks of training at the BACS manufacturer’s training facility for four people. Thistraining only needs to be provided once for a particular set of installed BACS products.If a contractor has provided this training previously (on a previous project or directly with
the Owner) then the additional training does not need to be provided again.
6.3 WARRANTY
A.Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all workagainst defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one (1) yearfrom the date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by theOwner and for that period of time noted in special or extended warranties.
B.The Contractor shall provide all recommended preventative maintenance of the materials,equipment, and workmanship as necessary and as described in the operating andmaintenance manuals during the warranty period. In addition, the Contractor shallprovide two (2) semi-annual service visits (i.e., one visit during the peak cooling seasonand one visit during the peak heating season) to test and evaluate the performance of the
equipment. The Contractor shall provide a written report of the test and evaluationresults. The service visits shall include but not be limited to:
1.Checking and, if necessary, correcting the calibration of the sensors, transducers,
and transmitters for air flow, liquid flow, pressure, temperature, and humidity;
2. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the operation of the dampers and damperactuators;
3. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the operation (i.e., monitoring andcommand) of the system points.
END OF SECTION 23 09 23
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 23 31 00 - SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation
designed in Contract Documents.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in compliance with latest edition of the following standards.
1. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible Ductwork.
2. SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard.
3. SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
4. 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State.
5. NFPA Standards 96.
6. Plans and Specifications which exceed the requirements in any of the referenced standards.
7. 2020 Mechanical Code of New York State.
B. All sheet metal shall be fabricated and installed by an experienced Contractor specializing in this type of work.
C. All ductwork and fittings shall have a computer generated label affixed to the exterior surface of each section, detailing all applicable information including the duct dimensions, gauge, reinforcement type/class and connection type by systems
manufacturer. Galvanizing thickness shall be clearly stenciled on each duct section.
D. All ductwork on the project shall meet the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness For New Construction Guidelines, "Advanced Level" of duct cleanliness for production, delivery, storage and installation of ductwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Ductwork Shop Drawings.
B. Duct Access Doors.
C. Flexible Duct.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
D. Submit a complete shop standard manual including miscellaneous materials, and
construction details for all shop fabricated materials including, but not limited to, volume dampers, turning vanes, duct sealant, equipment flexible connections, access doors, flexible duct, acoustical duct lining, etc.
1.4 GENERAL
A. All adhesives, sealants, primers and paint used for ductwork in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2.
1.5 DUCTWORK CLASSIFICATION
A. Duct systems are to be classified and constructed per the SMACNA Velocity-Pressure classification system as follows:
1. All ductwork shall be constructed for a minimum pressure class of 2 in. w.g. (unless stated otherwise) for the following systems, as applicable:
a. Supply duct downstream of terminal units.
b. Typical low pressure supply ductwork.
c. Typical return ductwork.
d. Typical low pressure exhaust ductwork.
2. Supply duct upstream of terminal units shall be constructed for a minimum
pressure class of 3 in. w.g. unless otherwise stated or required as per below.
3. Pressure classes above 3 in. w.g. shall be provided as follows, based upon the external static pressure as scheduled for each specific fan.
Scheduled External Static Pressure Pressure Class
Over 3 in. up to 4 in. w.g. 4 in. w.g. Over 4 in. up to 6 in. w.g. 6 in. w.g. Over 6 in. up to 10 in. w.g. 10 in. w.g.
1.6 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Prepare minimum 1/4 in. scale drawings:
1. Detailed ductwork shop drawings shall include size, layouts and pressure classifications. Any ductwork installed without benefit of review by the Engineer of Record may be subject to replacement at the expense of the Contractor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
2. Constructed from actual field inspections and measurements so as to assure a
complete job.
3. Incorporate dimensions of actual equipment proposed for use on the project.
4. Showing adequate sections, elevations, and plan views and indicating the bottom
of ductwork elevations from the finished floor.
5. Indicating all volume dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, damper access doors and other accessories required for a completed project.
B. Call to the attention of the Engineers immediately, any major deviations from the Contract Drawings, which must be made. All deviations shall be documented in writing.
C. Indicate roof, wall and floor opening dimensions and locations shown on shop drawings.
D. Submit prints to each Contractor of the other trades for review for interference's and coordination with their work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise called for, provide materials in accordance with Exhibit I at the end of
this section.
2.2 SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK
A. Materials:
1. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Comply with ASTM A653 and A924, with G90/Z275 coating.
2. Stainless-steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as
indicated in Exhibit "I"; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D or No. 3 as indicated in Exhibit "I".
3. Aluminum sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.
4. Gauges per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
B. Transverse and longitudinal duct seams reinforcement shall conform to appropriate tables and figures per SMACNA Velocity-Pressure Classification for duct construction.
1. Transverse joints shall be sealed with duct joint sealant. "Ductmate" or "Nexus" 4-bolt connection systems may be used in lieu of standard construction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
2. Field assembled longitudinal seams shall be sealed with duct sealant. Factory or
shop fabricated rolled or machine pressed longitudinal seams does not require sealant.
C. Corner closures shall be required as described and illustrated by SMACNA Duct
Construction Standards.
D. Throat radius on all elbows shall not be less than the dimension of the duct plane of radius. Where this cannot be maintained, use shorter radius with internal guide vanes, or square elbow with turning vanes.
E. Bracing and hanging of ductwork shall be per SMACNA Standards for size and system class of ductwork being used.
F. Any transformations shall not reduce the ductwork cross-sectional area. Maximum angle
in straight duct, 20° for diverging flow and 30° for contraction flow. Transformation
from square to round or flat to oval seams welded or brazed.
2.3 ROUND DUCTWORK
A. Standard Round Ductwork:
1. Materials:
a. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Comply with ASTM A653 and A924, with G90/Z275 coating.
b. Stainless-steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in Exhibit "I"; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D or No. 3 as indicated in Exhibit "I".
c. Aluminum sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy
3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.
d. Gauges per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. Spiral lock-seam or
longitudinal fusion-welded.
2. All spiral ducts shall have locked seams so made as to eliminate leakage under pressure for which this system has been designed. Longitudinal seams duct shall
have fusion-welded butt seams.
3. No stovepipe will be allowed.
4. Round Ductwork Fittings:
a. All fittings fabricated per SMACNA Standards for round and flat-oval ductwork, material to match straight pieces of ductwork.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
b. Fittings shall have continuous, welded seams.
c. 90° tees shall be conical type. 90° tees and 45° laterals up to and including 12 in. diameter tap size shall have a radiused entrance into the tap, produced by machine or press forming. The entrance shall be free of any restrictions.
d. Round taps off the bottom of rectangular ducts down to diffusers shall be
made with a 45° square to round shoe-tap.
5. Elbows:
a. Diameters 3 in. through 8 in.: Two-section stamped and continuously welded elbows, material to match straight pieces of ductwork.
b. Over 8 in.: Gored construction with standing seam construction and
internally sealed or continuously welded. Less than 35° - two gores, 36°
to 71° - three gores, over 71° - five gores.
c. Fabricated to a centerline radius of 1.5 times the cross-section diameter.
d. Adjustable elbows are not allowed.
6. Joints:
a. For duct construction pressure 3 in. w.g. or greater:
1) Round Joints:
a) Unexposed Duct 3 in. - 30 in. Diameter: Connect round
duct with a one piece interior slip coupling, at least two gauges heavier than duct wall, beaded at center and fastener to duct with screws. Seal joint with an approved sealant applied continuously around both end of coupler prior to assembling and after fastening.
b) All Exposed Duct and Unexposed Duct 30 in. - 72 in. Diameter: Install using a three piece, gasket flanged-joint consisting of two internal flanges, with integral mastic sealant, and one external closure band, which compress the gasket between the internal flanges.
(1) Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Spiralmate" system or approved equal.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
c) Above 72 in. Diameter: Install using companion angle
flanged joints as defined in Figure 3-1 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" Third Edition. Refer to
manual for proper sizing and construction details.
d) Dust collection systems and exposed duct 3 in. - 14 in. use a one piece, polyethylene lined gasket connector with integrated bolt for the closure system.
(1) Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Quicksleeve" or approved equal.
b. Pipe-to-pipe joints in diameters up to 60 in. shall be by the use of sleeve couplings, reinforced by rolled beads.
c. Pipe-to-fitting joints in diameters up to 60 in. shall be by slip-fit of projecting collar of the fitting into the pipe.
d. Insertion length of sleeve coupling and fitting collar shall be 2 in. up to
36 in. diameter and 4 in. above 36 in. diameter.
e. Pipe-to-pipe and pipe-to-fitting connections in ductwork above 60 in. in diameter shall be made by angle ring flanges. The flange on the pipe
shall be a 2 in. x 2 in. x 3/16 in. angle attached to the pipe with a continuous weld. The fittings shall have a loose ring "Van Stone" flange. A 5/8 in. flange shall be provided to act as a gasketing surface for sealing
with the angle ring being a rolled, welded ring 2 in. x 2 in. x 3/16 in. Bolt hole spacing for angle rings shall be 6 in. centers.
f. If longitudinal seam duct greater than 60 in. in diameter is supplied in lengths greater than 4 ft., one angle ring must be welded to the duct on 4 ft. centers for support.
2.4 DUCTWORK SEALING
A. SMACNA Duct Sealing Classification shall be used for duct systems using the following criteria:
1. Ductwork and all plenums with pressure class ratings shall be constructed to seal Class A.
2. Openings for rotating shafts shall be sealed with bushings or other devices that
seal off air leakage. Pressure sensitive tape or sealing compounds shall not be used. Sealing compounds used to seal openings for rotating shafts shall not be used.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 7
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
3. All connections shall be sealed, including but not limited to spin-ins, taps, other
branch connections, access doors, access panels and duct connections to equipment.
4. Sealing that would void product listings is not required.
5. Spiral lock seams need not be sealed.
B. Duct sealant for indoor applications shall be non-fibrated, water based, Hardcast Iron-Grip IG-601, Ductmate PRO Seal, Foster 32-17 or Childers CP146.
C. Duct sealant for outdoor applications shall be fibrated, water based, Hardcast Versa-Grip VG-102, Ductmate Fiberseal, Foster 32-17 or Childers CP148.
D. Sealants and tapes shall be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181A or UL181B and marked according to type.
2.5 TURNING VANES
A. Provide in mitered elbows as shown on contract drawings. Vanes 36 in. or longer shall be double wall air foil type. All turning vanes shall be installed as per the latest SMACNA Standards. Turning vane size and spacing shall be as per SMACNA. Turning
vane spacing greater than SMACNA Standards is not acceptable.
B. Turning vanes shall be Harper or equivalent double wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct.
C. Turning vane front and back panels shall be securely locked together with adequate crimping to prevent twisting of vane. Vane shall be capable of withstanding 250 pounds of tensile load when secured according to the manufacturer's instructions.
D. Rails for mounting turning vanes shall have self locking, friction fit tabs designed to facilitate proper alignment of vanes. Tab spacing shall be as specified in Figure 4-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". Rail systems with non-compliant tab spacing shall not be accepted.
E. Acoustical Turning Vane: Shall be used in applications that require quiet operating systems. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs that align the vanes automatically.
F. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries PRO-Rail Turning Vane or approved equal.
2.6 DAMPERS IN DUCTWORK
A. Blade Type Volume Dampers: Constructed per SMACNA, one gauge heavier than duct material, securely fastened to 3/8 in. sq., cold rolled steel operator rod. Provide Ventlock
639 elevated dial regulator for 2 in. insulated ductwork or equal. Provide Ventlock 635 dial regulator for non-insulated ductwork or equal.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 8
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Multiple Blade Type Volume Dampers: Provide multiple blade volume dampers in
ductwork above 12 in. in height.
1. Heavy duty, manual balancing dampers suitable for application in HVAC systems with velocities to 1,500 ft. per minute, open position and max. pressure
of 3 in. w.g. close position. Ruskin MD 35 or equivalent.
2. Fabrication:
a. Frame: 5 in. x minimum 16 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel hat-shaped channel, reinforced at corners. Structurally equivalent to 13 gauge U-channel.
3. Blades:
a. Style: Single skin with 3 longitudinal grooves.
b. Action: Opposed.
c. Orientation: Horizontal
d. Material: Minimum 16 gauge equivalent thickness, galvanized steel.
e. Width: Nominal 6 in.
4. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame.
5. Linkage: Concealed in frame.
6. Axles: Minimum 1/2 in. diameter, plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically
attached to blade.
7. Control Shaft: 3/8 in. square plated steel.
8. Finish: Mill galvanized.
a. Actuator: Hand quadrant for 3/8 in. square extended shaft.
b. Hand Quadrant Standoff Bracket: 2 in. standoff for insulated ductwork.
c. Oillite bearings.
d. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20 gauge thickness, minimum 12 in. length.
C. Automatic Air Dampers: Furnished as part of "Building Management System" Section 230923, and installed by this Contractor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 9
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
2.7 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS AND CONNECTORS
A. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be constructed in compliance with NFPA Bulletin 90A, 90B and UL Standard 181 and shall be listed and labeled as Class I Air Duct.
B. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be tri-laminate:
1. Consisting of corrosion resistant galvanized steel helix encapsulated by a double lamination of polyethylene or spun bond nylon.
2. Factory applied (R 6.0 or R 8.0) fiberglass exterior insulation, sheathed in a seamless, tri-directionally reinforced, metalized polyester, exterior vapor barrier.
3. R-value shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories, and certified by the Air Diffusion Council, in accordance with ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standard (1991), using ASTM C-518, at installed wall thickness, on flat insulation only. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
4. Recommended operating pressure for flexible ductwork shall be three times maximum system press but not less than 6 in. w.g. positive pressure for 4 in. - 20 in. dia., 5 in. wg. negative pressure through 16 in. dia., 1 in. negative pressure for
18 in. and 20 in. dia. Maximum velocity of 5500 fpm.
5. Operating temperature range - 20°F to 250°F, intermittent @1/2 in. pos. w.g. max., -20°F to 140°F, continuous at maximum pressure.
6. Flame Spread: 25 max. smoke developed rating: 50 max.
7. Porous inner core flexible duct shall not be used.
C. Static pressure and thermal performance shall be tested and certified in accordance with
Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Test Code FD-72-R1 under conditions of 140°F for 164 hours and 180°F for 4 hours.
D. Acoustical performance shall be certified in accordance with ASTM E 477 and/or Air Diffusion Council Test Code FD-72-R1.
1. Minimum Acoustic Performance:
a. The insertion loss (dB) of a 6 foot length of duct when tested in accordance with ASTM E477 at a velocity of 1000 feet per minute shall be at least:
125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8 inch dia. 26 27 27 31 32 27 12 inch dia 22 26 24 31 31 20
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 10
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
E. Friction loss and leakage for flexible duct only shall be certified in accordance with Air
Diffusion Council Test Code FD-72-R1. Leakage for connections shall be accordance with UL 181 requirements.
F. Basis-of-Design: Flexmaster 6B (R-6.0).
G. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Dundas-Jafine Type SPC R6.0/ Type SPC R8.0.
2. Hart & Cooley Type F216 (R-6.0)/ Type F218 (R-8.0)
3. Flexible Technologies, Inc. Thermaflex Type M-KE (R-6.0)/ Type M-KE (R-8.0)
4. Atco Rubber Products, Inc. Type 036 (R-6.0)/Type 031 (R-8.0).
5. Superior Air Ducts Type SF 082 (R-8.0)
2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCT ELBOW SUPPORT
A. Provide flexible duct elbow support for flexible duct connected directly to a diffuser collar.
B. Elbow support shall be a radius forming brace designed to form flexible duct into a 90°
elbow not less than one duct diameter in centerline radius.
C. Elbow support shall be manufactured from 100% recycled copolymer polypropylene with a universal fit of 4 in. thru 16 in. and be UL listed.
D. Basis-of-Design: Titus Flexright.
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO FANS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Basis-of-Design: Ventfabrics, Inc.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ductmate Industries, Inc., Duro Dyne Inc., Elgen Manufacturing, Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
C. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, water and mildew resistant UL Standard 214.
D. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
E. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 in. wide attached to two (2) strips of 2-3/4-in. wide, 0.028-in. thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 in. thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 11
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
F. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/in. in the warp and 360 lbf/in. in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200°F.
G. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/in. in the warp and 440 lbf/in. in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250°F.
H. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-resistant coating.
1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/in. in the warp and 340 lbf/in. in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500°F.
I. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-in. movement at start and stop.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 12
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
2.10 ACCESS DOORS
A. General:
1. Provide access doors of adequate size to allow easy access to the equipment that will require maintenance. Provide insulated or acoustically lined doors to
prevent condensation where applicable.
2. Manufacturer to provide an installed neoprene gasket around perimeter of access door for airtight seal.
3. Systems 3 in. w.g. or less shall utilize a hinged, cam, or hinged and cam square framed access door.
4. Systems 4 in. w.g. and above shall utilize a sandwich type access door. Construct doors in accordance with Figure 7-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible" Third Edition.
5. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Sandwich" style door or approved equal.
6. All access doors shall be continuous piano hinged type, unless noted otherwise.
7. Non-hinged only allowed where clearance to ceiling does not allow a full 90° swing.
8. Double panel insulated type when used in insulated duct.
9. Single panel uninsulated type allowed in un-insulated duct.
10. Pressure rated according to system in which being installed. Door-to-frame and frame-to-duct gasketing.
11. Provide specified Seal Class A or B ductwork sealing around frame, and hand adjust the latch tension for proper seal, on all access doors other than sandwich
panel (Ductmate) style.
12. MINIMUM access door size for ducts 12 in. or less in depth is 12 in. x 8 in.
13. MINIMUM access door size for ducts 12 in. to 18 in. in depth is 18 in. x 14 in.
14. MINIMUM access door size for ducts more than 18 in. in depth is 24 in. x 18 in.
15. In ducts which require multiple section fire dampers due to duct size, provide one access door for each fire damper section.
16. Access doors for fire and smoke dampers shall be permanently labeled with 1/2 in. high lettering reading "SMOKE DAMPER" or "FIRE DAMPER".
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 13
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Door Types:
1. Low Pressure Systems (2 in. w.g. pressure class): National Controlled Air ADH-1, Ruskin ADH22, Vent Products 9701, Air Balance FSA-100, Safe Air SAH, Nailor.
2. Medium and High Pressure Systems (3 in. w.g. pressure class and higher):
a. Rectangular Duct: Ductmate Industries "Ultimate" Style Door, or equal.
b. Round Duct: Ductmate Industries Round Sandwich type, or equal. 8 in. x 4 in. for ducts 14 in. and less in diameter. Ductmate Industries Round Sandwich type 16 in. x 12 in. for ducts more than 14 in. in diameter.
c. Furnish and install factory supplied protector molding on cut medal edge for all Ductmate access doors.
2.11 EXHAUST HOOD CONNECTIONS
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide hoods and/or duct connections to hoods/fans where furnished by others.
2. Duct material, thickness and joints as required for gases and vapors involved and
per SMACNA.
2.12 CABLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Ductwork not required to be exterior insulated in exposed installations may be installed
using Gripple Inc.
B. Ductwork shall be installed using load rated, stainless steel cable suspension systems. Cables shall be pre-cut lengths, type 316 stainless steel with fused ends, and pre-made
end attachments.
C. Cable grips shall be of 316 stainless steel and have an internal tamperproof cable release mechanism.
D. Stress distribution saddles shall be prescribed in addition for the support of rectangular duct on corners as necessary.
E. Hangers shall have a manufacturer's published safe working load and have a 5 to 1 safety factor.
F. Hanger assemblies shall be tested and verified by SMACNA and be installed in accordance with SMACNA Standards.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 14
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
G. Adjustable steel cable hanging system consisting of spring loaded, serrated clamping
mechanism shall be tested and certified in compliance with all applicable SMACNA standards for upper and lower attachment methods.
1. All approved systems must be installed using matching components including
steel cable, clamping mechanism and hardware approved by the manufacturer for its corresponding load rating. No Substitution of manufacturer's components is permitted.
2. Approved systems must be installed per the manufacturer's specific instructions and must not exceed the stated working load rating at any point throughout the system.
H. Supports, bar/angle reinforcements, and other products that are not part of the duct that are manufactured of uncoated mild steel shall either be painted with two (2) coats of primer or shall be manufactured of a galvanized equivalent material.
I. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Clutcher" Cable Hanging System or Gripple Inc.
2.13 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of
length to suit duct-insulation thickness.
B. Ventlock 699 or 699-2 based upon insulation thickness.
C. Install duct test holes where required for duct traverse testing and balancing purposes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment and systems shall be installed in accordance with local and state codes and regulations having jurisdiction. Bracing and hanging of ductwork shall be per SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard.
B. Install all ductwork concealed and tight to the structure above unless noted otherwise on shop drawings. Fabricate only after the approval of shop drawings, and in locations to avoid interferences. Ductwork installed without approved shop drawings, which requires removal/modification and/or reinstallation due to conflicts or improper installation shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.
C. Sizes given on contract drawings are inside dimensions.
D. Keep openings continuously closed and sealed with protective plastic wrapping during construction to prevent entrance of dirt and debris.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 15
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
E. Extend access openings, damper rods and levers, to outside of external insulation make
systems airtight.
F. No piping, conduit or other obstruction to airflow is permitted in ductwork.
G. Provide necessary openings, hanger inserts, framing, chases, and recesses, not provided
by other trades.
H. Exposed exhaust or return registers and grilles shall be flush with face of duct; exposed
supply registers and grilles shall be mounted outside airstream with 45° shoe-tap extension collars.
I. Provide 14 gauge sleeves for ducts passing through Mechanical Room floors. Set sleeves
4 in. above finished floor in Mechanical Rooms, seal watertight to floor.
J. Where a return or exhaust duct is shown to be left open ended, provide hardware mesh screen at opening.
K. Do not utilize flexible ductwork or connection in any way to connect variable or constant volume boxes to ductwork.
L. For duct penetrations of non-rated walls, provide sheet metal angle framing or sheet
metal closure panels around the entire perimeter of each duct wall penetration on both sides of the wall, where the gap exceeds 1/4 inch. Where the gap is less than 1/4 inch, the gap may be caulked on both sides of the wall. Non-rated wall penetrations SHALL NOT be fire caulked under any circumstances.
M. For duct penetrations of rated walls, see Specification Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements.
3.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide flexible connections for the intake and discharge connections of duct connected
to fans and air handling equipment.
B. Round connections are to be made with adhesive and metal drawbands with ends tightly bolted.
C. Rectangular connections shall be made with material securely held in grooved seam between flanges. Attach with adhesive and mechanical fasteners on 6 in. centers.
D. Connections shall be made with a minimum of 2 in. space between duct and equipment
collars, installed in line, and with 1 in. excess material folded so as not to interfere with airflow through connection.
E. Mechanically fastened and sealed, with specified duct sealant, at duct and equipment
connections.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 16
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
3.3 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS AND CONNECTORS
A. "Air duct" applies to conduit or passageway for conveying air to or from heating, cooling, air conditioning or ventilating equipment but not including the plenum as defined in NFPA 90A. "Air connector" applies to conduit for transferring air between an air duct or
plenum and an air terminal device or an air inlet or an air outlet as defined by the NFPA 90A.
B. For round to oval connections, provide round-oval flexible adapter.
C. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be provided in fully extended condition, free from kinks.
D. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall not be used in systems with entering air temperatures in excess of 250°F.
E. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall use only the minimum length required to make the connection and shall be installed in the horizontal or vertical position. Flexible elbows are not acceptable. Do not exceed a maximum length of 48 in., fully extended.
F. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall use minimum 1/2 in. wide positive locking, steel
worm drive clamp, or nylon plenum rated straps for joints and connections. One clamp or strap for the inside core liner and one clamp or strap for the outer jacketing. When non-metallic (nylon) straps are used, they should be listed and labeled to standard UL
181B. Fastener package should be marked UL 181 B-C.
G. Collars to which flexible duct is attached shall be beaded and a minimum of 2 in. in length. Wrap twice with UL 181 tape and secure with clamp or strap. Sleeves used for
joining two sections of flexible duct shall be beaded and a minimum of 4 in. in length. The draw band shall be positioned behind the bead on the metal collar.
H. Outer vapor barrier and insulation shall be slid over inner core and collar, wrapped twice with UL 151 tape and secured with a clamp or strap.
I. Connections shall be per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible", Air Diffusion Council "Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards" and NAIMA Installation Standards.
J. Flexible duct shall be supported at manufacturer's recommended intervals, but no greater distance than 2'-6" on center and prior to all 90 degree bends. Maximum permissible sag shall be 1/2 in. per foot of support spacing. Provide a minimum of one hanger on each run of flexible duct.
K. A connection to rigid duct or equipment shall be considered a support joint. Long horizontal duct runs with sharp bends shall have additional supports before and after the bend approximately one duct diameter from the centerline of the bend.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 17
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
L. Hanger or saddle material in contact with the flexible duct shall be of sufficient width to
prevent any restriction of the internal diameter of the duct when the weight of the supported section rests on the hanger or saddle material.
In no case shall the material contacting the flexible duct be less than 1-1/2 in. wide.
Factory installed suspension systems integral to the flexible duct are an acceptable alternative hanging method when the manufacturer's recommended procedures are followed.
M. The hanger shall be strapped around the flexible duct and secured to the structure above. Hangers shall not be attached to other mechanical or electrical objects. Hangers may be attached to an approved trapeze. Ceiling grid shall not be used to fabricate a trapeze. Support hangers shall be installed horizontal. Screws shall not be used to penetrate the flexible duct to attach to the hanger.
N. Provide flexible duct connections and splices in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.
O. Seal flexible duct connections with sealing materials listed and labeled in accordance
with UL 181B. Mechanically secure connections with approved clamping materials.
3.4 TURNING VANES
A. Install only in square elbows of equal dimensions.
B. Install as per latest SMACNA Standards.
C. Secure vane runners to duct with spot welding, riveting or sheet metal screws.
D. When installing in ductwork with internal insulation.
1. Install runners in ductwork inside insulation and bolt through insulation and duct sides, welding bolts to insure rigid installation. Provide build-outs for duct Velocity-Pressure classes above 2 in. w.g.
3.5 DUCT CLEANLINESS AND CLEANING AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Duct Cleanliness:
1. All ductwork on the project shall meet the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness For New Construction Guidelines, "Advanced Level" of duct cleanliness for production, delivery, storage and installation of ductwork.
2. Prior to shipment to the jobsite, all duct ends and openings must be covered with a heavy duty, dual-ply, clear polyethylene protective film. Open ends are to be kept covered during transport, storage, and installation. As ductwork is installed
at the job site, open ends are to be covered to maintain cleanliness.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 18
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
3. The film must be securely affixed to protect against dirt and debris, and must be
translucent to facilitate inspection of interior surfaces without removing the film. The film is have a elongation rating of 600% and a break strength of 13.1 lbs./in. The film shall contain no VOC's, and shall leave no residue on duct after
removal.
4. Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries ProGuard (heavy duty grade clear).
B. Cleaning After Installation:
1. Interior surfaces shall be free of dust and debris prior to initial start up. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. Any cleaning of duct systems shall comply with recommendations of NAIMA and NADCA.
2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosion, deterioration of the metal, or where ductwork is to be painted.
3. Clean debris from system before fans are turned on.
4. Keep openings continuously closed during the construction period.
5. Pay damages resulting from dirt blown on painted or other finished surfaces.
6. Repair or replace damaged fan wheels, dampers, or other system parts damaged
as a result of debris.
7. Clean system as many times as required until the entire system is dirt free.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF ROUND DUCTWORK
A. Use factory-fabricated couplings for joints.
B. After the joint is slipped together, sheet metal screws are placed 1/2 in. from the joint bead for mechanical strength.
C. Sealer is applied to the outside of the joint and covering the screw heads.
D. Flanged joints shall be made with neoprene rubber gaskets.
3.7 TEST OF DUCTWORK
A. Systems designed to operate at 3-inches w.c. and below: Due to the limited quantity of new ductwork in the project area, ductwork is not required to be tested at the time of install. If during the balancing phase, the measured outlet airflow is +/- 10% of the air terminal unit airflow set point, ductwork shall be replaced or resealed as necessary to meet the design airflows.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 19
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Systems designed to operate in excess of 3-inches w.c.: The entire system shall be leak
tested.
C. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual and per the requirements of the 2020 Energy Conservation Construction
Code of New York State.
D. Leakage testing shall be witnessed by representatives from Cornell University and the Project Engineer of Record.
E. Acceptance Criteria: Generally, maximum system leakage shall be specified by the Consultant per the following recommendations:
1. Interior supply, return and general exhaust systems: 5% system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure.
2. Interior Laboratory exhaust systems: 2% system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure.
3. For systems not covered above, consult Chapter 19 of the 2012 ASHRAE HVAC Systems and Equipment Handbook
F. Provide test reports indicating pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test
pressure and leakage rate.
G. Ductwork not required to be tested for leakage, shall be checked and guaranteed to meet the standards of the specified SMACNA Duct Seal Class A. Air balancing and testing
shall be used to determine satisfactory operation of duct systems. Balancing reports indicating excessive leakage amounts shall be required to rebuild, repair or seal ductwork having excessive leakage.
3.8 DAMPERS AND AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Provide volume dampers at all air outlets, diffusers, grilles and as noted on plans. Provide volume dampers at all low pressure supply, return and exhaust, branch ducts and as noted on the plans.
B. Provide dampers necessary to permit proper balancing of air quantities. Comply with code requirements for smoke and fire control. Prevent introduction of uncontrolled outside air into building through roof and wall openings.
C. When dampers are installed in acoustically lined ductwork, install with insulated "build-outs" per SMACNA.
D. Install all dampers furnished as part of "Building Management System" Section.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 20
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
3.9 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide for access to upstream side of duct mounted reheat coils, dampers, damper motors, fire dampers, smoke dampers, smoke detectors, control devices, fan bearings, and equipment requiring periodic inspection or service.
B. For ducts that are too small to install an access door of the minimum specified size, provide a 12" long section of removable ductwork for maintenance and inspection access. Removable ductwork shall be fastened between device requiring access and next duct section with duct flanges or Donaldson Torit clamp with PVC foam seal. For ducts that are required to be insulated, provisions shall be made to allow insulation to be easily removed and re-installed.
3.10 DUCT SUPPORTS
A. Provide per SMACNA, same material as duct. Hanger bands to extend down sides and turn under bottom 2 in. Minimum two metal screws per hanger. Angle iron on larger duct spaced per building structural system but not greater that 8 ft. Provide extra support angles as required.
B. Provide additional supports as required to support reheat coils, air terminal units, filter enclosures, and any other duct mounted equipment independent from the associated ductwork system.
3.11 AIR AND WATERTIGHT DUCTWORK
A. Where water and snow may accumulate on ductwork or where odors or corrosive gasses may collect, ductwork and plenums shall be made watertight by soldering, brazing or
welding of joints. Grade ducts down toward waste points and/or toward louvers. Provide valve and drain piping from low point to waste point.
1. Intake and exhaust plenums.
2. Fume hood and corrosive exhaust.
B. Test for Watertightness: Before concealment, apply water by hose to check for leaks, witnessed by Owner's Representative.
3.12 DUCT SEALING
A. Preparation:
1. Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease and loose of foreign matter that could impair adhesion, using soap and water or solvent.
2. Allow surfaces to dry completely before proceeding.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 21
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Installation of Sealant System:
1. Apply sealant system to duct joints, fasteners, and seams in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Apply sealant by brush, putty knife or caulk gun, to full coverage. Remove
excess adhesive immediately.
3. Completely seal duct joint, fasteners and seams without voids, to a minimum 20 mil thick wet film.
4. Apply and store at ambient temperature of 40°F to 100°F; and protect from freezing until dry.
C. Field Quality Control:
1. Allow duct sealant system to cure a minimum of 72 hours before operating the system.
2. Do not apply external duct insulation or coatings until the joints have been inspected by the Owner's Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 22
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233100-SHEETMETALANDDUCTWORKACCESSORIESCONSTRUCTION.DOC May 7, 2021
EXHIBIT I - DUCTWORK MATERIALS SERVICE MATERIAL SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Supply, return, vent, relief,
outside, general exhaust and laboratory exhaust
Lock forming quality, galvanized
steel ASTM A653 and A924
Joints and features as called for
Fume hood exhaust Type 316 stainless steel Braze or weld airtight/watertight
Accessories, dampers and air turns Same material and gauge as parent duct ---------------
Field constructed apparatus casings Galvanized steel ASTM 525 Sealed airtight
END OF SECTION 23 31 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 37 13 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233713-REGISTERSANDDIFFUSERS.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 23 37 13 - REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation
designed in Contract Documents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers: Submit product data including room schedule listing size, CFM, throw, direction of throw, accessories, finish, material type, color chart, pressure drop and noise criteria.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Each manufacturer shall check noise level ratings for registers and diffusers to insure that the sizes selected will not produce noise to exceed N.C. - 24, measured at occupant level; notify Owner's Representative of problems prior to submittal.
B. Pressure drop, airflow and noise criteria selection is based on design equipment. Manufacturers not submitting design makes must provide written certification in front of
submittal that equipment submitted has been checked against and performs equal to the design make.
C. Borders and frames shall be coordinated with materials and ceiling systems to integrate
with architectural ceiling details and finishes scheduled.
D. Locations of ceiling mounted air terminal devices shall be coordinated with locations shown on architectural reflected ceiling plans.
E. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw and pressure drop. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
1.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR DIFFUSERS
A. General:
1. Provide four way blow unless otherwise noted.
2. Where manufacturer's size recommendations require duct sizes or connections differing from design, Contractor shall provide at no change in contract price.
3. Suitable for recessed mounting unless otherwise indicated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 37 13 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\HVAC\200311-233713-REGISTERSANDDIFFUSERS.DOC May 7, 2021
4. Provide square to round neck transitions as required.
5. Provide sponge rubber gasket for all surface mounted frames.
B. Finishes:
1. Baked enamel (of colors as selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart)
as scheduled.
C. Frame style shall be suitable for ceiling type in which diffuser is to be installed.
D. Design Equipment: Titus unless otherwise noted.
E. Manufacturers: Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPLY TYPES
A. Type 1 - (Perforated face type, high volume low velocity):
1. Provided for one-way or two-way blow as indicated on drawings.
2. Face or diffuser shall be constructed of 51 percent free area perforated steel with 3/16 inch diameter holes on 1/4 inch staggered centers.
3. The back pan shall be manufactured of 22 gauge steel.
4. The interior of the diffuser shall be accessible for sanitization from below (room side).
5. The diffuser must be available for full radial air diffusion (two-way) and 1/2
radial air diffusion (one-way).
6. Panel Size = 24 in. x 24 in.
7. Model: Titus Model TriTec.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Rough in or install per reflected ceiling plan or in location instructed by Owner's Representative.
B. Seal all supply and return registers, grilles and diffusers during construction operations to limit dust entering HVAC systems and ductwork. Seals may be removed just prior to testing and balancing, but not without the approval of the Owner's Representative.
END OF SECTION 23 37 13
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260500-BASICELECTRICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
SECTION 26 05 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ROUGHING
A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are
diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction.
B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing.
C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate
interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new
materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work.
D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural
Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans.
E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of
connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows:
1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation
in new location.
2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time,
obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260500-BASICELECTRICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255.
2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label.
3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards.
4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label.
5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such.
1.3 CONCEALMENT
A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In
areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance.
1.4 CHASES
A. New Construction:
1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work.
2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work.
3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings.
4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260500-BASICELECTRICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above
finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment
damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves.
6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade.
B. In Existing Buildings:
1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings.
2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening.
3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors.
4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves
at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings.
1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies:
1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent
testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814.
2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction.
3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal.
4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or
addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items
passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260500-BASICELECTRICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars.
6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations.
7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants.
2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP.
3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts.
4. Carborundum Fyre Putty.
5. 3-M Fire Products.
6. Hilti Corporation.
1.6 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size
shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper
information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as
manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels.
1.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260500-BASICELECTRICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains.
C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required.
D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting
any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops,
sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow
prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves.
C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment.
D. Install controls and devices furnished by others.
E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required.
F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required.
G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260500-BASICELECTRICALREQUIREMENTS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC.
B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required.
C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding.
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 26 05 01 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included, and
show only approximate locations of equipment, fixtures, panelboards, conduits, and wiring devices. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. The general run of electrical feeders, branch circuits, and conduits, indicated on the drawings, is not intended to be the exact routing. Exact routings of conduit shall suit the job conditions.
B. Circuit designations, in the form of "Home Runs" on branches, indicate the designation of the branch circuit, the size and the quantity of branch circuit conductors, and the panel board or interconnection box from which the branch circuit is served.
C. Make measurements at the site and in the building during construction for all systems installed as the work progresses in such a manner that the equipment, piping, vents, ducts, conduit, and boxes will fit in the space available. Maintain headroom and if in unfinished
areas, be as neatly installed, as obscure and "out-of-the-way" as physically possible. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their
individual requirements. In general, ductwork shall be given preference except where grading of piping becomes a problem, followed by piping then electrical wiring. If, after installation of any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that
ample maintenance and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and /or furnish other equipment as required for ample maintenance space.
D. Any changes in the size or location of the material or equipment supplied, which may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's Representative and approval received before such alterations are made.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative.
B. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc.,
correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equal in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified
elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for the following equipment, materials and products, including all fittings and accessories:
1. Cable Tray
2. Conductors 3. Wiring Devices Including Dimmers 4. Telephone/Data Communication Outlets 5. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Conduit, Raceway and Tubing:
1. Rigid Metal Conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized steel, UL listed "rigid metal conduit."
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Republic Conduit
2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equal
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be electro-galvanized steel; UL listed "electrical metallic tubing."
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equal
3. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed one continuous length of electro-galvanized, spirally wound steel strip with interlocking convolutions and interior surfaces free from burrs and sharp edges. Shall be UL listed "flexible metal conduit" or "liquidtight flexible metal conduit" as required.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit
3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) American Flexible Conduit Company
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
4. Surface Metal Raceway shall be .040 in. steel UL listed "Surface Metal
Raceway". Use manufacturer's standard fittings designed to be used with the specific raceway.
a. One-Piece Raceway:
1) Buff or ivory finish.
2) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Wiremold "700" Series (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal
b. Two-Piece Prewired Raceways:
1) Buff, gray, ivory or stainless steel finish.
2) Wiring Harness:
a) Single circuit NEMA 5-20R, 20 ampere, 125 volt, grounded receptacles spaced 12" on centers if required.
3) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Wiremold 2200 - (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal
c. Two-Piece Raceways:
1) Gray finish.
2) Duplex or special receptacles as specified in wiring devices.
3) Corners, turns, tees and elbows shall have suitable turning radius for the intended cable.
4) Provide divider in raceways utilized for power and communications. Utilize wire clips 18 in. on center to hold in the conductors/cables.
5) Utilize rounded head screws for mounting.
6) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Wiremold 4000 - (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Conduit Fittings:
1. Fittings for rigid metal conduit shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same material as the respective raceway system. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2 in. and double screw
indenter fittings for conduits 2 in. and larger. Connectors shall also have insulated throat up to and including 1 in. size. For sizes 1-1/4 in. and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. Die-cast, pressure cast fittings shall not be used. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) O.Z. Gedney 2) Steel City 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Crouse-Hinds 5) Carlon
2. Expansion Fittings shall be watertight, combination expansion and deflection type designed to compensate for movement in any direction. Fittings shall have flexible copper braid bonding jumpers, neoprene sleeve and stainless steel bands,
use aluminum body fittings for rigid aluminum conduit.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Crouse-Hinds, Type "DX"
2) O.Z./Gedney, Type "DX" 3) Approved equal
C. Cable Trays:
1. Solid Bottom Cable Trays shall be aluminum construction, including accessories. One-piece construction bottom and side, sheet aluminum 080 ±5%. Aluminum alloy side rails and bottom channel with flanges in standard lengths 12 ft. - 0 in. long. Wrap around type bolted connector to connect tray sections. Cover required where indicated on Contract Documents and in all areas used as return air plenums. Use three-piece construction, consisting of a solid corrugated bottom welded to the side rails. Provide divider strip where noted on Contract Documents. Minimum inside radius of horizontal elbows shall be 12 in. Provide
special radius elbows where required for field conditions. Horizontal and vertical bends for solid bottom trays shall have solid bottoms. Loading data:
Tray Width Load Depth
Usable NEMA Depth Standard Span Lbs. Per Feet Deflection
12 in. 4 in. 3 in. 12B 10 ft. 115 0.15 in.
18 in. 4 in. 3 in. 12B 10 ft. 115 0.015 in.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
Tray Width Load Depth
Usable NEMA Depth Standard Span Lbs. Per Feet Deflection
18 in. 6 in. 3 in. 12C 10 ft. 144 0.15 in.
2. Provide a safety-loading factor of 1.5 for uniformly distributed loads when supported as a simple span in accordance with the NEMA standard listed.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) P-W
2) B-Line Systems 3) Chalfant 4) Globe
D. Channel Support Systems:
1. Channel Support Systems shall be provided for racking of conduit, trapeze suspensions, equipment support, cable racks and panel racks. Channel shall be
steel with electroplated zinc finish for interior dry locations. Provide necessary accessories such as bolts, screws, anchors, connection plates, and straps as required to perform the necessary functions. Wet location and exterior channel support systems shall be steel with hot dipped galvanized finish and stainless steel hardware as a minimum. Cut ends shall be touched up with suitable matching finish.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Unistrut 2) Globe 3) Kindorf 4) B-Line
E. Conductors and Cables:
1. Conductors shall be insulated for 600 volts, unless otherwise noted, and shall be standard AWG and kcmil sizes. Conductors shall be 98% copper, thermal plastic
or cross-linked polymer insulated, heat and moisture resistant. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors used for fire alarm system wiring. Conductor sizes No. 18 AWG and smaller shall be a solid single strand; No. 16 AWG and
larger shall be multiple stranded. Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG except smaller sizes may be used for communications and special systems. Conductor sizes shall be as called for. Conductors shall be labeled with UL seal and be marked with the manufacturer's name, wire size and insulation type. Insulation for all 600 volt conductors shall be Type THHN/THWN-2 for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller or Type XHHW-2 for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise noted. All exterior and underground conductors shall be XHHW-2.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
Luminaire fixture wire shall conform to the latest Underwriters Laboratories
requirements. Flexible cords and cables for general portable use shall be Type SO or SOOW or as noted. Cables for special use shall be of the type specified for the application.
a. Color Coding:
1) All circuits shall be color coded according to the following schedule.
Three Phase 120/208V Three Phase 277/480V Single Phase 120/240V
Ground Green Green Green
Neutral White Gray White
A or L1 Black Brown Black B or L2 Red Orange Red C or L3 Blue Yellow ---
b. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) General Cable 2) Prysmian
3) South Wire 4) Okonite
F. Cable Termination Kits:
1. The shielded power cable termination shall be capable of continuous operation at the rated voltage of the cable it is to be used on, up to 35 kV. It must be rated for continuous operation at 90°C, with an emergency overload temperature rating of 130°C. The termination shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standard 48, for a Class 1 Termination. It shall be a one-piece design, where high-dielectric constant (capacitive) stress control is integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber, munsell gray in color. The termination shall not require heat or flame for installation. The termination kit must contain all of the necessary
materials required to make three terminations (except for the lugs). In addition to normal locations, the termination must be designed for contaminated indoor and outdoor locations.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. 3M Brand b. Elastimold
c. Raychem d. Approved equal
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 7
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
G. Separable Splices/Apparatus Connections:
1. The shielded power cable separable insulated connector splice or 600 Amp apparatus connection shall be capable of continuous operation at 35 kV, 600 amps and 90°C, with an emergency overload temperature rating of 130°C. The
system and components shall meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE dead-break interfaces. The elbow (tee-module) and all other rubber components shall be made of peroxide cured EPDM rubber, and the connecting components shall be insulated with molded epoxy. The system shall be available as specific kits for splicing, tapping (adding-on), dead-ending and apparatus connecting. Provide with test point for apparatus connection.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) 3M Brand w/Grounding Kit 2) Elastimold w/Grounding Kit 3) Raychem 4) Approved equal
H. Permanent Splices:
1. The shielded power cable splice must meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE and meeting the cable voltage rating. It must be rated for continuous operation at
90ºC, with an emergency overload rating of 130ºC. The splice shall be made of peroxide cured EPDM rubber. The splice kit must contain all of the necessary materials required to make one inline splice (except for the connector), including
a solderless mechanical ground jumper. The splice shall be designed for splicing tape shielded, wire shielded, and UniShield cables without the requirement of additional adapters. It shall be rated for indoor, outdoor and direct burial applications.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. 3M Brand b. Elastimold c. Raychem d. Approved equal
I. Terminal Lugs and Connectors:
1. The copper lug shall be capable of continuous operation at the current rating of
the cable it is used on. The lug shall be UL listed per UL 486A, using industry standard crimping tools and dies. Terminal lugs shall be solderless, pressure type with UL label for "CU/AL" conductor terminations. The lug shall be a closed-
end compression (crimp) type, constructed of seamless, tin-plated copper.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 8
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
The lug shall be made with a chamfered inside end, for ease of conductor
insertion. Both one and two hole lugs shall be NEMA sized for standard stud sizes and spacing. The lug shall be designed for use at voltages up to 35 kV.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) 3M Scotchlok 30,000 and 31,000 Series 2) Burndy 3) O.Z./Gedney 4) Thomas and Betts
2. The copper conductor connection shall be capable of continuous operation at the current rating of the cables it is used on. The connection shall be UL listed per UL 486A, using industry standard crimping tools and ides. The connector shall be an inline compression (crimp) type, constructed of seamless, tin-plated copper. The connector shall be constructed with chamfered inside-ends and with center cable stops. The connector shall be designed for use at voltages up to 35 kV.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) 3M Scotchlok 10,000 and 11,000 Series 2) Burndy
3) O.Z./Gedney 4) Thomas and Betts
3. "Split-bolt" Connectors shall be solderless type.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Burndy 2) Kearney 3) O.Z./Gedney 4) Thomas and Betts 5) Anderson
4. "TWIST ON" Connectors shall be spiral steel spring type and insulated with vinyl cap and skirt.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) 3-M Company "Scotch-Lok" 2) Ideal "Wing-Nuts"
3) Approved equal
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 9
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
J. Boxes:
1. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel, not less than 2-1/8 in. deep, unless restricted by the surroundings, 4 in. square or octagonal, with knockouts. Boxes and associated fittings, plates and devices shall be mechanically fastened
(screwed), friction fitting is not acceptable. Outlet boxes exposed to moisture, exterior, wet or damp locations shall be cadmium cast alloy complete with external threaded hubs and gasketed screw fastened covers. Minimum box size shall be as indicated in the NEC for the conductors and devices installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition where they will be installed.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Steel City 2) Raco 3) Appleton 4) Crouse Hinds
2. Telephone/Data Communications Outlet Boxes:
a. 4 in. x 4 in. x 2-1/8 in. minimum outlet box with single gang plaster ring with cover plate suitable for indicated communications outlet and conduit routed to cable tray. Cover plate shall match the receptacle
cover type.
3. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be
installed. Provide screw-on type covers. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of raintight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. In no case shall boxes be sized smaller than as indicated NEC for conduit and conductor sizes installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be installed.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Hoffman 2) Keystone 3) Approved equal
K. Terminal and Equipment Cabinets:
1. Terminal and equipment cabinets shall be code gauge galvanized steel with
removable endwalls. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel, flush or surface type (as indicated) with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinges, flush lock, and grey baked enamel finish.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 10
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
Boxes and front shall be UL listed and shall be minimum 35 in. H x 24 in. W x 6
in. D. Provide removable insulated plywood terminal board mounted on inside back wall of cabinet.
a. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1) Square D "Mono-Flat" 2) Approved equal
L. Wiring Devices:
1. Wiring Devices (toggle switches, key switches, receptacles, dimmers, occupancy sensors, etc.) shall be specification grade as a minimum. Switch handle and receptacle face shall be as directed by the Architect. Provide device cover plates of rounded nylon colored to match the device in finished areas and rounded raised (Steel City 450/460 series) only for surface mounted locations in unfinished areas.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Pass and Seymour
2) Hubbell 3) Leviton
2. Toggle/Snap Switches:
a. Units shall be quiet operation, quick make/quick break, rated for 20A/120-277V/1hp at 120/277V, side/back wired, with nylon/polycarbonate toggle, self grounding mounting screw clip plate
(not staple), ground terminal and silver alloy contacts. Units shall meet latest Federal Specification WS-896, NEMA WD-1 and UL Test 20. Single pole units shall be Hubbell HBL1221, P&S 20AC1 or Leviton 1221-2. Provide two pole, three way, four way, illuminated handle, keyed, etc. type of the same quality and model.
b. Momentary Contact: Units shall be as indicated above (20A, 277V, nylon handle, side/back wired), three position, two circuit/three wire with spring return to center position, provide where indicated and as needed for proper system operation. Hubbell HBL 1557, P&S 1250, Leviton 1256 or approved equal. Provide keyed operation or pilot light where indicated.
3. Receptacles:
a. Provide receptacles where indicated on the drawings and where called for. Provide type receptacle as indicated and if not indicated then utilize
general receptacle.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 11
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
b. General Receptacle: Units shall be NEMA 5-20R, duplex, 20A, 125V,
side/back wired, #14 to 10AWG screw terminals with nylon face, indented brass contacts for three point connection, self grounding mounting screw clip plate (not staple), ground terminal Meet
requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596, NEMA WD-6 and UL 498.
1) Units shall have brass mounting strap and be: Hubbell HBL5362, P&S 5362AX or Leviton 5362. Industrial grade
c. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles: Units shall be as specified above for General Receptacle and have 5mA interrupting ground fault level, test/reset front buttons, full through feed capability, power off on reverse wired sensing, 10kA short circuit current rating, be tamper/weather resistant and in compliance with UL 943. Unit shall self-test function to periodically test the components automatically and indicate a failure condition utilizing an LED. Shall be Hubbell GFR5362, P&S 2096TR or
d. Special Receptacles: provide other type receptacles as indicated herein or on the drawings. Such receptacles shall be Hubbell, P&S or Leviton highest grade available.
4. Lighting Dimmers:
a. Provide lighting dimmer where indicated suitable for the type of luminaire for even continuous control. Unit shall be rated for the
indicated connected load plus 25% minimum (even when ganged). Review luminaire schedule for type and loading. Provide for three-way control as indicated.
b. Dimmers to be Lutron "Nova" NT-(1000W minimum) with debuzzing coil for incandescent.
c. Low voltage dimming shall be as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer for magnetic or solid state.
d. LED dimmers shall be as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer and be listed for use with the associated driver.
e. Device color shall match the toggle switch.
f. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Lutron 2) Approved equal
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 12
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
5. Occupancy/Vacancy (Automatic/Manual) Sensors:
a. Sensors shall comply with the following as a minimum:
1) Zero crossing switching operation (switch on/off only where sine wave is at zero volts) suitable for linear, non-linear and
electronic/magnetic fluorescent ballasts for the loads indicated. Where the load to be controlled exceeds the sensor load rating provide a separate relay of adequate rating.
2) Failure of the unit shall be to the on/closed position or manual operation.
3) Motion sensitivity adjustment (dip switch or dial) and time delay adjustment (5 to 20 minutes minimum, dip switch or dial).
4) Line voltage input and switching. Field selectable for 120 or 277 VAC, 60 Hz.
5) UL listed and have a five (5) year manufacturer full replacement warranty.
6) Test mode feature to override the set time delay to allow adjusting of the sensitivity.
7) Sensor locations shall be adjusted during construction and at
occupancy as recommended by the manufacturer for optimal sensing and operation.
8) Operation shall have adjustable time delay. Occupancy sensors
shall have automatic on and vacancy sensors shall have manual on.
9) Adjustable controls/settings shall only be accessible when the front cover is removed or from the back of the unit.
10) Unit color shall match the project devices except for the ceiling mounted units which shall match the ceiling color. All color selections shall be by the Architect.
11) Ultrasonic sensing shall not be affected by air movement and shall operate at 32 kHz minimum (shall not interfere with hearing aids or other equipment).
12) Provide components as needed for the indicated control.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 13
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
13) A factory authorized representative shall coordinate and instruct
the start up services of the sensors providing placement recommendations, connection guidance and start up supervision and adjustment.
b. Wall Mounted - Passive Infrared (PIR):
1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have an on/off button and utilize PIR technology motion sensing. Selectable manual or automatic on mode.
2) Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W.
3) The sensing shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of:
a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft.
b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft.
4) Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the
set point level.
5) High impact resistant sensor lens.
6) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Pass & Seymour Model OS300S (Design Make) b) Hubbell c) Watt Stopper
d) Sensor Switch
c. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology (PIR and Ultrasonic):
1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have an on/off button and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Selectable manual or automatic on mode.
2) Minimum Switching Capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W.
3) The sensing shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a minimum of:
a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft.
b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 14
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
4) Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300 fc) to prevent
"on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level.
5) High impact resistant sensor lens.
6) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Hubbell Model AD2000 (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch
d. Wall Mounted - Dual Technology - Dual Switching:
1) Unit shall fit into a standard single gang electrical box, have two on/off buttons and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. To have two contacts each fully rated, electrically separate and be commonly controlled.
Selectable manual or automatic on mode.
2) Minimum switching capacity: 120 V - 800 W, 277 V - 1200 W.
3) The sensing shall be 180° and the sensitivity area to be a
minimum of:
a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 35 ft. x 30 ft.
b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 20 ft. x 15 ft.
4) Ambient light level sensing (adjustable 20-300fc) to prevent "on" operation when the ambient light level is greater than the set point level.
5) High impact resistant sensor lens.
6) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Hubbell Model AD2000X2 (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 15
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
e. Ceiling Mounted - Occupancy Sensor - Ultrasonic:
1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize ultrasonic sensing. Auxiliary contact shall
indicate movement sensing and be programmable to utilize time delay or not.
2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications.
3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of:
a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft.
b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft.
c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft.
4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation.
5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum.
6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box.
7) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Hubbell Model ATU2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper
c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch
f. Ceiling Mounted - Occupancy Sensor - Dual Technology:
1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing. Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Auxiliary contact shall indicate movement sensing and be selectable to utilize time delay or not.
2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the ratings and
function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 16
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of:
a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft.
b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft.
c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft.
4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation.
5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to 12 ft. minimum.
6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box.
7) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Hubbell Model ATD2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch
g. Ceiling Mounted - Vacancy Sensor - Dual Technology:
1) Unit shall mount to standard octagonal box, have adjustable sensitivity/time delay, have auxiliary contact (form C, 0.5A at 24 VDC) and utilize PIR and ultrasonic technology motion sensing.
Both types of sensing are needed for contact closure but only one is needed to keep it closed. Operation shall require manual operation of momentary wall switch for lighting to be switched
on and automatic off. Auxiliary contact shall indicate movement sensing and be selectable to utilize time delay or not.
2) Shall have self contained rated contacts or control a separate switch pack. If a self contained unit then the ratings and function shall meet or exceed the switch pack specifications.
3) Sensing shall be 360° with a minimum operating area of:
a) Major Motion (Walking/Arm Wave): 50 ft. x 30 ft.
b) Minor Motion (Small Motion at Desk): 40 ft. x 20 ft.
c) Corridor (Major Motion): 50 ft. x 16 ft.
4) Units shall be suitable for overlap of motion detection areas without reduction in spacing and false operation.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 17
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
5) Sensing shall be suitable for a ceiling/mounting height of up to
12 ft. minimum.
6) The maximum depth shall be 1.5 in. below the ceiling/box.
7) Provide momentary switch(es) and any other needed equipment
for indicated operation.
8) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Hubbell Model ATD2000CRP (Design Make) b) Watt Stopper c) Cooper d) Sensor Switch
h. Switch Pack:
1) Provide a minimum of one (1) switch pack for each ceiling mounted occupancy sensor. Provide additional units for multiple circuits (quantity to match the quantity of circuits).
2) Unit shall be plenum rated with line voltage side into a metallic
box.
3) Low voltage power shall be suitable for a minimum of three (3) occupancy sensors. Multiple sensors shall be able to control a
single switch pack.
4) Minimum switching capacity shall be 20A (all types of loads) at 120/277VAC.
i. Testing:
1) Each occupancy sensor shall be fully tested for proper operation of all functions after installation.
2) Testing shall include sensitivity, time delay, ambient lighting level, etc.
3) Operation and settings shall be acceptable to the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 18
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
M. Flashing, Sealing, Fire-stopping:
1. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies:
a. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved
independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814.
b. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction.
c. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal.
d. The methods used shall incorporate qualities, which permit the easy
removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion
and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants b. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP c. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts d. Carborundum Fyre Putty e. 3-M Fire Products
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise noted, wiring for all systems indicated in the contract documents shall consist of insulated conductors installed in raceways. Raceways shall be continuous from outlet box to outlet box and from outlet box to cabinet, junction or pull box. Secure and bond raceways to all boxes and cabinets so that each system of raceways is electrically
continuous throughout. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, install all wiring in the following raceway system:
1. Wiring 600 Volts or Less in Dry Locations: Electrical metallic tubing.
2. All Wiring Installed in Hazardous Locations: Galvanized rigid metal conduit.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 19
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
3. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connection to all motors, final
connection to rotating or vibrating equipment, final connections to dry type transformers and final connections to recessed lighting fixtures. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be used in all wet or damp locations. Maximum length of
flexible conduit shall be 36 in., except that from outlet boxes to lighting fixture maximum length shall be 6 ft. Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metal conduit.
4. Surface metal raceway may be used for surface runs in finished area where concealed conduit cannot be run or where specifically indicated on drawings.
B. Raceways:
1. Sized as indicated on the drawings. Where sizes are not indicated, raceways shall be sized as required by the National Electrical Code in accordance with the quantity, size, and type of the insulation conductors to be installed. Raceways shall be minimum 3/4 in. trade size for branch circuit wiring and minimum 1 in. trade size for all telephone intercommunications, instrumentation, fire alarm,
television and computer systems and for all branch circuit "Home Runs" to panelboards.
2. Installed to provide adequate grounding between all outlets and the established
electrical system ground.
3. Cut square, free of burrs due to field cutting or manufacture, and bushed where necessary.
4. Installed with exterior surfaces not less than 6 in. from any surface with normal operating temperature of 200°F or higher.
5. Plugged at the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved cap or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction.
6. Concealed throughout except where exposure is permitted by the Owner's Representative.
7. Installed parallel or perpendicular to floors, walls and ceilings where exposed wiring is permitted.
8. Installed with a minimum of bends and offsets. All bends shall be made without kinking or destroying the cross section contour of the raceway. Factory made bends are acceptable and should be considered for raceways larger than 2 in.
9. Installed with UL approved rain-tight and concrete-tight couplings and connectors.
10. Firmly fastened within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.
Raceways shall not be attached to or supported by wooden plug anchors or supported from mechanical work such as ductwork, piping, etc.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 20
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
11. Installed with a #14 AWG fish wire in all telephone, intercommunication,
"Spare" or "Empty" conduit runs to facilitate future installation of conductors.
12. Installed with expansion fittings at all building expansion joints such that no undue stress is placed on any electrical raceway due to the proper functioning of
expansion joints.
13. Arranged in a neat manner for access and allow for access to work installed by other trades.
14. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the attention of the Owner's Representative and receive written approval both as to location and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary.
15. Become familiar with the general construction of the building and place sleeves, inserts, etc., as required. All penetrations through existing floors shall be core drilled and sleeved.
16. Wherever a cluster of four (4) or more raceways rise out of floor exposed,
provide neatly formed 6 in. high concrete envelop, with chamfered edges, around raceways.
17. All raceways shall be supported adequately by malleable iron pipe clamps or
other approved methods. In exterior or wet locations, supports shall allow not less than 1/4 in. air space between raceway and wall. Firmly fasten raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. The following
table lists maximum spacing between conditions, strength of supporting members, etc.
18. Furnish and install such supports at no additional cost to owner.
Conduit Trade Size Type of Run Horizontal Spacing in Feet Vertical Spacing in Feet
3/4 in. Concealed 7 10
1 in., 1-1/4 in. Concealed 8 10
1-1/2 in. and larger Concealed 10 10 3/4 in. Exposed 5 7 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Exposed 7 8
1-1/2 in. and larger Exposed 10 10
19. Where raceways puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the roof warranty is maintained. Coordinate with representative of roofing material manufacturer.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 21
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
20. At each flush mounted panelboard, terminal cabinet, control cabinet, etc., provide
four (4) spare 3/4 in. raceways from panelboard, etc., to an area above the nearest accessible ceiling space. Make 90° turn above the ceiling, arranged for further continuation of raceway, and cap.
21. Provide a bushing at each conduit termination unless fitting at box where conduit terminates has hubs designed in such a manner to afford equal protection to conductors. Provide grounding type insulated bushings on all conduit sizes 1-1/4 in. trade size and larger, and on all feeder raceways regardless of size. Provide standard bushings for conduits 1 in. and smaller unless otherwise stated.
22. Differing Temperatures: For raceways routed between areas with differing temperatures (interior to exterior, walk in coolers/freezers, environmental chambers, etc.) install raceway as follows:
a. Provide a thermal break, 4 in. minimum of stainless steel or Schedule 40 PVC conduit within space wall/separation.
b. Seal raceway penetration through the wall/separation.
c. Provide a box on each side of the space wall/separation.
d. Provide raceway interior sealant (duct seal or suitable foam) to provide a complete air barrier after conductors are installed.
e. Mounting of raceway and boxes on equipment shall be coordinated and approved by the equipment manufacturer.
23. Raceway installed in wet, damp or exterior walls shall have a spacer provided to
maintain a space/void between the mounting surface and the raceway.
C. Cable Trays:
1. Tray supports shall be hung using threaded, galvanized rod hangers, with rods extended through support steel and double nutted. Size support member within load rating of member section; and without visible deflection. Install cable tray level and straight.
2. Provide aluminum body expansion connectors at building expansion joints. Minimum 4 in. movements, greater if expansion movement conditions warrant.
3. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, crossovers and at other locations where tray continuity is interrupted.
4. Provide necessary elbows, tees, crosses, risers, offsets, fittings, reducers,
connectors, clamps, rod suspension, trapeze hangers, etc., as required to make a complete job, coordinate with the manufacturer.
5. Provide conduit to tray fitting at each conduit entrance to tray.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 22
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
6. Install divider in trays as called for.
7. Install fire stop wall frames around cable tray at penetrations through fire rated walls, and where called for. Seal these openings with pliable fire resistant sealant.
D. Wiring Methods:
1. Conductors shall not be installed until raceway system, including all outlets, cabinets, bushings and fittings, is completed. Verify that all work of other trades which may cause conductor damage is completed. Use only U.L. approved cable lubricants when necessary. Do not use mechanical means to pull conductors No. 8 or smaller.
2. In general, conductors shall be the same size from the last protective device to the load.
3. All wiring systems shall be properly grounded and continuously polarized throughout, following the color-coding specified. Connect branch circuit wiring at panelboards, as required, in order to provide a "balanced" three-phase load on
feeders.
4. Provide insulated green ground conductor in each branch circuit.
5. All feeder connections shall be made to bus and other equipment using
solderless, pressure type terminal lugs.
6. For splices and taps, No. 10 AWG and smaller, use solderless "twist on" connectors having spiral steel spring and insulated with a vinyl cap and skirt.
7. For splices and taps, No. 8 and larger, use insulated solderless set screw AL/CU or hydraulically compressed sleeve fittings suitable for the intended use.
8. Use cast connections for ground conductors.
9. Provide minimum 6 in. of spare/slack of each conductor in each junction or pull box and termination.
10. Make all splices and connections in accessible boxes and cabinets only.
11. Cover uninsulated splices, joints, and free ends of conductor with rubber and friction tape of PVC electrical tape. Plastic insulating caps may serve as insulation. Heat shrink sleeves shall be acceptable for crimp type splices.
12. On termination at branch circuit outlets, leave a minimum of 8 in. free conductor for installation of devices and fixtures.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 23
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
13. Feeder conductors shall be continuous from point of origin to load termination
without splice. If this is not practical, contact the Owner's Representative and receive written approval for splicing prior to installation of feeder(s). Where feeder conductors pass through junction and pull boxes, bind and lace conductors
of each feeder together. For parallel sets of conductors, match lengths of conductors as near equal as possible.
14. Branch circuit conductors installed in panelboards, and control conductors installed in control cabinets and panels shall be neatly bound together using "Ty-Raps" or equal.
15. Provide conduit seals and explosion proof devices as indicated on the plans and as dictated by the NEC for all hazardous locations indicated on the drawings.
16. Lighting fixtures, detectors, etc., in mechanical equipment, boiler and pump rooms shall be installed with exposed wiring after equipment, ductwork, piping, etc., are in place. In general, lighting shall be as located on the drawings; where conflicts exist, locate lights for best distribution.
17. Fire proof tape all medium voltage cables in handholes, man holes, building entrance and junction/pull boxes.
18. Provide cable/conductor vertical support in accordance with the NEC.
19. The following should be permitted to be installed in cable tray systems only under the conditions described in their respective National Electrical Code articles:
a. Power and control tray cable.
b. Other factory-assembled, Multiconductor control, signal, or power cables that and specifically approved for installation in cable trays.
c. Optical fiber cables.
E. Outlet Boxes:
1. Consider location of outlets shown on drawings as approximate only. Study architectural, process piping, mechanical, plumbing, structural, roughing-in, etc., drawings and note surrounding areas in which each outlet is to be located. Locate outlet so that when fixtures, motors, cabinets, equipment, etc., are placed in position, outlet will serve its desired purpose. Where conflicts are noted between drawings, contact Owner's Representative for decision prior to
installation. Comply with the NEC relative to position of outlet boxes in finished ceilings and walls.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 24
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
2. Prior to installation, relocate any outlet location a distance of 5 ft. in any
direction from location indicated on drawings if so directed by the Owner's Representative. Prior to completion of wall construction, adjust vertical height of any outlet from height indicated if so directed by Owner's Representative. The
above modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Where outlets at different mounting heights are indicated on drawings adjacent to each other (due to lack of physical space to show symbol on drawings), install outlets on a common vertical line.
4. Where switch outlets are shown adjacent to strike side of door, locate edge of outlet box approximately 3 in. from door frame.
5. Outlet boxes in separate rooms shall not be installed "back-to-back" without the approval of the Owner's Representative.
6. Outlet boxes shall be sized to accommodate the wiring, splices and device(s) to be installed in accordance with the NEC.
7. Outlet boxes installed in plaster, gypsum board or wood paneled hollow cavity
walls shall be installed flush with raised plaster covers or raised tile covers. Boxes shall be mechanically fastened and supported by two (2) adjacent structural members (studs) with cross brackets (Garvin Industries Model BMB or
approved equal).
8. Outlet boxes installed in tile, brick or concrete block walls shall be installed flush and have extra-deep type raised tile covers or shall be 3-1/2 in. deep boxes with
square corners and dimensions to accommodate conductors installed.
9. Surface ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be minimum 4 in. square, 1-1/2 in. deep, galvanized sheet metal.
10. Surface wall mounted outlet boxes shall be cast type boxes.
11. Floor outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tile as required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet or flooring material, coordinate with appropriate trade and provide insert. Rectangular covers shall be parallel and perpendicular with the building and, if used, floor tile/floor joints/pattern. Coordinate cover type with the flooring and device type.
12. Install a device cover plate over each and every outlet indicated on drawings. Do
not install plates until painting, cleaning and finishing of surfaces surrounding the outlet are complete. Install single one-piece multi-gang covers over multi-gang devices.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 25
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
F. Toggle Switches:
1. Switches shall be installed in accessible locations near room/space entryway(s).
2. Provide lighted handle switches in mechanical rooms, elevator pits, electric rooms, etc.
G. Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Access to boxes shall not be blocked by equipment, piping, ducts and the like. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as require by the National Electrical Code.
H. Equipment Mounting Heights:
1. Unless otherwise noted, mount devices and equipment at heights measured from finished floor to device/equipment centerline as follows:
a. Toggle switches (up position "on") 46 in.
b. Receptacle outlets (long dimension vertical, ground" pole farthest from floor) 18 in.
c. Receptacle outlets above counters 8 in. above counters
d. Receptacle outlets, above hot water or steam baseboard heaters. Do not install receptacle outlets above electric baseboard heaters
30 in.
e. Receptacle outlets, hazardous areas; also
for refrigerators
48 in.
f. Receptacle outlets, weatherproof, above-grade 24 in.
g. Telephone outlets 18 in.
h. Telephone outlets, wall mounted 46 in.
i. Fire alarm manual stations 46 in.
j. Fire alarm combination audio/visual and standalone visual device (entire strobe lens at heights indicated)
80 in. to bottom of the notification device
k. Standalone fire alarm audio device 90 in. (min) to 96 in. (max)
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 26
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
l. Terminal cabinets, control cabinets, to top
of backbox
72 in.
m. Disconnect switches, motor starters, enclosed circuit breakers. 48 in.
2. Where structural or other interferences prevent compliance with mounting heights listed above, consult Owner's Representative for approval to change location before installation.
I. Hangers and Supports:
1. Provide steel angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper support and erection of motor starters, distribution panelboards, large disconnect switches, large circuit breakers, pendant mounted lighting fixtures, etc.
2. Panelboards, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, cabinets, large pull boxes, adjustable speed drives, cable support boxes and starters shall be secured to the building structure and not supported from conduits. Small panelboards, etc., as approved by Owner's Representative, may be supported on walls. Racks for
support of conduits and heavy electrical equipment shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports.
J. Identification:
1. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on switchboards, main service disconnects, transfer switches, motor control centers and on all panelboards using designation shown in panelboard schedule. Include voltage,
phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment.
2. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates for each circuit breaker in the main distribution panel listing the panelboard or equipment connected to each device.
3. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on all items of equipment including individual circuit breaker enclosures and disconnect switches, listing the equipment connected to the particular device provided under Specification Section 262000, including, but not limited to: starters, disconnect switches, adjustable speed drives, circuit breakers, etc. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment.
4. Provide complete type written directory for each panelboard listing room
number, function, etc., for each circuit breaker. Provide type written updated panelboard directories for existing panelboards affected by this work.
5. Nameplates shall be engraved black, with white core, with Helvetica medium
3/16 in. lettering. 1/8 in. lettering is acceptable where space of 3/16 in. is not available.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01- 27
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260501-BASICMATERIALSANDMETHODS.DOC May 7, 2021
6. Identify junction and pullboxes for particular service and circuit such as power,
lighting, fire alarm, telephone, interphone, public address, nurse call, etc. using stencil lettering on cover.
7. Provide signage at each electrical service room indicating "DANGER - HIGH
VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT". Utilize adhesive backed, yellow background, block lettering signage at door.
8. Using adhesive backed printed tape label all receptacle and switch coverplates, power poles, etc. listing panel designation and circuit number. Tape shall be attached to outside of receptacle or switch coverplates.
K. Spare Parts:
1. Deliver to Owner and obtain receipt for spare parts including key switches, fuses, etc.
3.2 TESTS
A. Branch circuits shall be tested during installation for continuity and identification and shall pass operational tests to determine that all circuits perform the function for which
they are designed. For all feeder wiring rated 600 volts or less, provide 1,000 volt "Megger" insulation test prior to energizing feeders. Use a 1,000-volt motor driven megger for all tests. Test voltage shall be applied until readings reach a constant value,
and until three (3) equal readings, each one (1) minute apart, are obtained. Minimum megger reading shall be 45 megohms for feeder conductors. Document test results and submit for approval prior to energizing conductors.
END OF SECTION 26 05 01
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation GROUNDING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260526-GROUNDING.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide grounding system equal to or exceeding the requirements of NEC and as
indicated in the contract documents. Raceway system which includes metal conduit, wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, busway, wire ways, cable trays, enclosures, motor frames, etc., shall be made to form a continuous, conducting permanent ground circuit of the lowest practical impedance to enhance the safe conduction of ground fault currents and to prevent objectionable differences in voltage between metal nonload current carrying parts of the electrical system.
B. Provide solid grounding of building structures and electrical and communications systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits and systems. Types of grounding systems include the following:
1. Equipment Room Ground Terminal Bar 2. Electrical Equipment Grounding
3. Telecommunications Grounding 4. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and
manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions. etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable.
B. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in the NEC by Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding conductors, bonding conductors, jumpers, grounded conductors, etc. shall be sized in accordance with the NEC.
B. Equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation GROUNDING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260526-GROUNDING.DOC May 7, 2021
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals for the following:
1. Ground connectors.
2. Ground bars.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Conductors:
1. Exposed grounding components such as bars, straps, cables, flexible jumpers, braids, shunts, etc., shall be bare copper unless otherwise indicated.
2. Grounding conductors in raceway with 600V circuiting shall be insulated to match the circuit conductors with green color.
3. Grounding conductor size shall be as indicated or as required by the NEC whichever is larger, stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed copper, unless otherwise indicated. Sizing shall take into account circuit voltage drop.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Same make as for 600 volt conductors.
B. Connectors, Clamps and Terminals:
1. Mechanical connectors and clamps shall be made of copper alloy or silicon
bronze. Solderless compression terminals shall be copper, long-barrel, NEMA two bolt. Bolts and washers (Belleville) shall be of comparable material or stainless steel.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Burndy 2) Hubbell Anderson Corp. 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Approved equal
2. Exothermic Welds:
a. Provide exothermic welds designed for size and type of intended cable, rods, structure, etc. Solder prohibited for connections, except for medium and high voltage cable metallic tape shields (utilize mechanical and solder).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation GROUNDING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260526-GROUNDING.DOC May 7, 2021
b. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Erico "Cadweld" 2) Burndy "ThermOweld" 3) Approved equal
3. Pipe Clamp:
a. Pipe clamp for bonding to pipe type electrode (water pipe, etc.) shall be a suitably sized copper alloy clamp.
b. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Burndy GAR-BU 2) O-Z Gedney Type CG 3) Burndy "Durium" 4) AFL Global "Everdur" 5) Approved equal
4. Flexible Strap:
a. Flexible grounding straps shall be of braided high conductivity copper
with two hole connector. Strap shall have equal to or greater than ampacity of the system it is bonding to. Strap shall provide flexibility in all directions when installed properly.
b. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Burndy 2) OZ Gedney
3) Approved equal
C. Ground Bars
1. Provide ground bars where indicated. Ground bars shall be:
a. 98% conductive copper, minimum.
b. 4 in. x 1/4 in. thick minimum with length as indicated with minimum 36 in. for electric room/MDF and all other minimum of 24 in.
c. Standard NEMA bolt hole patterns with maximum quantity of lug locations. Spacing of 1-1/8 in. apart.
2. Bar shall be mounted to an accessible wall location with galvanized steel hardware and 2000V rated insulators. Mounting shall be suitable for full complement of cabling.
3. Unit shall conform to EIA/TIA standards.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation GROUNDING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260526-GROUNDING.DOC May 7, 2021
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Erico b. Newton Instrument c. Burndy
d. Harger
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors:
1. Provide grounding conductor(s) with all power circuits. Conductor shall be sized as indicated or as required by the NEC as a minimum and shall be terminated on the equipment, device, enclosure, etc. grounding terminal. Conductor size shall be for the entire length unless approved by the Engineer where oversized for voltage drop.
2. Conductors above grade to ground electrodes (water piping, structural column, etc.) and to equipment (service entrance, ground bars, ground halos, etc.) shall be
installed in metallic conduit with ends bonded to the conduit.
3. Grounding conductors shall be installed to have a minimum radius of 3 in.
4. Grounding conductors in a raceway system shall be terminated/bonded to each
box, cabinet, enclosure, etc. through which it passes or terminates.
5. Grounding conductors routed with underground circuits shall be bonded to each ground electrode and metallic cable support system within the raceway system
including pull and access locations.
6. Stranded conductors penetrating vapor barriers, foundations, slab on grade and water stop membranes shall have the interstitial spaces between strands filled with solder 4 in. beyond the membrane each side. The conductor shall be sealed to the membrane with a manufacturer approved method.
B. Raceway Systems:
1. All metal supports, cable trays, messenger cables, frames, sleeves, brackets, braces, etc. for the raceway system, panels, switches, boxes, starters controls, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and in contact with the raceway system, or which are subject to vibration and loosening, shall be bonded to the raceway system.
2. Termination of rigid conduit at all boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall be made up tightly with a double locknut arrangement and a bushing, bushings being of the insulated type. Utilize grounding bushings as specified elsewhere in these
specifications.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation GROUNDING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260526-GROUNDING.DOC May 7, 2021
3. Conduit which runs to or from boxes, cabinets, or enclosures having concentric
or eccentric knockouts which partially perforate the metal around the conduit and hence impair the continuity of system ground circuits shall be provided with bonding jumpers connected between a grounding type bushing/locknut on the
conduit and a ground bus or stud inside the box, cabinet, or enclosure and attached thereto.
4. Conduit expansion joints and telescoping sections of metal raceways shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the NEC.
C. Connectors Clamps and Terminals:
1. Connectors utilized above grade in dry accessible locations shall be mechanical or exothermic type.
2. Connectors in damp locations, below grade or if not indicated shall be exothermic type.
3. Clean the area near the connecting surfaces prior to any connection to ensure effective contact. Cleaning shall be to the bare metal. Wire brush area if needed
to remove rust scale paint, dirt, etc. to expose bare metal.
4. Exothermic connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and tested with heavy blow of a five pound sledge.
D. Flexible Strap:
1. Flexible straps shall be used when bonding vibrating/moveable equipment, with expansion fittings and where recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Sufficient slack shall be provided to compensate for the anticipated vibration, movement and expansion.
E. Secondary Electrical Systems:
1. The neutral (grounded) conductor of each low voltage, single and/or polyphase system or distribution system, except special isolated double insulated systems, shall be solidly connected to ground at the transformer neutral bushing, or at the main secondary switchgear to the system ground, and shall be sized for current carrying capacity, not to be less than as required by the NEC. Ground connection shall be to the building grounding system, building steel, building water service, building concrete reinforcement and as indicated.
2. Provide equipment grounding conductor, green colored insulation, with phase
conductors, to primary side of all transformers rated 600 volts or less circuited to the enclosure and secondary neutral bushing, to all electrical utilization and distribution equipment; insulation shall be same type as phase conductors.
Transformer enclosures shall be bonded to the primary and secondary circuit grounding conductor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation GROUNDING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260526-GROUNDING.DOC May 7, 2021
3. Equipment grounding conductors shall extend from the point of termination back
to the ground bus of the source panelboard, switchboard, transformer, or switchgear.
F. Communications Rooms:
1. For each building communications room or closet provide one (1) wall mounted ground bar bonded to the main building ground bar or electrical service ground with insulated #2/0 AWG conductor.
2. Local cable trays, equipment racks, etc. shall be bonded to the ground bar with insulated #6AWG minimum.
G. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors in conduit from building's main service equipment or grounding bus to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a
dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from
equipment shutoff valve.
3.2 GROUND TERMINAL BUS INSTALLATION
A. Install ground terminal bar in rooms where shown on the drawings. Mount bar 18 in. above finished floor by anchors and bolts using 1-1/2 in. long insulated spacer between bar and wall. Use a minimum of two (2) supports 18 in. on center. Connect all grounding electrode system conductors, system enclosure ground bus, and other indicated electrode systems to the terminal bar.
B. Label grounding conductors terminated to bus for equipment, location, electrode, etc served.
3.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SIGNAL GROUNDING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install a complete telecommunications grounding electrode system with room grounding
buses, grounding electrodes and interconnecting cables per ANSI/EIA/TIA-607A.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 7
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation GROUNDING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-260526-GROUNDING.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Bond metallic telecommunications pathways (e.g. conduit, sleeves, cable trays, fire-rated
assemblies, etc.) to ground. Use structural steel where available. When a bonding conductor is installed in metallic conduit, the bonding conductor must be bonded to the conduit at both ends.
C. All exterior/underground terminals shall be made with exothermic welds or compression connectors.
D. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data and other communication equipment, provide #4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet and central equipment location.
1. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
3.4 TESTS
A. Test the building ground system before backfilling to ensure continuity and determine system resistance value.
B. Testing procedure shall be a fall of potential type with a moving auxiliary electrode in accordance with IEEE Standard 142 and reviewed/approved by the Engineer. Sufficient test points shall be taken for accurate resistance value.
C. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, no earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Provide tabulated test results indicating distance between rods and resistance readings on a plotted graph.
D. Test each ground electrode system separately prior to connection to the system or main building ground bar. Test each system ground electrode system a second time after backfilling has occurred and all final connections (building steel, water service, etc.) have been made.
E. Soil type, date, time, meter manufacturer/model number, person performing the test, test witnesses and most recent rainfall shall be noted in test submittal.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 26 20 00 - ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete distribution system as indicated on the Contract Documents and as
specified herein.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests
will be acceptable.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), state codes, local codes, and requirements of authority
having jurisdiction.
C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA, UL and IEEE Standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following product data/information:
1. Manufacturer and equipment type.
2. Standard catalog information sheet.
3. Detailed shop drawings indicating plan, elevation, end and isometric views. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly shown and dimensioned on the drawings.
4. Complete Bill of Materials.
5. All relevant ratings including, but not limited to, voltage, current, interrupting and withstand.
6. Overcurrent Device Information. Model number, available settings, setting
ranges, capabilities, etc.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC May 7, 2021
7. Submit available and final settings, programming and adjustments.
B. Submit product data and information for the following equipment, materials, products, etc.:
1. Distribution and branch circuit panelboards.
2. Enclosed circuit breakers.
3. Disconnect switches.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide full system warranty (labor, travel, equipment, etc.) in accordance with Division 1 and a minimum of one (1) year from acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Branch Circuit Panelboards (480Y/277 volt, 208Y/120 volt, 240/120 volts):
1. Provide branch circuit panelboard as indicated in the "Panelboard Schedule" and as located on the drawings. Panelboards shall be equipped with quick make/quick break thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers as scheduled.
2. Panelboard bussing and lugs shall be copper. Provide grounding bus in each panelboard, securely bonded to the box. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings as indicated. Such ratings shall
be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67.
3. Provisions for additional circuit breakers shall be such that field addition of connectors or mounting hardware will not be required to add circuit breakers to
the panelboard. Bus connections shall be bolt-on.
4. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the Panelboard Schedule or on the plans. All panelboards shall be fully rated. "Series Ratings" are NOT acceptable. Reducing breaker ratings on the basis of series rating is not acceptable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC May 7, 2021
5. The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity
and gauge of steel to be specified in UL Standard 50 cabinets. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. Each front shall include a door and have a flush, stainless steel, cylinder type lock with catch
and spring-loaded door pull. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Fronts shall be of code gauge, full-finished steel with rust inhibiting iron phosphate sealer and baked enamel finish. Minimum box width shall be 20 in. Provide door-in-door construction. Panelboard to be keyed to match the Owner's existing system.
6. Panelboards with main circuit breaker shall have inherent and listed coordination of the main and branch circuit breakers.
7. Ratings shall be as indicted on the Panelboard Schedule.
8. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following
manufacturers are acceptable:
a. 480Y/277 Volt:
1) Square D "NF" - Design Make.
2) Eaton Corporation "PRL2" 3) General Electric by ABB "AE"
b. 208Y/120 Volt and 240/120 Volt:
1) Square D "NQ" - Design Make. 2) Eaton Corporation "PRL1" 3) General Electric by ABB "AQ"
B. Circuit Breakers:
1. Circuit breakers below 400 amp frame shall be molded case with inverse time and instantaneous tripping functions, unless indicated otherwise in contract documents.
2. Listed combination of coordinated circuit breakers shall be verified by the equipment manufacturer utilizing published data sheets. Confirm listings shall be submitted.
3. Lugs shall be mechanical, rated for 60/75° AL/Cu.
4. Branch circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic and trip indicating, and multipole breakers shall have common trip. Single pole 15
and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V ac or 277 V ac and carry the SWD marking.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC May 7, 2021
5. Ratings shall be as indicated in the Contract Documents.
6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
a. Square D Micrologic trip unit - Design Make.
b. Eaton Corporation Optim 550 trip units for circuit breakers 400 - 1600 amp frame or RMS 610 trip units for 2000 amp frame to 6000 amp frame c. General Electric Spectra RMS or MicroVersa trip unit 7. Enclosed circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal-magnetic type, ratings as noted, with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism, quick make/quick break action and positive handle indication. Multiple pole breakers shall be common trip type. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pose. Provide provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Breakers shall be calibrated for
operation in an ambient temperature of 40°C and shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. Breakers shall have removable lugs, UL listed for
copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be installed in NEMA 1 general purpose, surface enclosures, unless otherwise noted.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1) Square D 2) Cutler Hammer 3) General Electric by ABB
C. Disconnect Switches:
1. Shall be heavy-duty type three-pole, with "Quick Make/Quick Break" operating handle mechanically interlocked with the cover, horsepower and voltage rated to match equipment served. Where indicated switches shall be provided with dual-
element, time delay, rejection type fuses. Switches shall be installed in NEMA 1 for indoor use, NEMA 3R for outdoor use. Provide provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Provide neutral bar in single phase or three phase, four wire circuits, and ground bar in all switches. Provide auxiliary contacts where called for.
2. All disconnects connected downstream of ASD's shall have a normally open and
normally closed auxiliary contacts which shall be wired to the ASD to indicate disconnect is open.
3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
a. Square-D - Design Make. b. Cutler Hammer c. General Electric
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC May 7, 2021
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment shall be grounded per the NEC.
B. Electrical distribution equipment shall have lugs/terminations suitable for the indicated
conductor size. Where conductors have been oversized for voltage drop and where approved by the Engineer it shall be allowed to reduce the conductor size using hydraulically crimpled splice in a box next to the distribution equipment to allow for standard lug termination.
C. Install dry-type transformers with adequate clearances for proper ventilation. Bolt floor mounted transformer to pad.
D. Distribution switchboards, motor control centers and floor mounted dry-type transformers shall be mounted on 4 in. high concrete pads which shall extend 3 in. on all sides. Securely bolt the unit to the pads for proper horizontal and vertical alignment.
E. Coordinate transformer pad dimensions with transformer manufacturer's requirements. Coordinate transformer pad locations, dimensions and details with General Contractor.
F. Provide pad lockable branch circuit breaker device to hold circuit breaker in the closed position, but not prevent overcurrent protection, for all branch circuits serving fire alarm controls panels, emergency lighting and life safety branch circuits.
G. Identification:
1. Identify all items of equipment as described in Section 260501-3.1, Identification. Identification shall be provided for switchboards, panelboards,
transformers, ASD's, motor starters, disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers, switchboard main/distribution breakers, MCC's automatic transfer switches, UPS's, generators, surge suppression devices, control panels, switchgear, etc.
2. Switchboards, panelboards, MCC's, switchgear, etc. shall have a label indicating name/tag ID, feeder source, conductor color convention and for service entrance locations the available short circuit current.
3.2 ELECTRICAL LOAD TEST
A. Conduct a load test prior to request for final payment and comply with the following:
1. Energize maximum normal light and power load for a period of two hours when scheduled.
2. Record voltage at service and at each panel.
3. Measure current in each phase of all feeders.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262000-ELECTRICDISTRIBUTION.DOC May 7, 2021
4. Adjust transformer taps as directed by engineer after review of report.
5. Provide and install all necessary metering equipment.
6. Owner's Representative or Site Representative shall witness the test.
7. Before final acceptance specified test shall be completed to the satisfaction of the
Owner's Representative who shall be sole judge of the acceptability of such tests and who may direct the performance of such additional tests as deemed necessary in order to determine the acceptability of the systems, equipment, material and workmanship. Additional tests required by the Owner's Representative shall be provided at no additional cost. Protective equipment shall be actuated in a manner that clearly demonstrated their workability and operation.
3.3 CLEANING
A. At the completion of the project, while equipment is de-energized, it shall be thoroughly cleaned to a shipped condition using methods in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize vacuum for cleaning and not compressed gas.
3.4 SPARE PARTS
A. Deliver loose equipment to the Owner and obtain receipt for fuses, keys to panelboards, etc.
3.5 DISCONNECT DEVICES
A. All disconnect devices downstream of ASD's: Provide wiring, conduit and connections between ASD and disconnect auxiliary switch to ASD.
END OF SECTION 26 20 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
SECTION 26 29 13 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation
and full operation of separately enclosed, preassembled, motor controls, rated 600V and less.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ASD: Adjustable speed drive motor controller.
B. CPT: Control power transformer.
C. DDC: Direct digital control. Building management/control system.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. PWM: Pulse width modulated.
F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data for each type and rating of motor controller
indicated.
1. Include dimensions, weights, enclosure types, rating capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, furnished specialties and accessories,
mounting and attachment details, method of field assembly, components, and location / size of each field connection.
2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
B. As part of Operation and Maintenance Data, provide manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules, setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points, and setting field-adjustable overload relays.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and
manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), state codes, local codes, and requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the
latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA, UL and IEEE Standards.
D. Equipment and systems shall be NRTL tested and labeled.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide full system warranty (labor, travel, equipment, etc.) in accordance with Division 1 with a minimum of one (1) year from acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers include:
B. Adjustable Speed Drives (ASDs):
1. ABB (Design Make - ACH580)
2. Yaskawa
3. Square D
4. Allen-Bradley
5. Eaton Corporation
6. Emerson
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
C. Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers:
1. Square-D
2. Cutler Hammer
3. General Electric
4. Allen-Bradley
5. Siemens
2.2 ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE MOTOR CONTROLLER
A. General Requirements for ASDs:
1. ASD Description: adjustable speed drive, consisting of power converter that employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; arranged to provide self-protection, motor protection, and variable-speed control of one or more induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508. Suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors, as defined by NEMA
MG 1.
B. Unit Operating Requirements:
1. ASD shall provide full rated output from a line voltage of plus 10% and minus
10% of nominal voltage. ASD shall continue to operate without faulting from a +30% to -35% of nominal line voltage.
2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent.
3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 5 percent of ASD frequency rating.
4. Minimum Efficiency: 98 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
5. Minimum Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed condition.
6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 100kA.
7. Ambient Operating Temperature Rating: 5 deg F (-15 deg C) to 104 deg F (40 deg C) minimum.
8. Humidity Rating: To 95 percent (noncondensing) minimum.
9. Altitude Rating: Suitable for intended location with 3300 feet minimum.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
10. Vibration Withstand: Comply with NEMA ICS 61800-2.
11. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.3 times the base load current for two seconds.
12. Starting Torque: Minimum 140 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz.
13. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 1 to 12.5 kHz.
14. Stop Modes: Programmable including fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.
C. Inverter: ASD shall employ a 6 PWM power electronic system, consisting of:
1. Input Section:
a. ASD input power stage shall convert three-phase AC line power into a fixed DC voltage via a solid state full wave diode rectifier.
2. Intermediate Section:
a. DC bus as a supply to the ASD output Section shall maintain a fixed voltage with filtering and short circuit protection.
b. DC bus shall be interfaced with the ASD diagnostic logic circuit, for continuous monitoring and protection of the power components.
3. Output Section:
a. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) shall convert DC bus voltage to variable frequency and voltage.
b. The ASD shall employ pulse width modulated output technology to power the motor.
D. Isolated Control Interface: ASDs control input to follow remote-control signal
(selectable 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, 0-20mA, and network) over a minimum 40:1 speed range with electrical signal.
E. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 6000 seconds.
4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 6000 seconds.
5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
F. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:
1. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the ASD, complying with UL 1449 SPD, Type 1 or Type 2.
2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed
default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.
3. Under and overvoltage protection.
4. Inverter overcurrent protection.
5. ASD and Motor-Overload/Over temperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring ASDs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing ASD over temperature and motor-overload alarm and trip. The settings shall be selectable utilizing the keypad.
6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable dead bands.
7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.
8. Loss-of-phase protection.
9. Reverse-phase protection.
10. Short-circuit protection.
11. Motor over-temperature fault.
12. Shut down on indication of motor local disconnect switch open position.
G. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts. Field adjustable for manual restart.
H. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged.
I. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting ASD into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load.
J. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.
K. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
L. Integral Input Disconnecting Means: magnetic circuit breaker with pad-lockable, door-
mounted handle mechanism.
M. The ASD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and reduce audible
motor noise.
N. The ASD shall provide a programmable loss-of-load (broken belt / broken coupling) Form-C relay output. The drive shall be programmable to signal the loss-of-load condition via keypad warning, Form-C relay output, or over serial communication bus.
O. Unit Mounted Operator Station: front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English-language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.
1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes.
2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view
and operate; and view, operate, and service. Coordinate the access codes with the Owner.
P. Status indicators displaying the following conditions:
1. Power on.
2. Run.
3. Overvoltage.
4. Line fault.
5. Overcurrent.
6. External fault.
Q. Historical Logging Information and Displays
1. Real time clock with current time and date.
2. Running log of total power versus time
3. Total run time.
4. Fault log, maintaining faults with time and date stamp for each.
5. kWh.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 7
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
R. Indicating Devices: Digital display mounted flush in ASD door and connected to display
ASD parameters including, but not limited to:
1. Output frequency (Hz).
2. Motor speed (rpm).
3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).
4. Motor current (amperes).
5. Motor torque (percent).
6. Fault or alarming status (code).
7. PID feedback signal (percent).
8. DC-link voltage (V dc).
9. Set point frequency (Hz).
10. Motor output voltage (V ac).
S. Control Signal Interfaces:
1. Electric Input Signal Interface:
a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs field selectable for 0- to
10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc.
b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.
2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the DDC system for HVAC or other control systems:
a. 0- to 10-V dc.
b. 4- to 20-mA dc.
c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal (0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc), which can be configured for any of the following:
a. Output frequency (Hz).
b. Output current (load).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 8
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
c. DC-link voltage (V dc).
d. Motor torque (percent).
e. Motor speed (rpm).
f. Set point frequency (Hz).
g. Any aux contacts.
4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of three programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-VAC, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:
a. Motor running.
b. Set point speed reached.
c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).
T. Interface with DDC System for HVAC: Factory-installed hardware and software shall interface with DDC system for HVAC to monitor, control, display, and record data for use in processing reports. ASD settings shall be retained within ASD's nonvolatile memory.
1. Provide EIA-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be BACnet
MS/TP, Modbus RTU and N2. Provide additional ports for any other protocols that are utilized in the project.
U. Interface so ASD has indication of downstream disconnect switch(es) status (open-
closed) and operates accordingly.
V. ASDs shall have an input inductive reactance either via 5% impedance AC line reactor or a pair of balanced DC chokes, one on the positive and one on the negative side of the DC
bus, with an effective input impedance equivalent to a 5% AC line reactor. Any ASDs that do not meet this requirement must have a 5% AC line reactor added, with the reactor mounted in the same enclosure as the ASD.
W. EMI/RFI Filtering: Onboard filters shall allow ASD assembly to be CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2.
X. MOTOR STARTERS
Y. Provide motor starters as listed on the Electric Equipment and Control Schedule on the drawings.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 9
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
Z. Starters, contactors and controllers shall comply with NEMA standards having general
purpose NEMA 1 or 1B enclosure unless otherwise called for. Provide explosion proof, weather resistant or watertight construction as required. Starters shall be minimum NEMA size 0 with solid state overloads in each phase sized per NEC, motor full load
amperage, service factor, and motor operating conditions.
AA. Pad lock arrangements shall be provided to lock the disconnect device in the "off" position. Magnetic starters shall be provided with a control power transformer with 120V secondary and primary and secondary fusing and be sized to accept the loads imposed there on. Starters shall have LED type pilot lights. Each starter subject to electrical interlock and/or automatic control shall have necessary auxiliary contacts.
BB. Auxiliary Devices: Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights, devices, relays, transformers, selector switches, electric thermostats, auxiliary starter contacts as required for functions called for. Provide separate relay for each speed to operate electric dampers or other devices as required for multispeed motor circuit.
CC. Manual Motor Starter:
1. Provide all starters with thermal overload(s); and pilot light(s), and handle lock-out provisions. Gang starter with selector switch for multispeed applications. Provide single or 2-pole as required:
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. Provide Type 1 for dry and clean indoor locations, Type 4R for outdoor locations, Type
4X stainless steel for kitchen and wash-down areas, and Type 12 for areas subject to dust, falling dirt, and dripping non corrosive liquids.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive motor controllers, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine motor controllers before installation. Reject motor controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before motor controller installation.
D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 10
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Wall-Mounted ASDs: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall.
For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks.
B. Wall-Mounted Manual and Magnetic Controllers: Install on walls with tops at uniform height, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks.
C. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install ASDs on 4-inch nominal thickness concrete base.
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
D. Roof-Mounting Controllers: Install ASD on roofs with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished roof surface unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to curbs or mounting on freestanding,
lightweight, structural-steel channels bolted to curbs. Seal roof penetrations after raceways are installed.
E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
F. Install fuses, heaters in thermal-overload relays (based on actual nameplate full-load amperes) after motors are installed, and install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.
G. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70.
H. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing
bars and distribution spools.
I. Setting of Overload Relays: Select and set overloads on the basis of full-load current rating as shown on motor nameplate. Adjust setting value for special motors as required
by NFPA 70 for motors that are high-torque, high-efficiency, and so on.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 11
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
J. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between ASDs and remote devices and facility's central-control system.
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable.
D. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.
E. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify motor controllers, components, and control wiring. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. Label each ASD with engraved nameplate. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. Identify all items as described in Section 260501
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Tests and Inspections for ASDs:
1. Inspect ASDs, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.
2. Test insulation resistance for each ASD element, component, connecting motor
supply, feeder, and control circuits.
3. Test continuity of each circuit.
4. Verify that voltages at ASD locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner's Representative before starting the motor(s).
5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 12
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Tests and Inspections for Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers:
1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods" Chapter.
2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition, anchorage, alignment, and grounding, and that the controller is clean.
c. Inspect contactors: Verify mechanical operation and contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are according to manufacturer's published data.
d. Motor-Running Protection: Verify overload element rating is correct for its application and if protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating.
e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection
resistance values with values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.
f. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces.
D. Motor controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the ASD and describes results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken,
and observations made after remedial action.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 13
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-262913-MOTORCONTROLLERS.DOCX May 7, 2021
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.
B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.
C. Adjust carrier frequency for optimal operation with load and conditions.
D. Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load
amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Construction Manager before increasing settings.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain motor controllers.
END OF SECTION 26 29 13
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LIGHTING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX May 7, 2021
SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide interior and exterior lighting systems, including luminaires, hangers, supports, fittings, lamps, wiring, connections and controls, as indicated in the Contract Documents for complete and operational systems. The lighting layouts on the drawings are diagrammatic only. Refer to architectural "Reflected Ceiling Plans" for exact location of interior luminaires. Luminaires, in general, have been specified for the particular type of ceiling in which they are to be installed. Verify the ceiling construction details and provide luminaires suitable for the respective ceiling types and room finish schedule.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The following standards, criteria, codes, etc. shall be followed in the manufacture and
installation of the lighting systems.
1. NFPA 2. NEC
3. IESNA 4. NEMA 5. ANSI
6. UL 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaires shall be as specified in the "Luminaire Schedule". Luminaire types, appearance, characteristics, photometrics, finishes, etc., correspond to the specified manufacturer and associated series or catalog number listed in the "Luminaire Schedule". Products of other listed acceptable manufacturers shall be equivalent in every way to that of the luminaire specified. The Engineer reserves the right to disapprove any luminaire type submitted which they feel is not equal in quality, appearance or performance to the luminaire specified.
B. Manufacturer's luminaire series or catalog numbers listed in the "Luminaire Schedule" indicate quality, type, and style, but may not cover required special design details. Provide luminaires having such special details as noted in the "Luminaire Schedule", as
indicated by the specified luminaire model number and as required for proper installation.
C. All luminaires shall be new and bear a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) label for the service intended.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LIGHTING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX May 7, 2021
D. Luminaires shall be products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of
the type of luminaires specified and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with specification requirements.
E. Verify the availability of all luminaires proposed to be used in the execution of the work
prior to submitting same for approval. The discontinuance of production of any luminaire after such approval has been granted shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing an approved luminaire of comparable quality and design at no additional cost.
F. Photometric and operational data shall be provided only by qualified and certified organizations. Certification documentation shall be submitted with the luminaire information.
G. Should there be any difference between drawings and schedules, secure from Architect/Engineer such information as necessary prior to providing proposal. When finishes are not definitely specified, they shall be as selected by the Architect and not be limited to standard finishes.
H. Locations indicated for luminaires are approximate. Field coordinate exact locations as
near as possible to the location indicated. Coordinate with the Engineer for any major location changes.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each luminaire type, include in a single submittal, in order of luminaire designation, the catalog "cut" sheet with complete manufacturer and model number. Product data should include the following:
1. Manufacturer and Catalog Number.
2. Features, accessories, materials and finishes.
3. Physical description and dimensions of luminaires.
4. Life, power input, output (lumens, distribution, CCT, and CRI) and energy-efficiency data.
5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests (space to mounting height ratio, coefficient of utilization complete values, IES distribution hard and electronic copy, candlepower distribution by angle and luminaire efficiency). Format shall be in accordance with IES TM-27.
6. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams between luminaires and controllers.
7. Lens/Louver Type.
8. Driver/ballast with each type luminaire as applicable (type, sound rating, overload protection, voltage, input/fixture wattage, ballast factor, power factor, etc.).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LIGHTING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX May 7, 2021
9. Certification of IES LM-79, IES LM-80 and TM-21 testing for LED luminaires.
Luminaires shall be tested in accordance with IES LM and TM standards.
10. Warranty.
B. Coordination Drawings: Provide coordination drawings in accordance with Section
260500. Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Luminaires. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Structure members to which equipment and or luminaires will be attached. 5. Initial access modules for acoustical tile, including size and locations. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including other luminaires, air outlets and inlets, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, ceiling mounted projectors, etc.
C. Color Chips: Provide color chips of available finishes for luminaires upon request of Architect/Engineer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Luminaires and equipment shall be delivered with NRTL and manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Broken, cracked and damaged materials and equipment shall be removed
from the site immediately and be replaced with new materials and equipment. Luminaires and accessories shall be stored in protected dry locations in their original unbroken package or container. Luminaires shall be protected from dust and dampness both before and after installation. Luminaires shall be protected from paint and cleaning solvents during all phases of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division hazard by a NRTL.
C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and UL 8750.
D. Recessed Luminaires: Comply with NEMA LE 4.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LIGHTING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX May 7, 2021
2.2 LIGHT-EMITTING DIODE (LED) LUMINAIRES
A. Luminaires shall be identical in construction features, options and appearance to the luminaries specified in the Luminaire Schedule. LED luminaires include white and RGBW systems as indicated on the luminaire schedule.
B. Luminaires shall be provided with all cables, controllers, power supplies, drivers, connectors, terminators and accessories required for a complete installation. LED system shall utilize pulse width modulation, non-linear scaling techniques and reverse polarity protection.
C. Provide dimming down to 10% as a minimum, or to percentage indicated or called for on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, the dimming control shall be a 0-10VDC signal
D. LED luminaires shall be high brightness and binned for forward voltage, luminous flux and wavelength.
E. LED luminaires shall be tested in accordance with IESNA LM-79 (luminous output, power input, luminaire efficacy (lumens/watt), color temperature and color rendering
index), IESNA LM-80 (L70, output luminous maintenance, 10,000 hour minimum test, calculation method is not acceptable) and IESNA TM-21/28. Luminaire output shall be a minimum of 100 lumens/watt. Rated life shall be a minimum of 50,000 hours at 70%
output. Testing shall be performed by a US Department of Energy (DOE) accredited laboratory.
F. Drivers shall be solid state Class 1 power supply/driver with universal input (120-277V).
The system shall have a minimum 90% power factor, 3.5 maximum crest factor, minimum efficiency of 90%, a maximum of 20% THD and overload protection. Adequate heat sink capability shall be provided to ensure the rated life. Unit shall meet FCC rules and regulations.
G. Where indicated luminaires shall have color tuning capability and control. System to have separate dimming (5-100%) and color (3000K to 5000K, or as indicated on drawings) adjustability. Control shall be Dali or DMX512 for controllability as indicated. The system shall utilize the most recent settings when energized.
H. The luminaire (to include LED sources and drivers) shall have a full five (5) year minimum warranty for replacement and labor.
1. Acceptable LED Node Manufacturers:
a. Philips b. Osram c. Cree
d. Nichea e. Lumiled
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LIGHTING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX May 7, 2021
2.3 EXIT LUMINAIRES:
A. Electrical Characteristics:
1. Electrical characteristics:
a. LED type for 120/277 volt supply.
b. Use two LED strips for indirect illumination of the face. Meet or exceed illumination requirements of NFPA 101, and all of the requirements of UL924.
c. Maximum input power of 5 watts per illuminated face.
2. Construction:
a. Red letters.
b. Provide Universal mount unit.
c. Provide single or double face and arrows as indicated on Contract Documents.
3. Design Equipment:
a. Simkar SLEDARW or approved equal.
2.4 LUMINAIRE CONSTRUCTION
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.
3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
C. Lenses:
1. Shall be listed materials tested in accordance with ASTM D-635, "Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a
Horizontal Position" and burns less than 2/5 inches per minute.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LIGHTING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX May 7, 2021
2. The products shall have a smoke density of less than 75 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D-2843, standard test method for "Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics".
3. The flame spread rating shall not exceed 0-25 and smoke developed rating shall
not exceed 450 in accordance with ASTM E-84, standard test method for "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials".
4. Self-ignition shall not occur below 600°F, in accordance with ASTM D-1929, standard test method for "Ignition Properties of Plastics".
5. Materials shall remain in place 15 minutes at 175°F and fall from frame at 200° below ignition temperature in accordance with ASTM D-648, "Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load".
2.5 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
A. Luminaire schedule is found on the contract drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. All luminaires shall be installed as per manufacturer furnished installation instructions.
C. Provide for every luminaire as shown on the plans, or as scheduled on the drawings.
D. Location of all ceiling and wall mounted luminaires shall be as indicated on the Architectural and Electrical drawings. The contractor shall verify ceiling type, construction, and material prior to ordering.
E. Provide luminaires with an IC rating for luminaires installed in direct contact with insulation.
F. Provide plaster frames for plaster ceilings and flanged frames for drywall ceilings.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 7
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LIGHTING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX May 7, 2021
G. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Luminaires shall be suitable and as recommended by the manufacturer for the actual intended mounting method and materials.
I. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.
2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.
3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.
4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
J. Flush-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secured to outlet box.
2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire.
3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.
K. Wall-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Attached to structural members in walls, to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate
attached to wall structural members, or using through bolts and backing plates on either side of wall.
2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
L. Suspended Luminaires:
1. Pendant and Rods:
a. Pendant mount luminaires from 1/4 in. threaded rods of required length.
b. Brace pendants and rods longer than 48 inches to limit swinging.
2. Aircraft Cable:
a. Cables shall be 1/16 in. aircraft cable with end safety fittings. Cable shall be provided with 2 in. diameter mini-canopy and threaded coupler for attachment to a 1/4 in.-20 threaded stud extending 3/4 in. below ceiling.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 8
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LIGHTING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX May 7, 2021
b. Cable assembly shall include a spring-loaded adjustment device mounted
in the fixture.
c. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing required supports for cable attachment.
d. For cord feed to the luminaire provide continuous cord clip of matching color to attach the cord to the cable.
e. Support per manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Support stem mounted, single unit luminaires with approved outlet box and accessories that hold tem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.
4. Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point of continuous rows of luminaires and tubing, rod, or wire support for suspension for each unit of length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.
M. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box.
2. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. Utilize #10 steel wire; similar to that used to support the ceiling grid.
3. Provide UL listed seismic hold-down clips and fasten to luminaires and to ceiling grid members at or near each luminaire corner.
4. Install luminaires of sizes less than ceiling grid as indicated on reflected ceiling
plans or center in acoustical panel and support luminaire independently with at least two metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
N. Provide all necessary accessories for "end-to-end" mounting where continuous rows of luminaires are indicated. All luminaire assemblies shall be grounded.
O. Luminaires installed in continuous rows may be fed by a single outlet if luminaires are UL approved and suitable for through wiring in luminaire raceway.
P. New luminaires may be provided to replace existing luminaires indicated to remain or be reused, subject to shop drawing approval.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Ground all non-current carrying parts of all lighting luminaires.
B. All grounding shall be accomplished with NRTL tested grounding connectors suitable for
this purpose.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 9
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LIGHTING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX May 7, 2021
3.4 FINAL CLEANING
A. Immediately prior to acceptance, damp clean diffusers, glassware, luminaire trim, reflectors, lamps, louvers, lens and similar objects of all luminaires. Remove all dirt, corrosion, foreign material, finger marks, and blemishes. Replace all burned out lamps
and failed components.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Test of Emergency Lighting: Under supervision of Engineer, interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
D. Replace luminaires damaged during shipment, construction, or installation.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260936 "Lighting Controls."
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Provide adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Adjustment may be required during hours of darkness.
B. Final distribution shall be acceptable to the Owner and may take several attempts.
3.8 REMOVAL OF BALLASTS IN EXISTING LUMINAIRES
A. Assume ballasts contain PCB material unless labeled otherwise or test samples show materials are not PCB; submit a test report. Remove all ballasts from existing luminaires indicated on contract documents. Dispose of all ballasts which do not have non PCB labels in PCB containers and pay all costs to have containers taken to EPA approved incinerators and disposed of all EPA regulations. Follow all EPA regulations for transporting material. If ballast has leaked in existing luminaires, remove material deposited in luminaire and dispose of those materials as indicated above. Provide documentation verifying disposal of PCB contaminated ballasts.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 10
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LIGHTING
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-265000-LIGHTING.DOCX May 7, 2021
3.9 REMOVAL OF LAMPS IN EXISTING LUMINAIRES
A. The Contractor shall employ the service of a certified disposal/recycling service company to dispose of all removed fluorescent and/or HID lamps. All disposal procedures shall be performed in accordance with EPA Requirements and Subtitle C for the disposal of
mercury contaminated lamps.
END OF SECTION 26 50 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 27 21 00 - LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services, etc. for a complete functional Local Area
Network (LAN) and related work as required in the Contract Documents.
B. The systems to be provided shall be for a switched LAN environment. The system shall hereafter be referred to as the Data Network System.
C. Basic Intent:
1. Located throughout the building as shown on the drawings, are places where computers and associated equipment are intended to be placed and connected to the network for the purposes of utilizing common resources.
2. The telecommunications rooms for the data network in the building(s) are located as shown on the drawings.
3. Located in various other places are additional Telecommunication Rooms. It is intended that these be connected with the Main Telecommunication Room by a
fiber optic cable backbone. From each of these locations, data cable is to be run to the data jacks where computer equipment is connected.
4. Rack mounted enclosure shall be used as termination points for all fiber optic
cabling. Provide backbone cabling between telecommunication rooms as indicated. Duplex SC or LC type connectors shall be utilized for fiber.
5. Patch panels shall be used as termination points for all data cables and rack
mounted enclosures for the individual fiber cables in telecommunication rooms. Duplex SC or LC type connectors shall be utilized for fiber.
D. Description of System:
1. The system shall include the items listed below, as described herein and as indicated on the Contract Documents:
a. Data network shall be compatible with existing network configuration and characteristics.
b. Campus service to the building(s).
c. Building Main Distribution Frame (MDF) for service entrance and distribution.
d. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) as indicated for cabling
distribution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
e. Backbone wiring from entrance facility to the MDF and from MDF to
the IDFs.
f. Complete raceway system (cable tray, J hooks, conduit) for cabling distribution as noted on Construction Drawings.
g. Grounding of all racks, raceway and equipment.
h. Power for the telecommunication rooms.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work shall be as specified herein and it shall be neat and orderly installation. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative.
B. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable.
C. Installation shall be accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), TIA/EIA, IEEE, IEC, state codes, local codes, and requirements of the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
D. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMAIEC, TIA/EIA and IEEE Standards.
E. Each item shall be NRTL tested and listed.
F. The system provider must:
1. Provide equipment from manufacturers for which they maintain a contract,
distributorship, are an agent, or other formal arrangement for which documentation can be produced showing authority to sell and service the equipment in this territory.
2. Demonstrate that they have successfully installed these systems, utilizing their standard products, for a period of five (5) years.
3. Maintain a service organization to provide both normal and emergency service. Emergency service must be available 24 hours per day; 365 days per year and staff must be adequate to respond within two (2) hours of an emergency call.
4. Maintain adequate spare parts inventory to provide both normal and emergency service.
5. Employ service technicians who are trained in accordance with the systems
manufacturer's recommendations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
6. Own and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the required test equipment, tools,
etc. for the proper installation, set-up, testing and maintenance of the system. If requested, must provide a listing of tools and/or equipment and where appropriate, certifications in the proper training and use of the tools and/or
equipment.
7. Provide all system programming to deliver a customized system to the Owner ready for use.
a. All system programming is to be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. If after preliminary use of the system, and/or training, the increased understanding of the system's features and capabilities necessitates reprogramming to any extent, it is to be performed at no additional cost.
b. System shall be reprogrammed three months after occupancy/system turn over to incorporate all Owner desired modifications.
8. Any system being extended or connected to an existing system shall be tested for
full functionality prior to beginning work and at the completion.
G. Contractor Qualifications:
1. This Contractor shall be a certified installer for the proposed equipment/system
manufacturer(s) and be Panduit and Corning certified ITS Installer 2, Copper and Optical Fiber and shall be certified to terminate indicated fiber connectors.
2. The cable installer shall provide documentation and references from three (3)
similar installations installed within the previous two (2) years within a 60 mile radius.
H. Installer Qualifications:
1. Cabling installer must have personnel certified by Panduit and Corning on staff.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following in a single clear and organized submittal. Package shall be submitted as specified in:
1. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all system components.
2. Detailed description of system operation.
3. Itemized list of all features and functions.
4. Dimensioned drawings of all system control cabinets and layouts for all equipment rooms.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
5. Wiring diagrams showing typical connections for equipment.
6. Contractor certification and qualifications.
7. Riser diagrams showing all components, devices and interconnecting cable types.
8. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have been
installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one (1) year.
9. Warranty information.
10. System test reports.
11. Provide scaled elevation and plan drawings indicating walls, data racks, patch panels, wire management, cable trays, power strips, door swing, etc. for each cable closet/room.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete and fully operational state of the art Local Area Network (LAN) system as described herein and indicated on the contract documents. Include any and all interface equipment to supply a complete network with complete equipment connections
necessary to form a complete "turnkey" network system as outlined in these specifications.
B. The complete system shall include, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Equipment cabinets and racks. 2. Patch panels and patch cables. 3. Wire management.
4. Fiber optic backbone cabling. 5. Horizontal cabling. 6. Modular jacks, backboxes and faceplates. 7. Terminations and testing. 8. Raceways, pathways, cable tray, sleeves, pull boxes. 9. Firestopping. 10. Router. 11. Core switch. 12. Edge switches. 13. Fringe switches. 14. UPS units.
15. Wireless Network System. 16. Fiber adapters and downlinks. 17. Training and system programming.
C. Owner shall provide the network electronics.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
1.5 WARRANTY
A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of fifteen (15) years as a complete end-to-end system.
B. Network equipment is provided by Owner.
C. Make available an extended warranty to the customer.
D. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system.
E. Contractor to submit cable records to Panduit for warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLE
A. Category 6 UTP Cable:
1. Initially, the manufacturer shall perform qualification tests on each cable. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 Permanent Link Transmission Performance standard prior to shipment.
2. Date of Manufacture: Cable shall be a maximum of one (1) year old, from date
of manufacture when installed.
3. Cable shall have a ripcord.
4. Cable shall be non-plenum rated, 4 pair, 100 OHM, 23 AWG.
5. Cable shall meet all requirements of FCC 68, the latest revision of the TIA/EIA 568B-C.2 and Addenda.
6. Cable shall have blue colored thermoplastic jacket with overall diameter not to
exceed 0.365 in.
7. The cable pulling tension shall be rated for 25 pounds minimum.
8. Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend radius of 1.0 in. at -20ºC without insulation cracking.
9. Cable shall be color coded in accordance with the latest revision of the TIA/EIA T568 polarization sequence.
10. Cable shall not exceed maximum length of 90 meters.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
11. Provide a printed report documenting testing based on ANSI/TIA 568 C.2 testing
at 250 MHz. The following are the minimum values associated with the cable for a 100 meter length.
a. Less than 21.000 ohm per 100 m DC loop resistance.
b. Return loss > 20.0 dB.
c. Insertion Loss < 31.1 dB/100M.
d. Near end cross talk (NEXT)> 35.3 dB (43.4 dB).
e. Power Sum - near end cross talk (PS-NEXT)> 41.0 dB.
f. Attention to cross talk ratio (ACRF) > 16.2 dB (24.8 dB).
g. Power Sum - Attenuation to cross talk ratio (PSACRF) > 13.2 dB (21.8 dB).
h. DC resistance unbalance between any two (2) conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3%.
i. The capacitance unbalance of any pair to ground shall not exceed 33.0pF.
j. Delay < 490 ns.
k. Delay skew < 44 ns.
l. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568.B.2 Category 6 compliant. The cable
shall be tested and characterized by the manufacturer.
12. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Panduit Genspeed 6000
b. Berk-Tek Lanmark 1000 c. Comm Scope - Systimax 1071E
B. Augmented Category 6A UTP Cable:
1. Initially, the manufacturer shall perform qualification tests on each cable. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 standard prior to shipment.
2. Date of Manufacture: Cable shall be a maximum of one (1) year old, from date of manufacture when installed.
3. Cable shall have a ripcord.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 7
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
4. Cable shall be non-plenum rated, 4 pair, 100 OHM, 23 AWG.
5. Cable shall meet all requirements of FCC 68, the latest revision of the TIA/EIA 568B-C.2 and Addenda.
6. Cable shall have blue colored thermoplastic jacket with overall diameter not to
exceed .215 in. x .290 in.
7. Pulling tension shall be rated for 25 pounds minimum.
8. Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend radius of 1.2 in. at -20ºC without insulation cracking.
9. Cable shall be color coded in accordance with the latest revision of the TIA/EIA T568A polarization sequence.
10. Cable shall not exceed maximum length of 90 meters.
11. Provide a printed report documenting testing based on ANSI/TIA 568-C.2 tested at 500 MHz. Testing parameters as follows:
a. Less than 21.0 ohm per 100 m DC resistance.
b. Return loss > 10.0 dB/100m at 500 MHz.
c. Insertion loss < 43.8 dB/100m at 500 MHz.
d. Near end cross talk (NEXT) > 26.7 dB at 500 MHz.
e. Power Sum - near end cross talk (PS-NEXT) > 23.8 dB at 500 MHz.
f. Attenuation to cross talk ration far end (ACRF) > 10.2 dB at 500 MHz.
g. Power sum - attenuation to cross talk ratio (PS-ACRF) > 7.2 dB at 500 MZz.
h. DC resistance unbalance between any two (2) conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3%.
i. The capacitance unbalance of any pair to ground shall not exceed 65.6 pF per 100 meters.
j. Delay < 490 ns at 100MHz.
k. Delay skew < 44 ns at 100MHz.
l. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2 augmented Category 6 (Cat 6A) compliant. The cable shall be tested and characterized by the manufacture to 500 MHz.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 8
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
12. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Berk-Tek Lanmark -XTP b. Comm Scope-systimax 1091B
C. Fiber Optic Singlemode Indoor Cable:
1. Cable: 8.3 micron core of graded index glass. Cladding to have 125 micron diameter.
2. Maximum attenuation /3300 ft. for each strand of fiber in the cable at temperatures ranging from -40°C to 70°.
a. 850 nM: 3.5 dB b. 1300 nM: 1.5 dB
3. Minimum Bandwidth/3300 ft.
a. 850 nM: 160 MHz b. 1300 nM: 500 Mhz
4. Meet or exceed requirements for FDDI, and TIA/EIA 568B.
5. Six (6) strand fiber cable consisting of:
a. The fiber. b. Tight buffer. c. Thermoplastic jacket.
d. Aramid strength member. e. Outer jacket. f. Minimum Bend Radius:
1) Installation 15 x O.D. 2) Long term 10 x O.D.
g. Maximum Loading:
1) Installation 660 pounds. 2) Long term 330 pounds.
6. The cables shall be tight buffer design with all dielectric construction.
7. All horizontal fiber shall be installed in plenum rated inner duct on J hooks or EMT.
a. Raceway shall be labeled on 10 ft. centers as "Fiber Optic Cable".
8. All fibers shall be terminated with compatible connectors in patch panel as specified.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 9
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
9. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corning Cable Systems MIC clearCurve. 2.2 PATCH PANELS
A. UTP Cable Patch Panels:
1. All panels should consist of a faceplate, mounting, hardware, isolation bushings, connector assemblies and labels for all ports.
2. Provide patch panels in each enclosure or rack to which the cable is to be terminated. Patch panels shall be of the type, performance and Category to match the cabling.
3. Patch panels shall be mounted in standard 19 in. racks/cabinets.
a. Contractor shall provide Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations48-port patch panels having wiring configuration specified with insulation displacement connectors on the back and 8P8C universal modular jacks on the front. No
substitutions allowed.
b. Contractor shall provide quantity of patch panels to terminate all UTP cable. There shall be a minimum of 25% spare capacity for future
installation.
4. Jacks shall be Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations, T568A only. No substitutions allowed.
5. Panels shall have factory labels for each port.
6. All cables are to be terminated per EIA/TIA 568A standards and dressed in a neat workmanship way. Match the Owner's standard configuration.
7. Modular jacks shall be mounted on PC boards to offer low insertion and NEXT loss.
8. Provide grounding screw assembly with serrated head screw and manufacturer recommended connection to the associated rack.
9. Shall exceed EIA/TIA-568, UL1863 and FCC Part 68 performance specified.
10. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 10
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
B. Fiber Optic Patch Panels
1. Provide fiber optic rack mounted enclosure in where fiber optic cable is to be terminated.
2. Provide SC or LC connector to match existing style panel base. Provide quantity
of ports to terminate all strands of the fiber optic cable with additional 25% spare ports.
3. Shall mount in standard 19 in. rack and be constructed of 16 gauge steel and have gasketed openings and hinged door for easy access.
4. Provide wire management below and in rear of patch panel.
5. Patch panels to have modular ports with 12 minimum ports.
6. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corning b. Panduit 2.3 OUTLETS AND CONNECTORS
A. UTP Outlets/Connectors:
1. Physical Specifications:
a. Shall be 8 position connector compatible with the cable characteristics.
b. Shall be modular and snap-in to user configurable faceplates for future retrofits meeting durability requirements specified in the latest revision of the CEI/IEC standard.
c. Shall be IDC type suitable for eight 22-24 AWG wires with a gas-tight connection.
d. Each contact surface shall have at a minimum, copper alloy with 50 micro-inches gold over nickel and a minimum contact force of 100g.
e. Conductors shall be separated and aligned internally by jack comb.
f. Shall have easy to read 568A/B color scheme to prevent termination errors.
g. Wired in accordance with TIA/EIA polarization sequence specified in Patch Panel section of this specification.
h. Transmission characteristics shall meet the requirements for the UTP cabling specified.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 11
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
i. Minimum durability shall be 1000 connecting cycles.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Panduit
B. Fiber Optic Multimode Outlets/Connectors
1. Physical Characteristics:
a. Shall be SC type.
b. Shall terminate up to 125 micron fiber.
c. Shall meet dimensional criteria of the latest revision of ANSI/EIA/TIA.
d. Typical outlet box shall be sized to insure minimum bend radius and store 1 meter of two strand fiber cable.
2. Transmission Characteristics:
a. Maximum loss of 0.3 dB per pair.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Panduit CS type.
2.4 COLOR CODING
A. Cable outer jacket shall follow the color coding scheme as follows. Jacket color shall be continuous. Patch cords shall match the cabling.
B. Copper Cable:
1. Data Communication:
a. Category 6 - Blue
b. Category 6A - Green
2. Voice Communication:
a. Category 6 - Blue b. Category 6A - Green
3. Wireless Network - Green
4. Paging - White
5. Security/Access - Indigo
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 12
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
C. Fiber Optic Cable:
1. Backbone Cabling:
a. Single Mode - Yellow
2. Horizontal Cabling:
a. Single Mode - X 2.5 CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. All racks are to be provided with cable management hardware to insure a neat, functional system when complete. Racks shall as a minimum, include the following:
1. PVC construction; duct fingers to manage cabling; color to match enclosure.
B. All racks shall have 8 in. wide vertical full height cable management, including cover, front and rear, on both sides of the rack.
C. All racks shall have 2RU space horizontal full width cable management, front and rear, above and below each patch panel and piece of equipment.
D. Cabinets shall have 1RU space horizontal panels, front and rear, above and below each patch panel and piece of equipment.
E. All data distribution frame plywood backboards shall be provided with vertical and horizontal wire management with capacities to house all possible future cabling and patch cords for a neat and orderly installation.
F. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Panduit 2.6 INNERDUCT
A. Innerduct shall be corrugated HDPE material, plenum rated, flexible, continuous, UV rated with flame/smoke spread in accordance with code and length markings on the outer surface.
B. When in conduit minimum size shall be 3/4", otherwise 1 1/2" minimum.
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Carlon 2. Maxcell 3. Opti-Com
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 13
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
2.7 LABELING
A. General:
1. Labeling system and structure shall match the Owners existing. System shall provide as built final conditions for each cable, port, panel, rack, etc. and utilize
MS Excel or approved equal documentation. Provide hard and electronic copy of labeling documentation to the Owner as part of the O and M process.
2. Each label shall contain the Telecommunication Room designated, the room number and the port number in the room. Verify color of label and size of font prior to completion. Provide samples as requested.
3. Labels shall correspond to the room/names/numbers upon completion of the project. Contractor shall not necessarily utilize existing room/names/numbers or those indicated on the blueprints.
4. Label each rack and patch panel with 1" high lettering, black on white, adhered electronically printed plastic type label with labels at top, bottom, front and back.
B. Patch Panel
1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Port numbers shall match opposite end outlet/port number.
C. Outlets
1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Labels shall be installed in a workman-like manner and fit completely in the recessed area of the labeled location.
2. Contractor shall utilize adhered labels at poke-thru locations and any other
locations that do not have a label location.
D. Cable
1. Fiber Optic:
a. Individually label fiber optic cables at each termination point indicating building, destination room, rack number, panel number, port number, strand number and strand color.
b. Each strand color shall match a specific fiber termination number in each closet, i.e. blue - fiber 1, orange - fiber 2, green - fiber 3, etc.
c. Cable label shall be adhered electronically printed plastic type with cable designation fully visible.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 14
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
2. Copper
a. Specifically label cables at each termination point indicating the building, destination room, rack number, panel number and port number.
2.8 UTP CABLE TESTER
A. Provide one (1) Fluke DSX 5000 tester or approved equal. Provide adapters for specified cables. Turn over to owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Cable:
1. Provide a minimum of one horizontal UTP cable to each communication outlet jack from respective equipment/telecommunications room patch panel as called for. Quantity of data jacks equals minimum quantity of UTP cables (typical).
2. Provide a minimum of one (1) pair (6 strands) of single-mode fiber optic cable to each fiber jack from respective equipment/telecommunications room as called for. Quantity of fiber jacks equals minimum quantity of 6 strand cables (typical).
3. All risers, and wiring concealed in walls or soffits, shall be installed in metal conduits.
4. All cable above accessible ceilings shall be installed in cable tray.
5. Provide wire management and Velcro cable wraps every 12 inches throughout closets. Provide Velcro cable wraps every 24 in. elsewhere.
6. Wiring/cabling shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. If the manufacturer recommends larger wire sizes, they shall be provided. However, smaller sizes or lower cable categories are not acceptable.
7. All Contract Documents are schematic. The system supplier shall incorporate their wiring requirements on the system drawings. The Contractor in conjunction with the system manufacturer shall be responsible for complete wiring
requirements and conduit sizes.
8. Install UTP cable in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 568 standards.
9. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all cables that do not pass required bandwidth and throughput tests.
10. All raceways and closets shall be installed in accordance with latest revision of
TIA/EIA-569.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 15
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
11. All cables shall be labeled in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 606 and
these specifications.
12. All horizontal cables shall be terminated in patch panels at the distribution frames, and at the UTP jack at the telecommunications outlet.
13. Maximum length shall be 90 meters.
B. Fiber Optic Cable:
1. Terminate backbone fiber cables in rack mounted patch panels at both ends.
2. Terminate horizontal fiber cables in patch panels at the distribution frame and at the telecommunications outlet or other.
3. Adhere to all manufacturer bend radius recommendations.
C. Terminations:
1. All terminations shall be made by a manufacturer's trained representative.
2. Use termination kits for fiber and UTP that are approved by the manufacturer of the cable.
3. All backbone cable shall be terminated in a patch panel and all connections
between horizontal and backbone cables shall be through cross connect cable.
D. Equipment and Devices:
1. Install all devices where shown on drawings. Provide all necessary conduit
outlet boxes, junction boxes, supports, etc. Verify all required box sizes with the system supplier and coordinate with bending radius needs. All devices shall be modular for future moves and changes.
2. Install all equipment in specified 19 in. racks/cabinets leaving minimum 30 in. of access space on sides and back of rack and 36 in. in front of rack.
3. Provide all power outlets and plug strips required for system operation but not shown on plans.
E. Raceways:
1. Minimum size raceway shall be 1 in.
2. Minimum backbox size for telecommunications outlet locations shall be two-gang with raised cover; no single-gang boxes allowed.
3. Provide no greater than 180° in bends without pull box in any raceway.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 16
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
F. Data Network Ground System:
1. Provide grounding system for all equipment rooms and telecommunication rooms as called for in Specification Section 260526.
G. Telecommunications Rooms:
1. Provide 3/4 in. x 4 ft. high continuous plywood backboard with two (2) coats of medium gray fireproof paint in telecommunications rooms.
2. Coordinate with other trades to avoid services being installed above telecommunications racks.
3.2 TESTING
A. Copper Cable: System supplier shall channel test end-to-end each permanent link connection using latest 200 MHz for Cat 6 and 500 MHz for Cat 6A 1000 Mbps IEEE testing procedure. Tester must conform to the latest standards at the time of testing not time of bid and be Fluke DTX-5000 with latest software version, or approved equal. Testing shall be performed by a technician trained with the specific testing equipment. Testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative.
B. Fiber Optic Cable: Provide an OTDR test for all fiber optic cable and connections per latest IEEE and ANSI accepted procedures. Test shall utilize Fluke Opti Fiber Pro OTDR.
C. Replace any cables and connectors that do not meet or exceed standards referenced and stated herein and then tested. Testing shall be end-to-end / port-to-port for each cable.
D. Test equipment shall be in good condition and working order, calibrated within one year
of its use and utilize leads without twisting and kinks. Unit calibration shall be in accordance with Level III Field Tester per ANSI/TIA 1152.
E. A representative of the end-user will select a random sample of 5% of the installed links. The representative (or his authorized delegate) shall test these randomly selected links. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the end-user representative shall repeat 100% testing at no additional cost. Cables and connectors that do not pass shall be replaced and retested until acceptable results are obtained.
F. Test Reporting:
1. The field testing shall be accurately documented for submission, inclusion in
O&M Manuals and for Owner future use.
2. Test reports shall include data directory table cross-referencing room numbers and cable numbers with the test report. Post copies of directory at
telecommunications room location.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 17
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
3. Report shall utilize electronic Windows based documenting with a hard and
electronic copy provided to the Owner.
4. The report documentation for each cable test shall include the following as a minimum:
a. Project name.
b. Test equipment manufacturer and model number, and last calibration date.
c. Date and time of the test.
d. Patch panel identification.
e. Cable identification.
f. Cable type.
g. Pass/Fail: Pass indicating meeting or exceeding the identified criteria or standard (whichever more stringent) for all parameters. Fail indicating test not meeting identified criteria for one or more parameters.
h. Test pass criteria.
i. Cable length.
j. Propagation delay and attainable bandwidth.
k. List of tested parameters with test and allowable values. Any failed
parameters shall be noted or highlighted.
3.3 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION
A. Provide brief overview of system of instruction to Owner personnel regarding system set
up configuration and management. Training shall be sufficient for the Owner to understand the system operation, components, configuration, functions, testing and troubleshooting. All Owner questions shall be answered.
B. Training agenda (estimated duration, intent, specifications to be covered) shall be submitted for approval prior to the training. A finalized agenda shall be issued to the Owner and construction representative one (1) week minimum prior to the scheduled training. Owner's comments shall be incorporated and agenda redistributed prior to the training.
C. Two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic (pdf) copy of the training materials shall be provided.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00- 18
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-272100-LOCALAREANETWORKSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
D. Provide updated cable schedule and redline/as-built during training and instruction period
2-3 weeks prior to occupancy.
3.4 WARRANTY
A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of fifteen (15) years as a
complete end-to-end system.
B. Network equipment is provided by Owner.
C. Make available an extended warranty to the customer.
D. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system.
END OF SECTION 27 21 00
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 1
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
SECTION 28 31 03 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the
expansion of the existing fire alarm system and related Work required in these Contract Documents.
B. Provide system as approved by local Fire Marshal and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). System materials and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device
ratings, dimensions, etc. correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable.
B. Installation shall be accordance with NFPA 70, NFPA 72, (National Fire Alarm Code), AHS Installer shall be certified in the State of New York for fire alarm installation. state codes, local codes, and requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.
C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA, NFPA, UL and IEEE Standards.
D. Contractor shall be a licensed fire alarm installer in the State of New York.
E. Items specified for the fire alarm are to match the existing system and to maintain one fire alarm system in the facility. No other makes will be specified.
1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The existing fire alarm panel shall have its capabilities extended to provide coverage for renovation if required. The zones of the existing panel are to be determined during a pre-test to confirm capacities.
B. The following work is proposed:
1. Pre-test of the system to confirm there is adequate capacities on the circuits in the
area of work, prior to installing new devices.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 2
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
2. Provide smoke detectors, heat detectors and manual stations in the building.
Provide the additional modules required to the existing fire alarm control panel.
3. Provide audio-visual and visual only devices in the existing building utilizing existing strobe circuits to support additional devices.
4. Refer to Appendix A for operation/sequence of matrix.
C. Before any work is accomplished on the existing system, a thorough testing shall be done on the system to conform to NFPA 72. A test report shall be completed and submitted to the engineers for review. Once the preliminary testing is found to be acceptable, work can proceed on the existing system. An additional test will be performed after the work is complete.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a complete system submittal prior to ordering of equipment and installation including but not limited to:
1. Complete equipment list, including quantities.
2. Catalog descriptive literature for all equipment. This shall include a description
of the unit, ratings, functions, capability, materials and compatibility with other components.
3. Riser Wiring Diagram showing all equipment, devices, device addresses,
connections, control connections, remote notification connection(s), wire quantities and sizes.
4. Floor plan indicating equipment and device locations, addresses, power circuit
information with power panel location, notification circuiting, initiation circuiting, control circuiting and any system applicable building characteristics (ceiling heights, structural members impeding detection, etc). Contact the Engineer for an electronic copy of the project floor plans. Engineer logo shall be included in final drawing.
5. Typical Terminal Wiring Diagram for each type of device.
6. Terminal wiring Diagram for all Fire Alarm equipment.
7. Calculations including:
a. Battery sizing calculations indicating total number of power devices, load associated with each type device, backup period and recommended battery capacity (AH).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 3
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
b. Voltage drop calculations with actual equipment loads used to derive
battery back-up ampere-hour rating and individual circuit voltage drop (indicate the wire size to be used and the associated voltage drop with the allowed voltage drop) for each circuit.
8. Complete console enclosure and equipment configuration.
9. Contractor shall submit copies of the installation firms' license for approval and post a copy of license on the premises where the work is being performed.
a. Work involving installation of Fire Alarm system components shall be performed by firms currently licensed by the NYS department of State Division of Licensing Services. The supervising personnel shall be NICET level 2 certified.
10. Test reports as called for.
11. Copies of the firm alarm installation firm's current license. The contractor shall also post a copy of the license on the premises where work is being performed.
B. If required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) provide a submission of all
requested information for review and comment by the AHJ. All AHJ comments shall be incorporated and resubmitted until approved.
C. Test reports at the completion of the project. Testing shall be of all system devices,
equipment, circuits, features and functions.
D. Provide submittal to Dan Philips at Cornell EH&S and Ithaca Fire Department for review and comment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MODIFICATIONS TO THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A. Provide the necessary initiation modules for the additional devices required. Each individual function shall be provided by solid state plug-in panels or modules. Removal of any plug-in module shall cause a trouble signal to sound. New end of line resistors shall be located per the existing system. Provide supplementary control modules as required and shown by riser diagram for control of magnetic door holders, duct smoke dampers, fan shutdown.
B. Provide separate visible and audible alarm, trouble and supervisory indication for each circuit.
C. Make: Modules and equipment shall match existing Honeywell E3 Series. No substitute,
no equal.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 4
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
2.2 MANUAL STATIONS
A. Semi-flush non-coded type. Break glass, "pull-down" type, double action. Indoor construction. Bright red finish. Key lock for test and reset.
B. Unless directly connected to a central station alarm service, municipal alarm system or
local manned fire alarm dispatch station, a clearly legible sign shall be posted above each manual station stating: "LOCAL ALARM ONLY - NOT CONNECTED TO FIRE DEPARTMENT - CALL FIRE DEPARTMENT BY TELEPHONE."
2.3 AUTOMATIC THERMAL DETECTORS
A. Low profile, white colored, surface mounted on flush box. Equip with mounting plate. Replaceable fixed temperature elements; visual indicator for tripped mode. Provide combination rate-of-rise (15°F per minute) fixed temperature 135°F, fixed temperature 135°F, or fixed temperature 200°F as shown on the Drawings.
2.4 PHOTO-OBSCURATION SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Detectors shall operate on the photoelectronic principle. Provide detectors with an integral fixed temperature heat detector rated at 135°F. Upon activation, the detector
shall operate its associated alarm circuit and illuminate the integral alarm indicator light. The alarm indicator light shall not extinguish until the Fire Alarm Control Panel has been reset. The detector shall contain a solid state LED and a high speed light sensing
photodiode within the smoke sensing chamber. The photodiode shall accelerate the LED light burst rate when smoke enters the chamber. An alarm shall be activated when several consecutive pulses verify the existence of smoke. Reset shall be accomplished at
the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Provide lock-in feature. Provide a calibrated test feature capable of simulating a maximum acceptable amount of smoke for alarm. Detectors shall operate from a nominal 10 to 30 volt DC power supply. Detectors shall be designed for twistlock mounting to a separate base assembly. Provide backbox suitable for surface mounting where required. Detector shall be UL 268 listed and FM approved.
2.5 LIGHT UNIT
A. 24 volts DC with built-in Xenon Flasher; two watts maximum. Pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with maximum duty cycle of 40%. Candela intensity minimum shall be 75 candela in general areas, 110 candela in sleeping areas or shall be as shown on the drawings. Flash rate minimum 1 Hz, maximum 2 Hz. Units shall have taps for adjusting candela rating. Units within building shall flash in synchronization and this includes new
and existing devices being synchronized. Protruding pyramid shaped lexan lens with reflector and the word "FIRE" imprinted on the lens. Rated life shall be a minimum 500 hours of continuous operation. Indoor construction. Flush single gang box, wall or
ceiling mounted as noted on the drawings. Shall be white in color.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 5
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
2.6 COMBINATION HORN-LIGHT UNITS
A. 24 volts DC with built-in Xenon Flasher; two watts maximum. Pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with maximum duty cycle of 40%. Candela intensity minimum shall be 75 candela in general areas, 110 candela in sleeping areas or shall be as shown on the
drawings. Flash rate minimum 1 Hz, maximum 2 Hz. Units shall have taps for adjusting candela rating. Units within building shall flash in synchronization and this includes new and existing devices being synchronized.. Single unit combination horn and light, with protruding pyramid shaped lexan lens with reflector and the word "FIRE" imprinted on the lens. Horn shall be rated 100 dB at 10 ft. Surface or flush box as noted on the drawings. Indoor construction. Shall be white in color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, EQUIPMENT
A. All installations shall be accomplished in a professional manner by qualified personnel regularly engaged in and experienced in this type of Work. Fire alarm installation shall be directed by a person who possesses a state license for installation of fire alarm
systems. All equipment and components shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. System junction boxes and surface mounted device boxes shall be painted red.
C. Provide all wiring to duct smoke detectors. Duct smoke detectors shall be mounted on the ventilating ductwork by others. All mounting arrangements, holes cut into ductwork, sealing of openings along with ceiling and access doors for the duct type detectors shall
be provided by others. Provide duct detectors along with sampling tubes with end caps. Sequence smoke damper operation thirty seconds after its associated fan has been shut down. Duct detector shall report as supervisory alarm at FACP.
D. Provide all wiring required for fan shutdown. Wire from the addressable control module for each fan to be shut down and provide wiring from the module to the fan control unit (starter, adjustable speed drive, etc). Dry contact shall be wired ahead of all control functions for starters. Provide intermediate relay for control circuits beyond the rating of the control module.
E. Detection and initiating equipment shall be listed by NRTL and approved by FM.
F. All surface mounted devices shall be mounted on a special box furnished by fire alarm equipment manufacturer. Total assembly shall be secure, smooth contour and have no
protrusions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 6
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
G. Where detectors are installed on wood or masonry surfaces, attach brackets directly to the
surface with tamperproof fasteners. Where detectors are installed on suspended ceilings, provide additional supports in the ceiling, such as channel support system, angle iron or additional runner bars. Fasten the additional supports rigidly to the ceiling runner bar
system. Attach bracket to the supports with tamperproof fasteners. Install metal spacers between the bracket and supports so that the ceiling tiles will not be a part of the support system.
H. Install wall mounted audio/visual signal devices at 80 in. AFF to bottom. Where ceiling types are called for, verify ceiling type and mounting height in the field. Provide pendant-mounted devices as required for specified mounting height.
I. An auxiliary fire alarm relay used to control an emergency control device that provides control functions described in this specification shall be located within 3 ft. of the emergency control device and all wiring shall be supervised.
J. All smoke detectors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise. All such Work shall be performed by an authorized representative of the
manufacturer trained in such procedures.
K. All wiring shall conform to N.E.C. Articles 725 and 760, and to NFPA-72, "National Fire Alarm Code".
L. Label all fire alarm devices and system components (major equipment, conduit, junction boxes and cabling) according to the Cornell Standard 16710 and 283100.
3.2 SYSTEM CIRCUITING
A. All wiring shall conform to the NEC, and to NFPA-72, National Fire Alarm Code.
B. Install all wiring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations taking into account loading, intended location, circuit length, spare capacity and voltage drop.
C. All wiring shall be copper and installed in a dedicated/segregated red EMT conduit system.
D. Power circuits:
1. Provide the required quantity of 20 ampere, 120 volt circuits to the system with a minimum of one for the FACP.
E. Provide minimum #18 AWG twisted shielded pair for addressable signal line circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be#14AWG minimum.
F. Addressable signal line circuits shall be NFPA 72 2010 Class A (redundant, single open
operation).
G. Notification appliance circuits shall be NFPA 72 - 2010 Class A (redundant, single open operation).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 7
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
H. Provide a 24VDC power circuit, #16 twisted pair minimum, with each initiation
addressable circuit for the entire length.
I. Notification circuits shall be segregated as indicated on the drawings and by individual floors as a minimum. Circuits shall also be dedicated to audible or visual appliances but
not both.
3.3 PROGRAMMING
A. Include in bid the cost to cover all system programming, including items particular to this project (such as custom zone descriptions, time delay settings, sensitivity settings, etc.) such that entire system is 100% complete and operating to the Owner's satisfaction. Coordinate all system programming with the Owner. Also, provide programming of the system a minimum of once during the warranty period to provide changes requested by the Owner.
3.4 TESTING AND INSTRUCTION
A. The complete fire alarm system shall be fully tested after the installation is complete. Testing shall include all devices, FACP, annunciator panel, other panels, features and
functions. Testing shall be witnessed by the owners representative and be in accordance with the NFPA and herein. Provide a testing report to the authority having jurisdiction and the Engineer as a submittal.
B. Provide a minimum of 2 hours of instruction to the operating personnel designated by the Owner's Representative with regard to use and operation of the system. Provide up to three programming modifications.
C. Provide three sets of keys to all panels, manual stations, etc., to the Owner's Representative.
D. Provide a copy of the system programming to the Owner on a CD/DVD disk or flash drive.
E. Provide to the Owner system Operation Manuals as specified, that shall include as a minimum.
1. Bill of Material.
2. Catalog descriptive literature for all equipment. This shall include a description of the unit, ratings, functions, capability, materials and compatibility with other components.
3. Riser Wiring Diagram showing all equipment, devices, device addresses,
connections, control connections, remote notification connection(s), wire quantities and sizes.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 03 - 8
Corson Hall Rm E136-E142A Lab Renovation FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - EXISTING HARDWIRED SYSTEM
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
4. Floor plan indicating equipment and device locations, addresses, power circuit
information with power panel location, notification circuiting, initiation circuiting and control circuiting. Contact the Engineer for a copy of the project floor plans.
5. Typical Terminal Wiring Diagram for each type of device.
6. Terminal wiring Diagram for all Fire Alarm equipment.
7. Calculations including:
a. Battery sizing calculations indicating total number of power devices, load associated with each type device and recommended battery capacity (AH).
b. Voltage drop calculations with actual equipment loads used to derive battery back-up ampere-hour rating and individual circuit voltage drop (indicate the wire size to be used and the associated voltage drop with the allowed voltage drop) for each circuit.
8. Instruction report starting when instruction was given and who was in attendance,
signed by Owner's Representative.
9. A written test report from an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer that each device and overall system operation has been 100% tested
and approved.
10. Certificate of Completion as described in NFPA-72.
11. A two year warranty in accordance with the Basic Requirements of these
Specifications shall be provided for this system.
12. All devices shall be pre-tested by the contractor and distributor prior to scheduling final acceptance test with AHJ and EH&S.
13. Final test to be done with AHJ and EH&S present.
APPENDIX A
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM OPERATION/SEQUENCE MATRIX
M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.01 / 200311
\\ROCFILE2\ROCH_PROJECTS\2020\20-0300\200311\DESIGN\SPECS\ELEC\200311-283103-FIREALARMSYSTEM-EXISTINGHARDWIREDSYSTEM.DOC May 7, 2021
WARNING - THIS IS NOT SET UP FOR SMOKE EVAC SYSTEMS; HIGH RISES NOT APPLICABLE ON ALL PROJECTS.
System Outputs
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK